Division 13 Aquatic Specification

ZULAL WELLNESS RESORT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
This section includes the minimum Performance and Design Requirements for Swimming Pools, Spa
Pools, Hot Tubs, Decorative Waterfalls, Fountains and Salt Water Lagoons. These requirements include the
following:
1.
Acceptable Bather Load Limits
2.
Acceptable Flow Rates and Pipe Velocities
3.
Required Turnover Rates
4.
Acceptable Filter Flow Rates
5.
Design Requirements for Bottom Drains
6.
Design Requirements for Skimmers & Gutters
7.
Design Requirements for Floor and Wall Inlet Jets
8.
Design Requirements for Hydrotherapy Jets
9.
Design Requirements for Salt Water Lagoon Fill System
10. Design Requirements for Salt Water Lagoon Overflow System

11. Design Requirements for Sea Water Intake Wells
12. Lighting and Grounding Requirements
13. Minimum Reinforcing Requirements and Water/Cement Ratios
14. Design Requirements for Sloping the Pool Floor & Walls
15. Minimum Requirements for Salt Water Salinity Control
16. Minimum Requirements for Balance Tanks and Backwash Tanks
17. Minimum Chemical Dosing Requirements
18. Minimum Shop Drawing Submittal Requirements
B.
This document does not include specifications for equipment and materials. Refer to Related Sections for
specific equipment and material requirements.
C.
Related Sections:
1.
SECTION 13 1305 WATER FEATURE ACCESSORIES
2.
SECTION 13 1401 WATER FEATURE PIPE AND FITTINGS
3.
SECTION 13 1404 WATER FEATURE WHITE GOODS
4.
SECTION 13 1502 WATER FEATURE PUMPS AND MOTORS
5.
SECTION 13 1503 WATER FEATURE FILTERS
6.
SECTION 13 1504 WATER FEATURE CHEMICAL FEED SYSTEMS
7.
SECTION 13 1505 WATER FEATURE OZONE GENERATION AND INJECTION
8.
SECTION 13 1507 WATER FEATURE HEATERS
9.
SECTION 13 1510 WATER FEATURE HEAT EXCHANGERS
10. SECTION 13 1511 WATER FEATURE VALVES, GAUGES, AND METERS

11. SECTION 13 1512 WATER FEATURE COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEMS
Appendix D Water Feature Specification

C2 - Construction Issue
04 February 2016
13 100/ 1
Hyder Consulting Middle East Limited

13 100WATER FEATURE PERFORMANCE STANDARD
12. SECTION 13 1601 WATER FEATURE GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS

13. SECTION 13 1608 WATER FEATURE LIGHTING AND CONTROL
14. SECTION 13 1609 WATER FEATURE DISCONNECTS, MCC, AND STARTERS
15. SECTION 13 1610 WATER FEATURE ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES
16. SECTION 13 1611 WATER FEATURE GROUNDING
1.2
REFERENCES
A.
1.3
Applicable Standards: The following standards are referenced herein.

1.
PVC Pipe Institute
2.
Uniform Swimming Pool, Spa, & Hot Tub Code
3.
ANSI/NSF International Standard 50 Circulation System Components and Related Materials for
Swimming Pool, Spas/Hot Tubs
4.
NFPA 70 National Electrical Code (NEC)
5.
ASME/APSP-16 a.k.a. the Virginia Graeme Baker Pool and Spa Safety Act
6.
2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design
DEFINITIONS
A.
Bathing Load: The maximum number of persons allowed in the pool, spa or hot tub at one time
B.
Balance Tank: A reservoir, open to the atmosphere, from which the recirculation pump takes suction,
which receives the gravity flow from the main drain and surface overflow system
C.
Makeup Water: Replacement water removed from the pool by bather drag out, splashing, evaporation, and
filter backwash
D.
NTU: Nephelometric Turbidity Unit which is a means of measuring water clarity
E.
Perimeter Overflow Gutter: A level trough or ledge around the inside perimeter of the pool containing
drains to clean the pool water surface
F.
Pool Floor: The interior pool bottom surface, which consists of that area from a horizontal plan up to a
maximum of a 45-degree slope
G.
slope
H.
Pool Wall: The interior poolside surface, which consists of that area from a vertical plane to a 45-degree
Pool Turnover: The circulation of the entire pool volume through the filter system
I.
Recirculation System: The system of piping and mechanical equipment designed to remove the water from
the pool filter, disinfect, and return it to the pool
J.
Water Quality: The bacteriological and chemical analysis of the pool water that meets the minimum
potable water standards as established by the United States Environmental Protection Agency
K.
Wet Deck Area: A 1.2m wide unobstructed pool deck area around the outside of the pool water perimeter,
curb, ladders, handrails, waterfalls, water features, planters, starting blocks, or lifeguard chairs
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
SECTION 01 3300 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
B.
Submit Shop Drawings indicating layout and piping plans for swimming pools, spa pools, lagoons, and
fountains. Drawings to be accurate and precise showing all pertinent information as indicated in this specification.
Drawings to be signed and sealed by a professional engineer having an active license within the jurisdiction of the
project.

04 February 2016
13 100/ 2

C.
Submit Mechanical Shop Drawings indicating mechanical equipment layout and equipment room piping. A
process diagram indicating the treatment and circulation of all water features shall also be submitted as a shop
drawing. All drawings to be accurately drawn including all mechanical equipment shown at actual size and
dimensions
D.
Submit Electrical Shop Drawings indicating power loads, one-line diagrams, and controls for all
mechanical equipment
E.
Submit Shop Drawing details showing the construction of all edges, inlets drains, skimmers, handrails,
grounding, lights, methods of waterproofing, finishes, etc.
F.
Submit Shop Drawings indicating layout and piping plans for swimming pools, spa pools, kiddy pools and
fountains. Drawings to be accurate and precise showing all pertinent information as indicated in this specification
1.5
WARRANTY
A.
Contractors Warranty: Contractor shall warrant the feature against defects caused by faulty workmanship
or materials for a minimum period of one (1) year from Date of Substantial Completion. The warranty will cover all
surfaces, sub-surfaces, equipment, piping, valves, etc. and will bind the contractor to repair, at his expense, all
defects.
1.6
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
Swimming Pool, Spa, & Hot Tub systems include the pool shell, piping, mechanical and electrical
equipment necessary to hold, circulate, filter, and treat the water to provide a safe aesthetic environment for
bathers and guest to interact with the water element. This includes any waterfalls or fountains that are directly
related to the pool.
B.
Salt Water Lagoon systems include the lagoon shell, piping, mechanical and electrical equipment
necessary to hold, circulate, filter, and treat the water to provide a safe and aesthetic environment for bathers and
guests to interact with the water element. This includes any waterfalls or fountains that are directly related to the
pool.
1.7
POOL DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

A.
B.
C.
D.
Pool bather load shall be determined as follows:

1.
Pool depth greater than one (1) meter (3 ft): 1 person per every 2.5 sq. m (25 sq. ft)
2.
Pool depth less than one (1) meter (3 ft): 1 person per every 1.5 sq. m (15 sq. ft)
Pool Recirculation Systems:

1.
Pool recirculation systems shall be designed to continuously operate 24 hours a day 7 days per week
2.
All pipes associated with the swimming pool, spa, or water feature shall be sized appropriately to
maintain the following pipe velocities
a.
Gravity Line: 0.6 to 0.8 m/s (2.0 to 2.5 ft/s)
b.
Direct Suction Line: 0.8 to 1.0 m/s (2.5 to 3.0 ft/s)
c.
Pressurized Discharge Pipe: maximum 1.5 m/s (5.0 ft/s)
Water Level Control:

1.
Automatic Water Makeup System shall be incorporated with each pool such that water level is
constantly maintained at an elevation suitable for continuous skimming without flooding skimmers or
gutters during periods of non-use
2.
Pool water level shall be controlled by using either skimmers or a continuous perimeter gutter.
Skimmers and Gutters shall be constructed so the lip is level within 6mm (1/4 inch) between the
highest and lowest point along the entire perimeter of the gutter.
Water Treatment System:

1.
Turnover rate of two (2) to three (3) hours is appropriate in most pools. Pools with consistently high

04 February 2016
13 100/ 3

bather loads such as slide pools and rivers shall be designed with a one (1) to two (2) hour turnover
rate. Low expected use pools may be designed for a lower turnover rate as high as four (4) to five (5)
hours. Childrens pools and spa pools shall be designed with a 30 minute turnover rate. See drawings
for specific design for each pool.
E.
F.
G.
H.
2.
The circulation system shall be designed so 100% of the filtered flow rate can be circulated through the
skimmer/gutter. Recessed Automatic Skimmers can be utilized on pools under 100 sq. m (1,000 sq. ft)
of surface area. Minimum flow rate through a Recessed Automatic Skimmer is 110 lpm (30 gpm). One
skimmer shall be provided for every 40 sq. m (400 sq. ft) of surface area. Perimeter gutter shall be
installed on all pools over 100 sq. m (1,000 sq. ft)
3.
Water Treatment Pumps shall be installed so the inlet is a minimum 0.6m (24 inches) below the
surface of the pool water. Basket strainers shall be installed on the suction side of each treatment
pump
4.
Treatment Pumps shall be designed to circulate the design volume of filtered water when the filter is in
a dirty condition. The engineer shall calculate the hydraulic losses of the system and size the pump for
the appropriate total head
5.
Filters shall be sized to handle the required circulation flow rate at the following allowable filtration
rates:
a.
High Rate Sand Filters: 36 cu. m/hr per sq. m (15 gpm/sq. ft) of filter surface area maximum
b.
Cartridge Filters: 0.8 cu. m/hr per sq. m (0.33 gpm/sq. ft) of filter surface area maximum.
Inlets and Drains

1.
All pool inlets shall be adjustable. Wall inlets being directionally adjustable and floor inlets have flow
adjustment. Maximum design flow through wall or floor inlets is 75 lpm (20 gpm)
2.
Wall inlets shall be installed a minimum of 0.3m (12 inches) below normal operating water level
3.
Floor inlets shall be spaced maximum of 5m (15 feet) and within 3m (10 feet) of the pool wall
4.
All pools shall be provided with at least two main drains in the deepest part of the pool. Drains must be
covered by a secured grating, which requires the use of a tool to remove. The open area in the grate
shall be such that the maximum velocity through the grate does not exceed 0.15 m/s (0.5 ft/s) at 100%
of the designed flow rate of the drain
Meters and Instrumentation

1.
A flow meter or flow indicator shall be installed on the return line for each pool
2.
Pressure gauges shall be installed such that discharge pressure from each pump and filter pressures
may be easily read
3.
Temperature indicators shall be installed to read pool water temperature (upstream of any heating
equipment) and the water temperature returning to the pool
Water Quality Control, Sanitation, Oxidation, and pH

1.
Ozone generation and injection shall be utilized for its superior sanitation and oxidation performance.
Ozone is sized based on the anticipated bather load and total water volume to be treated. Ozone shall
be controlled by ORP, separately from the chemical residual ORP
2.
Residual Sanitizer (Chlorine) and pH (Acid) adjustment shall be accomplished by the use of a
Chemical Controller and Automatic Feeder System for each pool. Chemical containment tanks should
be combined into common storage for all pool systems within each given mechanical space
Pool System Automation

1.
An automation system shall be incorporated into each mechanical room to monitor system
performance and allow operations to control functions, such as filter backwash, chemical dosing, water
level, safety interlocks, and pool temperature
2.
The automation system shall monitor water chemistry parameters and temperature history for each
pool and log these for facility records and reporting to the local health department or ministry as

04 February 2016
13 100/ 4

required
3.
I.
J.
K.
Pool automation system shall interface with ride control systems providing mutual interlocks for guest
safety.
Access:
1.
Each pool shall have means of accessible entry/exit (stair, ladder, or recessed treads) within every
25m (75 feet) of the pool perimeter. A minimum of two accessible entries shall be installed in each pool
and located to serve both ends of the pool
2.
Stair access into the pool shall have a tread length of 3m (10 feet) and tread width of 0.3m (12 inches)
minimum and a maximum tread riser height of 0.25m (10 inches)
3.
Swim outs shall extend 0.5 to 0.6m (18 to 24 inches) from the pool wall and a maximum of 0.3m (12
inches) below the pool deck. Swim outs shall be provided only in areas where water depth is 1.5m (5
feet) or greater
4.
Benches shall extend 0.35 0.5m (14 18 inches) from the pool wall and shall be located in areas
where the water depth is 1.0m (3 feet) deep or less
5.
A permanent dark contrasting tile band shall be installed at the edge of each stair, swim out, or bench
6.
Handrails shall be provided for all stairs and shall be anchored in the bottom step and the deck. Grab
rails must be mounted in the pool deck at each side of recessed steps and ladders. Handrails and
Grab rails shall extend at least 0.7m (28 inches) above the step edge or pool deck.
Pool Shell Construction:

1.
Pool shells shall be constructed of concrete or shotcrete and shall be watertight, free from structural
cracks, and shall have a nontoxic smooth and slip resistant finish
2.
All pool, spa, and hot tub shells shall be constructed of a concrete/shotcrete mixture having a
water/cement ratio of 0.40 and 28-day compressive strength of 34.5 MPa (5,000 psi)
3.
Pool shells shall be steel reinforced according to the American Concrete Institute (ACI) guidelines for
watertight concrete structures
4.
Pool walls shall be within 5-degrees of vertical for a minimum depth of 0.8m (2.5 feet) from which point
the wall may join the flow with a maximum radius of 0.8m (2.5 feet)
5.
Corner intersections of walls that protrude or angle into the pool water area shall be rounded with a
minimum radius of 50mm (2 inches)
6.
Floor slopes shall be uniform. The floor shall be a maximum 1:12 slope in areas 1.5m (5 feet) or less in
depth. Floor slope shall be a maximum of 1:3 in areas more than 1.5m (5 feet) deep
7.
Transition in floor slope shall occur only when water is a minimum of 1.5m (5 feet) deep. A slope
transition must have a 50 150mm (2 to 6 inch) wide dark contrasting tile marking across the bottom
and must extend up both sides of the pool at the transition point
Pool Finishes and Markings:

1.
Finishes shall be according to architectural drawings and specifications and shall have characteristics
of reflecting rather than absorbing light.
2.
Waterline Tile shall be a minimum 150mm (6 inches) tile band installed at the waterline
3.
A contrasting tile band shall be installed at all changes in the pool floor including slope changes, stairs,
and benches.
4.
Any design or logo on the pool floor or wall shall be such that it will not hinder the detection of a human
in distress, algae, sediment, or other objects in the pool
5.
Permanent depth markers shall be placed at every 0.3m (1 foot) change in pool depth and spaced no
more than 8m (25 feet) apart. Depth markers shall be accurate within 100mm (4 inches) of actual pool
depth. Depth markers shall be located on the horizontal deck and on the vertical pool wall in the
waterline title. The text height of the marker shall be 100mm (4 inches) in height

04 February 2016
13 100/ 5

6.
L.
M.
1.8
No Diving markers are only placed on the horizontal deck and should accompany depth markers.
Lighting and Grounding

1.
Underwater lighting shall provide a minimum 5 W/sq. m (0.5 watt per sq. ft) of pool surface area based
upon incandescent light output per watt. The maximum lamp size for underwater fixtures shall be 300
Watts. Lights shall be located a minimum of 0.5m (18 inches) below water level and provide a
protection from overheating when not submerged
2.
Reinforcement shall be grounded with all metal finishes, such as light housings, handrails, etc. per the
National Electrical Code (NEC) requirements.
Special Design Requirements for Spa Pools and Hot Tubs

1.
Spa pool bather load shall not exceed one (1) person per 1.0 sq. m (10 sq. ft) of spa surface area
2.
Spa pools shall have a maximum water depth of 1.0m (3 ft and 3 inches)
3.
The floor of the spa shall have a maximum slope of 1:48 to the bottom drains
4.
The spa pool shall have a means of accessible stair entry/exit. Minimum stair length is 1.2m (4 feet).
Tread and risers shall meet the requirements above
5.
Benches shall be continuous around the perimeter of the spa with a maximum seating height of 0.5m
(20 inches) and a minimum seating height of 0.35m (14 inches) measured from the bottom of the spa.
Bench seat shall be 0.5m (18 inches) wide.
6.
A permanent dark contrasting tile band shall be installed at the front edge of the bench seat at all
changes in seating height.
SALT WATER LAGOON DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

A.
Lagoon bather load shall be determined as follows:

1.
B.
C.
D.
1 person per every 1 CMH (5 gpm)
Lagoon Recirculation Systems:

1.
Lagoon recirculation systems shall be designed to continuously operate 24 hours a day 7 days per
week
2.
All pipes associated with the lagoon shall be sized appropriately to maintain the following pipe
velocities
a.
Gravity Line: 0.6 to 0.8 m/s (2.0 to 2.5 ft/s)
b.
Direct Suction Line: 0.8 to 1.0 m/s (2.5 to 3.0 ft/s)
c.
Pressurized Discharge Pipe: maximum 1.5 m/s (5.0 ft/s)
Water Level Control:

1.
Automatic Water Makeup System shall be incorporated with each lagoon such that water level is
constantly maintained at an elevation suitable for continuous skimming without flooding skimmers or
gutters during periods of non-use
2.
Lagoon water level shall be controlled by using a continuous perimeter gutter. Gutters shall be
constructed so the lip is level within 6mm (1/4 inch) between the highest and lowest point along the
entire perimeter of the gutter.
Water Treatment System:

1.
Turnover rate of fifteen (15) to twenty (20) hours is recommended for the SPA Lagoon. Turnover rate
of five (5) to ten (10) hours is recommended for the combined Central and Swimming Lagoons. See
drawings for specific design for each lagoon
2.
The circulation system shall be designed so 65% of the total filtered flow rate can be collected and
circulated through the gutter.
3.
All skimmers and gutters shall be on direct suction with the Treatment Pump(s)

04 February 2016
13 100/ 6

4.
Water Treatment Pumps shall be installed so the inlet is a minimum 0.6m (24 inches) below the
surface of the lagoon water. Basket strainers shall be installed on the suction side of each treatment
pump
5.
Treatment Pumps shall be designed to circulate the design volume of filtered water when the filter is in
a dirty condition. The Engineer shall calculate the hydraulic losses of the system and size the pump for
the appropriate total head
6.
Filters shall be sized to handle the required circulation flow rate at the following allowable filtration
rates:
a.
E.
F.
Salinity Control:
1.
There shall be no more than 10% rise in salinity in the lagoons over natural sea water.
2.
Water from the Swimming Lagoon shall be designed with the capability to transfer as needed to the
Central Lagoon in order to maintain salinity below the acceptable limits
3.
The Central Lagoon shall be designed so that water can be discharged to the Spa Lagoon as needed
in order to maintain salinity below the acceptable limits
Groundwater Wells:
1.
G.
H.
I.
1.
All lagoon inlets shall be adjustable. Wall inlets being directionally adjustable. Maximum design flow
through wall inlets is 75 lpm (20 gpm)
2.
Wall inlets shall be installed a minimum of 0.3m (12 inches) below normal operating water level
3.
All lagoons shall be provided with at least two main drains in the deepest part of the lagoon. Drains
must be covered by a secured grating, which requires the use of a tool to remove. The open area in
the grate shall be such that the maximum velocity through the grate does not exceed 0.15 m/s (0.5 ft/s)
at 100% of the designed flow rate of the drain
Meters and Instrumentation

1.
A flow meter or flow indicator shall be installed on the return line for each lagoon
2.
Pressure gauges shall be installed such that discharge pressure from each pump and filter pressures
may be easily read
Water Quality Control, Oxidation, and pH
An automation system shall be incorporated into each mechanical room to monitor system
performance and allow operations to control functions, such as filter backwash, and water level
Access:
1.
L.
Ozone generation and injection shall be utilized for its superior sanitation and oxidation performance.
Ozone is sized based on the anticipated bather load and total water volume to be treated. Ozone shall
be controlled by ORP
Lagoon System Automation

1.
K.
Sea water wells shall be used to provide makeup water to compensate for filter backwash, evaporation
and maintain the necessary minimum water standards for discharge back to the sea.
Inlets and Drains
1.
J.
High Rate Sand Filters: 36 cu. m/hr per sq. m (15 gpm/sq. ft) of filter surface area maximum
The Swimming Lagoon shall have means of accessible entry/exit (stair, ladder, or recessed treads) on
all sides of the lagoon. A minimum of two accessible entries shall be installed and located to serve all
sides of the lagoon
Lagoon Shell Construction:

1.
Lagoon shells shall be constructed of concrete or shotcrete over a waterproof membrane layer (40 MIL
EPDM) to protect the liner and provide a nontoxic smooth and slip resistant finish
2.
All lagoon shells shall be constructed of a concrete/shotcrete mixture having a water/cement ratio of

04 February 2016
13 100/ 7

0.40 and 28-day compressive strength of 20.5 MPa (3,000 psi)
M.
3.
Lagoon shells shall be steel reinforced to prevent structural cracking. Alternatively fiber reinforced
concrete admixture may be utilized.
4.
Floor slopes shall be uniform. The floor shall be a maximum 1:12 slope in areas 1.5m (5 feet) or less in
depth. Floor slope shall be a maximum of 1:3 in areas greater than 1.5m (5 feet) deep
Lighting and Grounding

1.
Areas designed for swimming shall have underwater lighting with a minimum 5 W/sq. m (0.5 watt per
sq. ft) of water surface area based upon incandescent light output per watt. The maximum lamp size
for underwater fixtures shall be 300 Watts. Lights shall be located a minimum of 0.5m (18 inches)
below water level and provide a protection from overheating when not submerged
2.
Reinforcement shall be grounded with all metal finishes, such as light housings, handrails, etc. per the
National Electrical Code (NEC) requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS NOT USED

2.1
SUBSTITUTIONS
A.
Substitutions of equipment make and models are only allowed if the substituted equipment conforms to the
specifications and is mentioned as an approved manufacturer therein. See Related Sections in the summary of
this specification for reference to equipment specifications.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
OPERATION
A.
Manual testing of the pool water shall be performed on a daily basis immediately after water is placed in
the pool the first time. During this time, it is important to maintain a balanced water condition to prevent damage to
the pool shell, finishes, and equipment
B.
Daily records shall be kept regarding pool operation, water quality, testing chemical injection, and
balanced water chemistry
C.
The Contractor is responsible for maintaining balanced pool water and keeping daily records until the
system is formally turned over to the owner. Once the system is formally turned over, the owner is responsible for
maintaining balanced water and keeping daily records
3.2
DESIGNATION / LABELING
A.
Install plastic nameplates with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive. Apply with sufficient
adhesive to ensure permanent adhesion and seal with clear lacquer
B.
3.3
Install tags with corrosion resistant chain

CONTROLS PROGRAMMING
A.
B.
Functional Requirements
1.
Controls provide all functions described herein for each individual pool/water feature. Water Feature
Controller (WFC) includes controlling and monitoring of pumps, water filtration, chemical feed, and
lighting
2.
The Contractor shall refer to the Water Treatment Drawings to determine which pumps, filter controller,
and chemical controller are associated with a given pool, spa, or feature. The system addressed in this
specification include:
Pump Control

04 February 2016
13 100/ 8

1.
All pump controls include HAND-OFF-AUTO (HOA) selector switch as shown on the drawings at the
control center. HAND and OFF positions indicate manual control. AUTO control shall be determined by
the PLC. In no case shall the pump operate in over-ride of safety interlocks
a.
C.
2.
All pumps with Emergency Stop Controls (E-STOP) shall immediately cease operation when the ESTOP is activated. All pumps receiving water from the same feature as the pump listed above shall
also stop. The PLC shall send a fault signal to the HMI. Operation of associated pumps cannot be
continued until the activated E-STOP is reset.
3.
All feature pumps not associated with water treatment shall also have an operator adjustable timer
through the PLC to control hours of operation as set by the operator through the HMI.
Water Filtration System Control

1.
Monitor and control the Water Treatment Pumps and control the position of the Motorized (actuated)
Backwash Control Valves
2.
Operation:
a.
b.
D.
Each pump will have a Vacuum Limit Switch (VLS) that will be preset on site during construction to
meet each pumps vacuum limit when the suction is restricted. When the VLS is activated the PLC
will shut down the associated pump and send a fault signal to the Human Machine Interface (HMI)
General:
1).
Provide for MANUAL over-ride mode using the controller to sequence, but the operator shall
initiate filter backwash cycles
2).
In normal AUTO mode the controller determines when a backwash is necessary, and when
it may be allowed
Backwash Sequencing Sand Filters:

1).
Step 1 Controller monitors treatment pump operation and shuts down treatment pump(s)
when backwash is initiated.
2).
Step 2 Controller repositions each of the necessary backwash control valves to allow filter
water to flow backwards through the filter at the required flow rate to the waste piping or
drain
3).
Step 3 After the valve is repositioned, the controller restarts the treatment pump(s)
4).
Step 4 The backwash priority valve shall remain in its restricting position until all of the
filter tanks in a give grouping have been backwashed
5).
Step 5 When one tank in a filter grouping has been backwashed for a predetermined time
period the controller stops the treatment pump(s) and repositions that tanks backwash
valves to normal operating position and the next tanks backwash valves are set to
backwash position
6).
Step 6 After the valves have been positioned, treatment pump(s) are restarted. This cycle
continues until each of the filter tanks in a giving grouping have been backwashed
7).
Step 7 When all filters in a given grouping have been backwashed the controller shall stop
the treatment pump(s), return the backwash priority valve to full OPEN position, confirm all
valves are in normal operating position and restart the treatment pump(s)
Chemical System
1.
Function: To monitor and control the water pH and ORP of the closed loop water systems
2.
Operation:
a.
The chemical controller shall sample and monitor the chemical properties of the system water. The
controller shall control the feed pumps to dose liquid chlorine and acid via switching relays in the
controller
b.
The PLC shall monitor treatment pump(s) operation for the system and shall inhibit any chemical
injection unless the treatment pump(s) is ON

04 February 2016
13 100/ 9

E.
Heater Control
1.
Function: In addition to normal thermostat control built into the pool heater the PLC shall monitor the
temperature of water leaving the mechanical room and insure that the temperature is never more than
104 F (40 C)
2.
Operation:
a.
3.
F.
G.
I.
The maximum temperature set point shall be adjustable on the HMI
Water Feature Lighting

1.
Function: To automatically turn the feature lights ON and OFF
2.
Operation:
a.
A photocell will be mounted in a remote area adjacent to the associated water feature. The
photocell will activate the lights with a relay through the PLC
b.
Hours of operation may also be programmed into the PLC to switch to a low-light (minimum code
requirements) condition during non-operating hours
System Alarms and Shutdown Trips

1.
H.
The temperature probe shall monitor the temperature of the water going out of the mechanical
room and back to the water feature. If the temperature of the water ever exceeds 104 F (40 C),
the PLC will de-energize the pool heater
Mechanical Room High Water Trip

a.
Function: To monitor high water levels on the mechanical room floor and shutdown electrical
power
b.
Alarm Notification on the door of the Control Panel
c.
Operation:
1).
The switch shall be installed near the floor as shown in the contract documents
2).
Should the water level switch actuate, the main breaker shall trip de-energizing all water
feature equipment within the equipment room
3).
Resetting the alarm shall occur when the Motor Control Center (MCC) circuit breaker is
reset
Pump Restart Time Delay

1.
Function: To delay restarting all motors and allow a staggered starting after Utility Power Failure
2.
Operation:
a.
When the Control Panel is energized, several timing delay relays shall begin timing, each relay
shall be set for a five (5) minute cascaded delay
b.
Large pump loads (15 hp and greater) shall not be allowed to start until the time delay for that
pump is complete
c.
The relays shall reset on loss of power at the Control Panel
Motor Control Center (MCC) Phase Failure Trip

1.
Function: To monitor the incoming AC power to the 3-phase MCC, and trip all motors on loss of any
phase
2.
Operation:
a.
The Phase Failure relay shall be installed in the MCC monitoring incoming AC power
b.
Should a low voltage condition on AC power feed occur on any one of three phases, the MCC
main circuit breaker shall trip de-energizing the MCC
c.
There is no indicator or horns for this alarm. Resetting the alarm shall occur when the MCC main

04 February 2016
13 100/ 10

circuit breaker is reset

END OF SECTION

04 February 2016
13 100/ 11

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
This section includes the following:

1.
Scope of Work
2.
Contracts
3.
Access to Site
4.
Protection of Existing Utilities and Structures
5.
Drawings and Specifications
6.
Restrictions to the Work
SCOPE OF WORK
A.
Work to be performed under the Agreement consists of furnishing and installing all materials, equipment
systems, and labor required to complete the Work as required by the Contract
B.
Perform the Work in accordance with the codes, ordinances, and amendments in effect in the location of
the Project
1.3
CONTRACTS
A.
1.4
Perform the Work per the Agreement to be executed between the Owner and the Contractor
ACCESS TO SITE
A.
During the construction period, the Contractor shall have limited use of the premises for construction
operations, including use of the Site. Coordinate site limitations with the Owner
B.
Notify the Owner, city and county agencies, as applicable, a minimum of 48 hours in advance of
performing work that necessitates closing or interfering with traffic on public thoroughfares, parking areas, and
driveways, or with normal facility operations. Obtain written permission prior to affection such
1.5
PROTECTION OF EXISTING UTILITIES AND STRUCTURES
A.
The Contractor shall verify the location of all existing utilities including cables, conduits, pipes, water lines,
gas lines, etc.
B.
The Contractor shall take the proper precautions to avoid damage to such components.
C.
In the event of a conflict or discrepancy, the Contractor shall promptly notify the Owner and Engineer and
request for necessary relocation
D.
Failure to follow this procedure, places upon the Contractor the responsibility of making repairs or replace
such damage at his own expense
E.
The Contractor shall provide necessary safeguards and exercise caution against damage to existing and
new structures, structural components, and finishes. The Contractor shall be responsible for any damages resulting
from his operations and shall repair or replace such damage at his own expense
1.6
DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS
A.
The Contractor is responsible for coordinating all phases of the Work contained within the Contract
Documents (W-Series and WE-Series Drawings) with other construction trades and Contract Documents including
but not limited to Civil, Structural, Mechanical, Electrical, Plumbing, Architectural, and Landscape trade work

04 February 2016
13 1001/ 1

13 1001WATER FEATURE GENERAL
B.
The Contractor is responsible for coordinating the installation and purchase of all the electrical
components, including electrical devices, power panels, control panels, motor control centers, etc. as indicated on
the Water Feature Electrical (EW-Series) Drawings for the complete operation of the systems
C.
The Contractor shall notify the Engineer / Architect of any discrepancies, omissions, or conflicts between
various elements of the Contract Documents prior to proceeding with any Work involved in the discrepancies,
omissions, or conflicts. Generally, the most stringent requirements shall govern the Work
1.7
RESTRICTIONS TO THE WORK
A.
It is required that existing facilities and utilities continue in normal operation during the period of this
Agreement
B.
Conduct the Work with a minimum disturbance or interference, and in such a manner as to not restrict or
obstruct entrances, exits, passage ways, utility services, or material/supply delivery and pick-up for facility
operation
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
NOT USED
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
NOT USED
END OF SECTION

04 February 2016
13 1001/ 2

13 1001WATER FEATURE GENERAL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.
C.

1.
Subsoil Materials
2.
Topsoil Materials
3.
Structural Fill Materials
4.
Aggregate Materials
Related Sections:
1.
SECTION 13 1102 WATER FEATURE GEOSYNTHETICS FOR EARTHWORK
2.
SECTION 13 1103 WATER FEATURE GRADING AND EXCAVATION
3.
SECTION 13 1104 WATER FEATURE DEWATERING
4.
SECTION 13 1106 WATER FEATURE TRENCHING
5.
SECTION 13 1107 WATER FEATURE BACKFILLING
6.
SECTION 13 1204 WATER FEATURE CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE
7.
SECTION 13 1205 WATER FEATURE SHOTCRETE
8.
SECTION 13 1303 WATER FEATURE MEMBRANE LINER
9.
References:
1.
Site specific Geotechnical Report Bore Hole Locations and Findings of Subsurface Materials
2.
ASTM C136 STANDARD TEST METHOD FOR SIEVE ANALYSIS OF FINE AND COARSE
AGGREGATES
3.
ASTM D1556 STANDARD TEST METHOD FOR DENSITY AND UNIT WEIGHT OF SOIL IN PLACE
BY THE SAND-CONE METHOD
4.
ASTM D1557 STANDARD TEST METHOD FOR

CHARACTERISTICS OF SOIL USING MODIFIED EFFORT
5.
ASTM D 2167 STANDARD TEST METHOD FOR DENSITY AND UNIT WEIGHT OF SOIL IN
PLACE BY RUBBER BALLON METHOD
6.
ASTM D2487 STANDARD PRACTICE FOR CLASSIFICATION OR SOILS FOR ENGINEERING

PURPOSES
7.
ASTM D3282 STANDARD PRACTICE FOR CLASSIFICATION OF SOILS AND SOIL-AGGREGATE

MIXTURES FOR HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION PURPOSES
8.
ASTM D4318 STANDARD TEST METHODS FOR LIQUID LIMIT, PLASTIC LIMIT, AND
PLASTICITY INDEX OF SOILS
9.
ASTM D6938 STANDARD TEST METHOD FOR DENSITY OF SOIL AND SOIL-AGGREATE IN
PLACE BY NUCLEAR METHODS (SHALLOW DEPTH)
LABORATORY
COMPACTION
10. Standard Specifications for local jurisdictions

1.2
SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW

A.

04 February 2016
13 1101/ 1

13 1101WATER FEATURE EARTHWORK
B.
Samples: Provide in air-tight containers, 10 pounds (4.5 kg) of each type of fill material to testing
laboratory for evaluation
C.
Material Source: Provide the name of imported materials suppliers and location of the material supplies
source
D.
1.3
Submit test reports on each type of imported material

QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Perform the Work in accordance with the project specifications and referenced standards. Maintain one (1)
copy of the test results on site
1.4
UNIT PRICES MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
A.
Subsoil: By the cubic yard. Includes excavating existing subsoil, supplying subsoil materials, and
stockpiling
B.
Topsoil: By the cubic yard. Includes excavating existing topsoil, supplying subsoil materials, and
stockpiling
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SUBSOIL MATERIALS
A.
Subsoil Type S1: Material Type A-1, A-2-4, A-2-5, and A-3. Conforming with ASTM D3282 (AASHTO M145) and local jurisdiction engineering standards
B.
2.2
Subsoil Type S2:

1.
Excavated and reused material, imported borrow, and select or local borrow
2.
Graded
3.
Free of lumps larger than 3 inches (75mm), rocks larger than 2 inches (50mm), and debris and other
organic material
4.
Conforming to ASTM D2487 Group Symbol CL OL
5.
Containing less than 10 percent material retained on a number 200 sieve
TOPSOIL MATERIALS
A.
Topsoil Type S3: Conforming to the local jurisdictions engineering standards, project specifications and
references standards
B.
C.
Topsoil Type S4:

1.
Excavated and reused material
2.
Graded
3.
Free of roots, rocks larger than 1 inch (25mm), subsoil, debris, large weeds and foreign matter
4.
Conforming to ASTM D2487 Group Symbol
Topsoil Type S5:

1.
Imported borrow
2.
Friable loam
3.
Reasonably free of roots, rocks larger than 1 inch (25mm), subsoil, debris, large weeds, and foreign
matter
4.
Acidity range (pH) of 5.5 to 7.5

04 February 2016
13 1101/ 2

2.3
5.
Containing a minimum of 4 percent and a maximum of 25 percent inorganic matter
6.
Conforming to ASTM D2487 Group Symbol OH PT
7.
Limit decaying matter to 10 percent of total content by volume
COARSE AGGREGATES FOR EARTHWORK

A.
Coarse Aggregates All Types: Conforming to project specifications and referenced standards
B.
Coarse Aggregate Type A (Bedding): Coarse Angular crushed washed stone; free of shale, clay, friable
material, and debris; graded in accordance with ASTM C316; within the following limits:
Sieve No.
(U.S. Series)
Opening Size
inches (mm)
Percent Retained on Sieve

(% by Weight)
1 inch
1/2 inch
4
8
1 (25)
0.5 (12)
0.187 (4.75)
0.0937 (2.36)
95 to 100
25 to 60
0 to 10
0 to 5
C.
Aggregate Type B (Pea Gravel): Natural Stone; washed free of clay, shale, organic matter; graded in
accordance with ASTM C316, to the following limits
2.4
1.
Minimum Size: 1/4 inch (6mm)
2.
Maximum Size: 5/8 inch (16mm)
FINE AGGREGATES FOR EARTHWORK

A.
Fine Aggregates Type A5 All Types: Project specifications and referenced standards
B.
Fine Aggregates Type A (Selected Backfill): Natural river or bank sand; washed; free of silt, clay, loam,
friable or soluble materials, and organic matter; graded in accordance with ASTM C136, within the following limits:
2.5
Sieve No.
(U.S. Series)
Opening Size
inches (mm)

(% by Weight)
4
8
16
30
50
100
200
0.187 (4.75)
0.0937 (2.36)
0.0469 (1.18)
0.0234 (0.60)
0.0117 (0.30)
0.0059 (0.15)
0.0029 (0.075)
95 to 100
85 to 100
65 to 97
25 to 70
5 to 35
0 to 7
4 max
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A.
Conform to Project Quality Control Service specification
B.
Subsoil Materials - Testing and Analysis: Perform in accordance with ASTM D1557 and ASTM D6938
C.
Topsoil Materials - Testing and Analysis: Perform in accordance with ASTM D1557 and ASTM D6938
D.
Coarse Aggregate Materials - Testing and Analysis: Perform in accordance with ASTM D1557, ASTM
D2167, ASTM D6938, and ASTM C136
E.
Fine Aggregate Materials - Testing and Analysis: Perform in accordance with ASTM D1557, ASTM D2167,
ASTM D6938, and ASTM C136
F.
If test indicate materials do not meet specified requirements, change material and retest
G.
Provide materials of each type from the same source throughout the Work

04 February 2016
13 1101/ 3

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
SOIL REMOVAL
A.
Excavate subsoil and topsoil from areas designated in the Contract Documents
B.
Removed lumped soil, boulders, rock, vegetation, roots, organic matter, muck, and debris
C.
site
D.
3.2
3.3
Stockpile excavated material in area designated on site and remove excess material not being used for the
Excavated material my require sorting and drying
STOCKPILING
A.
Stockpile materials on site
B.
Stockpile in sufficient quantities with dividers or stockpile apart to prevent mixing
C.
Prevent intermixing of soil types or contamination
D.
Direct surface water away from stockpile site to prevent erosion or deterioration of materials
STOCKPILE CLEAN UP
A.
Remove stockpile, leave area in a clean and neat condition. Grade site surface to prevent free standing
surface water
B.
If a borrow area is indicated, leave area in a clean and neat condition. Grade site surface to prevent free
standing surface water
END OF SECTION

04 February 2016
13 1101/ 4

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.

1.
B.
C.
1.2
Supplying and installation a Geotextile Fabric Under-Liner
Related Sections:
1.
SECTION 13 1101 WATER FEATURE EARTHWORK
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
References:
1.
ASTM D3786 STANDARD TEST METHOD FOR BURSTING OF TEXTILE FABRICS-DIAPHRAGM

BURSTING STRENGTH TESTER METHOD
2.
ASTM D4355 STANDARD TEST METHOD FOR DETERIORATION OF GEOTEXTILE BY

EXPOSURE TO LIGHT, MOISTURE AND HEAT IN A XENON ARC TYPE APPARATUS
3.
ASTM D4491 STANDARD TEST METHODS FOR WATER PERMEABILITY OF GEOTEXTILES BY

PERMITIVITY
4.
ASTM D4533 STANDARD TEST METHOD FOR TRAPEZOID TEARING STRENGTH OF

GEOTEXTILES
5.
ASTM D4632 STANDARD TESTING METHOD FOR GRAB BREAKING LOAD AND ELONGATION
OF GEOTEXTILES
6.
ASTM D4751 STANDARD TEST METHOD FOR DETERMINING APPARENT OPENING SIZE OF A
GEOTEXTILE
7.
ASTM D4833 STANDARD TEST METHOD FOR INDEX PUNCTURE RESISTANCE OF

GEOMEMBRANES AND RELATED PRODUCTS
8.
ASTM D5199 STANDARD TEST METHOD FOR MEASURING THE NOMINAL THICKNESS OF
GEOSYNTHETICS
9.
ASTM D5261 STANDARD TEST METHOD FOR MEASURING MASS PER UNIT AREA OF
GEOTEXTILES

A.
B.
Product Data: Submit Manufacturers literature, application instructions, and product test reports
C.
Sample: Provide four (4) 12 by 12 inch (300 by 300mm) square samples
D.
Warranty: Submit manufacturers warranty and ensure forms have been completed in the owners name
and registered with the manufacturer.

04 February 2016
13 1102/ 1

13 1102WATER FEATURE GEOSYNTHETICS FOR
EARTHWORK
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Experience: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum of five
years experience and approved by the manufacturer
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
The Fabric Under-Liner shall be a non-woven geotextile fabric. The Fabric shall have the following
minimum properties
B.
Properties (Units)
Test Method
Value
Grab Tensile Strength (lb / kg)

Elongation (%)
Trapezoid Tear (lb / kg)
Puncture (lb / kg)
Mullen Burst (psi / MPa)
Permeability Coefficient (cm/sec)
Apparent Opening Size
Weight (oz/sq yd / g/sq. m)
Thickness (mils / mm)
Vertical Water Flow Rate (gpm/sq ft / lpm/sq. m)
Ultraviolet (UV) Resistance (%)
ASTM D4632
ASTM D4632
ASTM D4533
ASTM D4833
ASTM D3786
ASTM D4491
ASTM 4751
ASTM 5261
ASTM D5199
ASTM D4491
ASTM D4355
350 / 160
50
110 / 50
190 / 86
700 / 4.8
0.1
100+
16 / 543
180 / 4.6
50 / 2000
70
Packaging:
1.
Roll Width:
16 feet (5m) minimum
2.
Roll Length:
328 feet (100m) minimum
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Geotextile fabric shall be installed by laying fabric on a prepared surface to the limits of all lakes, water
features, ponds, waterfalls, and cascades
B.
Geotextile fabric shall have sufficient excess around the perimeter to underlay the entire membrane liner
as shown on the Contract Documents
C.
Geotextile fabric shall be placed with a minimum of 8 inches (200mm) of overlap at all longitudinal seams
and 20 inches (500mm) of overlap at all transverse seams
D.
After membrane liner is installed, a second Geotextile Fabric shall be overlaid with sufficient excess
around the perimeter to cover the entire membrane liner to protect the liner during placement of the steel
reinforcement and water feature concrete shell
END OF SECTION

04 February 2016
13 1102/ 2

13 1102WATER FEATURE GEOSYNTHETICS FOR
EARTHWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.
C.
1.2

1.
Removal of Topsoil and Subsoil
2.
Cutting, grading, filling, rough contouring, compacting, and shaping the site for water features and
associated mechanical buildings and a structures
3.
Excavating for foundations
4.
Excavating for slabs-on-grade, paving, and landscaping
5.
Excavating for site structures
Related Sections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
References:
1.
AGGREGATES
2.
3.

4.
BY RUBBER BALLON METHOD
5.
ASTM D2419 STANDARD TEST METHOD FOR SAND EQUIVALENT VALUE OF SOILS AND FINE
AGGREGATE
6.
ASTM D2434 STANDARD TEST METHOD FOR PERMEABILITY OF GRANULAR SOILS

(CONSTANT HEAD)
7.
LABORATORY
COMPACTION
UNIT PRICE MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
A.
Miscellaneous Fill: By the cubic yard (meter). Includes excavating existing soil, supplying soil materials,
stockpiling, scarifying substrate surfaces, placing where required, and compacting
B.
Structural Fill Type A: By the cubic yard (meter). Includes excavating existing soil, supplying structural fill
materials, stockpiling, scarifying substrate surfaces, placing where required, and compacting

04 February 2016
13 1103/ 1

13 1103WATER FEATURE GRADING AND EXCAVATION
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Perform the Work in accordance with the project specifications and referenced standards. Maintain one (1)
copy of the test results on site
1.4
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

A.
Submit as per Project Specifications
B.
Accurately record actual locations of utilities remaining by horizontal dimensions, elevations or inverts, and
slope gradients
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Topsoil: As specified in Section 13 1101 WATER FEATURE EARTHWORK
B.
Subsoil: As specified in Section 13 1101 WATER FEATURE EARTHWORK
C.
Structural Fill: As specified in Section 13 1101 WATER FEATURE EARTHWORK
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify site conditions prior to beginning the Work
B.
Verify that survey benchmarks and intended elevations for the Work are as indicated in the Contract
Documents
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
Identify required lines, levels, contours, and datum
B.
Stake and flag locations of know utilities
C.
Locate, identify, and protect utilities that remain from excavation and grading activities
D.
Notify all utility companies to remove and relocate utilities
E.
Protect above and below grade utilities that remain
F.
Protect plant life, lawns, and other features remaining as a portion of final landscaping
G.
Protect Benchmarks, survey control points, existing structures, fences, sidewalks, paving, and curbs from
excavating equipment and vehicular traffic
3.3
SUBSOIL EXCAVATION
A.
Excavate subsoil from areas to be further excavated, re-landscaped, or re-graded
B.
Do not excavate wet subsoil or excavate and process wet material in an attempt to obtain optimum
moisture content
C.
When excavating through roots, perform the Work by hand and cut roots with a sharp axe
D.
Stockpile in area designated on site to depth on exceeding and protect from erosion. Remove from subsoil
not being used from the site
E.
Benching Slopes: Horizontally bench existing slopes greater than 1:4 to key placed fill material to slope to
provide firm bearing
F.
Stability: Replace damaged or displaced subsoil to the same requirements as specified for fill

04 February 2016
13 1103/ 2

3.4
EXCAVATION
A.
Underpin adjacent structures that may be damaged by excavating Work
B.
Excavate subsoil to accommodate building foundations, slabs-on-grade, paving, site structures, utilities or
other construction operations, and to the elevation and dimensions indicated on the Contract Documents
C.
When excavation has reached required subgrade elevations, notify the Owner, who will make an
inspection of conditions. Do not excavate below indicated depth unless directed by the Owner or Owner
Representative
D.
Compact disturbed load bearing soil in direct contact with foundations to original bearing capacity or to a
minimum of 3,000 psf (144 kPa) or 4,000 psf (192 kPa) as indicated on the Contract Documents; perform
compaction in accordance with Section 31 23 33.13 and 31 23 33.16
E.
If inspection indicates unsuitable material and conditions, additional excavation and corrective Work shall
be performed as directed by the Owner
F.
Slope banks with machine to angle of repose or less until shored
G.
Do not interfere with 45 degree bearing splay of foundations
H.
Grade top perimeter of excavating to prevent surface water from draining into excavation
I.
Hand trim excavation. Remove loose material
J.
Notify Architect/Engineer of unexpected subsurface conditions and discontinue affected Work in the area
until notified to resume Work
K.
3.5
Correct areas over excavated in accordance with Section 31 23 33.16

FILLING
A.
Install the Work in accordance with Project specifications and referenced standards
B.
Fill areas to proposed contours and elevations with appropriate fill materials
C.
Place fill material in continuous layers and compact to attain required compaction density
D.
Slope grade away from buildings at a minimum of 2 inches (50mm) in 10 feet (3m), unless otherwise noted
E.
Make grade changes gradual. Blend slope into level areas
F.
Remove surplus fill material from the site
3.6
TOLERANCES
A.
3.7
Top surface of subgrade shall be plus or minus 1 foot (300mm) from required elevation
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Comply with the requirements of the Project specifications and referenced standards
B.
Perform excavation Work in compliance with applicable requirements of governing authorities and codes
having jurisdiction
C.
Testing shall be in accordance with ASTM D1556, ASTM D1557, ASTM D2167, and ASTM D6938
D.
If testing indicates that the Work does not meet specified requirements, remove Work, replace, and retest
E.
Frequency of Tests: Test upper 12 inches (300mm) as recommended by the Project Geotechnical
Engineer
3.8
SCHEDULES
A.
Conform to the Project specification and referenced standards
B.
Structural Fill for Building Pads:

1.
Fill shall consist of clean sand that is free of organic matter and other deleterious substances. It shall

04 February 2016
13 1103/ 3

have a fines content that does not exceed 15 percent. Maximum compacted depth shall be 8 inches
(200mm)
C.
D.
3.9
Subsoil Fill:
1.
Fill Type S1: Maximum compacted depth shall be 8 inches (200mm)
2.
Compact to minimum 98 percent of maximum density
Topsoil Fill:
1.
Fill Type S2: Maximum compacted depth shall be 8 inches (200mm)
2.
Compact to minimum 95 percent of maximum density
PROTECTION
A.
Prevent displacement or loose soil from falling into excavation, maintain soil stability
B.
Protect bottom of excavations and soil adjacent to and beneath foundations from damage caused by
settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout and other hazards caused by earthwork operations
C.
Provide warning lights, DANGER or CAUTION signs and watchmen at all places where excavation
constitutes, in any way, a hazard to any persons whose injuries might result from the failure to take such
precautions
D.
The Contractor shall take any measures necessary to ensure the safety of workers and others present on
the job site throughout the contract period. This shall include, but is not limited to, conforming with all applicable
OSHA regulations, as well as, the rules of the regulatory agencies with proper jurisdiction
END OF SECTION

04 February 2016
13 1103/ 4

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.

1.
B.
1.2
Temporary dewatering system
Related Sections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.

A.
B.
Dewatering Plan Submitted with the following requirements:
C.
1.3
1.
Submitted prior to construction
2.
Prepared by an registered Engineer in the jurisdiction of the Work
3.
Dewatering plan shall be site specific
4.
Certification that removal of ground water will not reduce the existing grounds bearing capacity
5.
Method for treatment and location of receiving waters of dewatering
Monthly Dewatering Performance Reports and Required Modifications to Existing Plans

QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
Qualifications of Firm
1.
Designed by experienced, reputable, qualified firm. Submit experience of the designer for approval
2.
Successful record of operation for a minimum of three (3) years
3.
At least two (2) successful dewatering operations, submit project information for review
In lieu of Experience
1.
C.
Performance and warranty bond executed prior to award execution
Standards
1.
Accordance with local and state government rules, regulations, and permit conditions
2.
The quality and quantity of all water discharged shall comply with the requirements of the United States
Environmental Protection Agency (USEPA), State Department of Environmental Protection, local
Water Management District, and any other regulatory agency having proper jurisdiction

04 February 2016
13 1103/ 1

13 1103WATER FEATURE DEWATERING
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
EQUIPMENT
A.
The equipment specified herein shall be standard dewatering equipment of proven ability
B.
All equipment must be designed, manufactured, and installed by firms having experience with such
equipment
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
Submit dewatering plan prior to commencing work
B.
Conform dewatering plan with overall construction plan
C.
Design dewatering system to preserve the undisturbed bearing capacity of the subgrade soils surrounding
existing and proposed features. Preserve the integrity of any adjacent structures
D.
Monitor performance and progress of dewatering plan by a certified Geotechnical Engineer and require
modifications as needed
E.
3.2
Requirements of dewatering plan include:

1.
Dewatering all features sufficiently for proper performance of necessary operations
2.
Provide a dry method to lower moisture content, of silt and clay soils, below the soils optimum
moisture content to aid in the construction process
PUMPING AND DRAINAGE
A.
Provide and maintain proper equipment and facilities to remove all water entering the proposed
excavations
B.
Keep excavations dry so as to obtain a satisfactory undisturbed subgrade foundation condition
C.
Maintain excavations dry until the fills, structures, or pipes are completed to an extent that they will not be
damaged by allowing water levels to return to natural elevations
D.
A Geotechnical Engineer must certify that the dewatering system installed is in conformity with the overall
construction plan
E.
Preserve the undisturbed bearing capacity of the subgrade soils at proposed bottom of the excavation
F.
Preserve the integrity of adjacent structures
G.
At a minimum, the water level shall be 2 feet (600mm) below the trench or excavation bottom
H.
Well or sump installations shall be constructed with proper sand filters to prevent drawing of finer grain
soils from the surrounding ground
I.
Surface water shall not be allowed to enter excavations. Surface runoff shall be collected in shallow
ditches around the perimeter of the excavation to maintain a bottom free from standing water
J.
Drain ditches to sumps, and pump from the excavations to maintain a bottom free from standing water
K.
Take all additional precautions to prevent uplift of any structure during construction
L.
Prevent flotation by maintaining a positive and continuous operation of the dewatering system. Dewatering
shall be maintained until such time that tanks and pools are filled with water. Do not allow ground water to fill tanks
or pools as a means of counteracting hydrostatic pressure
M.
Removal of dewatering equipment is based upon a mutual agreement between the Contractor and the
Owners Representative
N.
Remove material and equipment of the dewatering system after the agreement is reached

04 February 2016
13 1103/ 2

O.
Take all necessary precautions to preclude the accidental discharge of fuel, oil, etc that may affect the
ground water quality
P.
The Contractor is responsible for all cleanup of contamination to the groundwater cause by the
Contractors actions, equipment, or gross negligence
Q.
No polluted water shall be discharged into sanitary sewers, storm water systems, or water bodies
R.
Monthly reports, submitted by the Geotechnical Engineer, documenting monitored results and any required
modifications
3.3
SITE PROTECTION AND CLEAN-UP
A.
Use all reasonable precautions to prevent the entrance of foreign material into the existing storm drain
system
B.
Immediately upon completion of the dewatering operations remove all equipment, materials, and supplies
from the site of the Work
C.
Remove all surplus materials and debris
D.
Fill all holes or excavations, and grade as directed by the Owner
E.
Any additional permitting of dewatering not supplied by the Owner and included on the Contract
Documents shall be the responsibility of the Contractor
END OF SECTION

04 February 2016
13 1103/ 3

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.
C.
1.2

1.
Excavating Trenches for piping from 5 feet (1.5m) outside building to project limits
2.
Compacted fill from top of pipe bedding to subgrade elevations
3.
Backfilling and Compaction
Related Sections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Project Specifications for Coordinated Work
References:
1.
2.
AGGREGATES
3.
4.

5.
6.
7.
Standard Specifications for local jurisdictions
LABORATORY
COMPACTION
A.
Excavating Subsoil Materials: By the cubic yard (meter). Includes general excavation to required elevation,
loading and placing materials in stockpile and removing from the site.
B.
1.3
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.4
Over Excavating: Payment is not made for over excavation work nor for replacement materials
Utility: Any buried, pipe, duct, conduit, or cable

FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A.
Verify that survey bench marks, control points, and intended elevations for the Work are as shown on the
Contract Documents

04 February 2016
13 1106/ 1

13 1106WATER FEATURE TRENCHING
1.5
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate the Work as per the Project Specifications and referenced sections
B.
Verify the Work associated with lower elevation utilities is complete before placing higher elevation utilities
C.
The Contractor shall coordinate the installation of all utility Work with the water feature Work
D.
It is the responsibility of the Contractor to make all connections to Work that is already in place and to
coordinate such connections with all other parties
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
FILL MATERIALS
A.
Fill Type S1: A specified in SECTION 13 1101 WATER FEATURE EARTHWORK
B.
Structural Fill Type A: As specified in SECTION 13 1101 WATER FEATURE EARTHWORK
C.
Concrete: Lean concrete conforming to SECTION 03 3000 STRUCTURAL CONCRETE Type C with a
compressive strength of 2,500 psi (11.9 kPa)
2.2
ACCESSORIES
A.
Geotextile Fabric: As specified in SECTION 13 1102 WATER FEATURE GEOSYNTHETICS FOR
EARTHWORK
B.
Filter Fabric: As specified in SECTION 13 1105 WATER FEATURE FOUNDATION DRAINAGE
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
Identify required lines, levels, contours, and datum locations
B.
Protect plant life, improvements, and other on-site feature to remain as a portion of the final landscaping
C.
Protect bench marks, existing structures, sidewalks, paving, and curbs from excavating equipment and
vehicular traffic
D.
Maintain and protect above and below grade utilities
E.
Cut out soft areas of subgrade not capable of compaction in place. Backfill with coarse aggregate (Type A)
and compact to a density equal or greater than requirements for subsequent backfill material
3.2
EXCAVATING
A.
Excavating subsoil required for utilities in accordance with local governing agencies requirements
B.
Cut Trenches sufficiently wide to enable installation and allow inspection. Remove water or materials that
interfere with the Work
C.
Do not interfere with the 45 degree bearing splay of foundations
D.
Hand trim excavations. Hand trim for bell and spigot pipe joints. Remove loose matter
E.
Correct areas over excavated in accordance with SECTION 31 2316
F.
Stockpile excavated material in area designated on site and remove excess material not being reused
from the site
G.
The execution and preparation of trenches shall not proceed in advance of pipe installation more than 50
feet (15m), except as approved by the Owner. Trenching shall not, under any conditions, exceed the quantity of
pipe that can be bedded, inspected, tested, backfilled and compacted in one (1) working day

04 February 2016
13 1106/ 2

H.
Excavation in close proximity to existing utilities shall be performed in such a manner so as to prevent
damage to the utilities
I.
The sides of trenches shall be kept as nearly vertical as possible from the trench bottom to a level 12
inches (300mm) above the top of pipe
J.
The trench bottom shall be associated to true line and grade and shall not be less than 24 inches (600mm)
wide, nor more than 24 inches (600mm) wider than the outside diameter of the pipe, so that a clean space from 9
to 12 inches (225 to 300mm) is provided on each side of the pipe
K.
The Contractor shall furnish, install, and maintain sheeting, bracing, and shoring as required to support the
sides of the excavation, and to prevent any movement that may damage adjacent utilities, or structures, damage or
delay the Work, or endanger life and health. All voids outside the supports shall be immediately filled and
compacted
3.3
BACKFILLING
A.
Backfill trenches to the contours and to the elevations indicated on the Contract Documents with
unclassified fill materials
B.
Systematically backfill to allow maximum time for natural settlement. Do not backfill over porous, wet,
frozen, or spongy subgrade surfaces
C.
Coarse Aggregate (Type A): Place and compact materials in equal continuous layers not exceeding 8
inches (200mm) compacted depth
D.
Unclassified Fill: Place and compact materials in equal continuous layers not exceeding 8 inches (200mm)
compacted depth
E.
Employ a placement method that does not disturb or damage foundation perimeter drainage, or utilities in
the trench
F.
Maintain optimum moisture content of each layer of fill materials to attain required compaction density. Add
water by uniform sprinkling
G.
Remove surplus fill materials from the site
H.
Leave fill material stockpile areas completely free of excess fill materials
3.4
TOLERANCES
A.
Top Surface of Backfilling under Paved Areas: Plus or minus 0.04 feet (12mm) from required elevations
B.
Top Surface of General Backfilling: Plus or minus 0.08 feet (25mm) from required elevations
3.5

A.
Comply with Project Specifications and referenced sections
B.
Compaction testing shall be performed in accordance with ASTM D1556, ASTM D1557, ASTM D2167,
and ASTM D6938
C.
If testing indicate that the Work does not meet specified requirements, remove the Work, replace,
compact, and retest
D.
3.6
3.7
Frequency of Tests: one (1) test per 100 feet (30m) of trench
PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
A.
Protect finished work as per the Project Specifications and referenced sections
B.
Reshape and re-compact fills subjected to vehicular traffic during construction

SCHEDULE
A.
Water Feature Piping: Cover pipe and bedding with Type S2, in 8 inch (200mm) lifts, compacted to 95
percent

04 February 2016
13 1106/ 3

END OF SECTION

04 February 2016
13 1106/ 4

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.
C.

1.
Building perimeter and site structure backfilling to subgrade elevations
2.
Site filling and backfilling
3.
Fill under slabs-on-grade (Pool Shells)
4.
Fill for over-excavation
5.
Consolidation and compaction as scheduled
Related Sections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
References:
1.
2.
AGGREGATES
3.
4.

5.
6.
ASTM D2487 STANDARD PRACTICE FOR CLASSIFICATION OR SOILS FOR ENGINEERING

PURPOSES
7.
ASTM D3282 STANDARD PRACTICE FOR CLASSIFICATION OF SOILS AND SOIL-AGGREGATE

MIXTURES FOR HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION PURPOSES
8.
ASTM D4318 STANDARD TEST METHODS FOR LIQUID LIMIT, PLASTIC LIMIT, AND
PLASTICITY INDEX OF SOILS
9.
LABORATORY
COMPACTION
10. Standard Specifications for local jurisdictions

04 February 2016
13 1107/ 1

13 1107WATER FEATURE BACKFILLING
1.2

A.
Schedule of values and applicable prices as per Project Specifications and referenced sections
B.
Fill (All Types): By the cubic yard (meter). Includes excavating existing subsoil, supplying materials,
stockpiling, scarifying substrate surfaces, placing where required, and compacting
C.
Structural Fill (All Types): By the cubic yard (meter). Includes supplying fill materials, stockpiling, scarifying
substrate surfaces, placing where required, and compacting
D.
Concrete Fill: By the cubic yard (meter). Includes supplying materials, forming, mixing and placing where
required, and curing
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
FILL MATERIALS
A.
Fill Type (Subsoil Type S1 and S2, Topsoil Type S3, S4 and S5): As specified in SECTION 13 1101
WATER FEATURE EARTHWORK
B.
Structural Fill: As specified in SECTION 13 1101 WATER FEATURE EARTHWORK
C.
Concrete: : Lean concrete conforming to SECTION 03 3000 STRUCTURAL CONCRETE Type C with a
compressive strength of 2,500 psi (11.9 kPa)
2.2
ACCESSORIES
A.
Geotextile Fabric: As specified in SECTION 13 1102 WATER FEATURE GEOSYNTHETICS FOR
EARTHWORK
B.
Membrane Liner: As specified in SECTION 13 1303 WATER FEATURE MEMBRANE LINER
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify subdrainage, damp proofing, or waterproofing installation has been inspected and approved by the
Owner or Owners Representative
B.
Verify underground tanks are anchored to their own foundations to avoid flotation after backfilling
C.
Verify structural ability of unsupported walls to support imposed loads by the fill
D.
Verify the installation of all site piping and utilities prior to backfilling
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
Compact existing subgrade to density requirements before placement of subsequent backfill materials
B.
Cut out soft areas of existing subgrade not capable of compaction in place. Backfill with Coarse Aggregate
Type A fill and compact to density equal to or greater than requirements for subsequent fill materials
C.
Scarify to a depth of 12 inches (300mm) existing and proof roll subgrade surface to identify soft spots; fill
and compact to density equal to or greater than requirements for subsequent fill materials
D.
3.3
Compaction to be completed with mechanical or heavy hand tampers

BACKFILLING
A.
Backfilling areas to contours and/or elevations indicated with unclassified fill materials
B.
Systematically backfill to allow maximum time for natural settlement. Do not backfill over porous, wet,
frozen, or spongy subgrade surfaces

04 February 2016
13 1107/ 2

C.
Granular Fill (Coarse Aggregate Type A): Place and compact materials in equal continuous layers not
exceeding 8 inches (200mm) compacted depth
D.
Unclassified Fill Type: Place and compact unclassified material in equal continuous layers not exceeding 8
inches (200mm) compacted depth
E.
Employ a placement method that does not disturb or damage other Work
F.
Maintain optimum moisture content of each layer of fill materials to attain required compaction density. Add
water by uniform sprinkling
G.
Do not use heavy equipment to backfill against unsupported foundation walls and retaining walls
H.
Backfill simultaneously with had equipment on each side of unsupported foundation walls until supports
are in place
I.
Slope grade away from building at a minimum of 2 inches (50mm) in 10 feet (3m), unless otherwise noted
J.
Make gradual grade changes. Blend slope into level areas
K.
Remove surplus backfill material from the site
L.
Leave fill material stockpile areas free of excess fill material
M.
Protect Geosynthetic fabric and membrane liners during backfilling. If fabric or liner is damaged, do not
continue backfilling until damage is repaired and approved by the Owner
3.4
TOLERANCES
A.
Top Surface of Backfilling Subgrade: plus or minus 1/2 inch (12mm) of required elevations
B.
Top Surface of General Backfilling: plus or minus 1 inch (25mm) from required elevations
3.5

A.
Comply with Project Specifications and referenced sections
B.
Compaction testing shall be performed in accordance with ASTM D1556, ASTM D1557, ASTM D2167,
and ASTM D6938
C.
If testing indicate that the Work does not meet specified requirements, remove the Work, replace,
compact, and retest
D.
Frequency of Tests: one (1) test per each 7,500 square feet (670 sq. m) per vertical lift
E.
Proof roll compacted fill surfaces under slabs-on-grade, pavers, paving, and structures
3.6
PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK

A.
Protect finished work as per the Project Specifications and referenced sections
B.
Reshape and re-compact fills subjected to vehicular traffic during construction
3.7
SCHEDULE
A.
Interior Slabs-on-Grade:
1.
Fill Type A; 12 inches (300mm) thick, compacted to 95 percent
2.
Cover with Fill Type A; 2 inches (50mm) thick, compacted to 95 percent
B.
Exterior Side of Foundation Walls, Retaining Walls, Over Granular Filter Material, and Foundation
Perimeter Drainage:
1.
C.
Fill Type A, as shown in the Contract Documents, each lift compacted to 95 percent
Fill Under Landscape Areas:

1.
Fill Type S3, S4, or S5 to 12 inches (300mm) below finish grade, compacted to 95 percent

04 February 2016
13 1107/ 3

D.
Fill Under Grass Areas:

1.
E.
Fill For Berming:

1.
F.
H.
Fill Type A to underside of sand leveling bed, compacted to 95 percent
Fill Asphalt or Concrete Paving:

1.
Compact Subsoil base to 95 percent of its maximum dry density
2.
Fill Type A to 12 inches (300mm) below finish grade, compacted to 95 percent
3.
Stabilize subgrade, if required, to minimum LBR of 40
Fill to Correct Over-Excavation:

1.
I.
Fill Type S2 to 12 inches (300mm) below finish grade, compacted to 95 percent
Fill Under Interlocking Paving:

1.
G.
Fill Type S2, S3, or S4 to 12 inches (300mm) below finish grade, compacted to 95 percent
As specified in SECTION 31 0515 and 31 0516
Fill Under Landscape Areas:

1.
Fill Type S1 to 12 inches (300mm) below finish grade, compacted to 95 percent

END OF SECTION

04 February 2016
13 1107/ 4

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.
C.

1.
Reinforcing Steel Bars
2.
Wire Fabric
3.
Expanded Metal Lath
4.
Reinforcing Fibers
5.
Supports and Accessories
Related Sections:
1.
SECTION 13 1203 WATER FEATURE CONCRETE FORMWORK
2.
3.
4.
SECTION 13 1611 WATER FEATURE GROUNDING
References:
1.
ACI 301-05 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR STRUCTURAL CONCRETE
2.
ACI 318-05 BUILDING CODE REQUIREMENTS FOR REINFORCED CONCRETE
3.
ACI SP-4 AMERICAN CONCRETE INSTITUTE DETAILING MANUAL
4.
ASTM A82/A83-07 COLD DRAWN STEEL WIRE FOR CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
5.
ASTM A184-02
REINFORCEMENT
6.
ASTM A185-02 WELDED STEEL WIRE FABRIC FOR CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
7.
ASTM A496-02 DEFORMED STEEL WIRE FABRIC FOR CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
8.
ASTM A497-01
REINFORCEMENT
WELDED
9.
ASTM A615-04
REINFORCEMENT
DEFORMED
FABRICATED
10. ASTM A706/706M-04

REINFORCEMENT
DEFORMED
DEFORMED
AND
LOW-ALLOY
STEEL
STEEL
PLAIN
STEEL
BAR
WIRE
MATS
FOR
CONCRETE
FABRIC
FOR
CONCRETE
BILLET-STEEL
BARS
FOR
CONCRETE
DEFORMED
BARS
FOR
CONCRETE
11. ASTM A775/775M-04 EPOXY COATED REINFORCING STEEL BARS

12. ASTM C847-00 GALVANIZED FINISH
13. ASTM D3963 EPOXY COATED REINFORCING STEEL
14. AWS D1.4-04 STRUCTURAL WELDING CODE FOR REINFORCING STEEL
15. CRSI CONCRETE REINFORCING STEEL INSTITUTE MANUAL OF STANDARD PRACTICE
16. CRSI 63 RECOMMENDED PRACTICE FOR PLACING REINFORCING BARS
17. CRSI 65 RECOMMENDED PRACTICE FOR PLACING BAR SUPPORTS, SPECIFICATIONS, AND
NOMENCLATURE

04 February 2016
13 1202/ 1

13 1202WATER FEATURE STEEL REINFORCEMENT
1.2

A.
B.
Product Data: Submit manufacturers literature and material specification on reinforcement support, chairs,
bolsters, spacers, etc. indicating type and location for use. Only approved supports and methods approved by the
engineer will be allowed
C.
Shop Drawings: Indicate bar sizes, spacing, locations, and quantities of reinforcing steel and wire fabric,
bending and cutting schedules, supporting and spacing devices, and beam reinforcing elevations
D.
Submit certified copies of mill test reports of reinforcement material analysis. Certify that products meet or
exceed specified requirements
1.3
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Reinforcing Steel shall be free of heavy rust scales and flakes, or other coating at time of delivery and
placing. Properly protect rebar on site after delivery to prevent rust scales and flaking
B.
Deliver bars separated by size and tagged with manufacturers heat or test identification number
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
B.
C.
Reinforcing Steel:
1.
For general use: Deformed, new billet steel bars conforming to ASTM A615. Provide Grade 60 bars
(400 MPA) unless otherwise noted on Contract Drawings, bars shall have grade identification marks
2.
For salt water pools, wet pits, and locations exposed to moisture: Deformed, new billet steel bars,
conforming to ASTM A615, Grade 60 (400 MPa) bars, Epoxy Coated in accordance with ASTM D3963
3.
For fresh water pools, wet pits, and locations exposed to moisture: Deformed, new billet steel bars
conforming to ASTM A615, Grade 60 (400 MPa) bars. Provide Epoxy Coated bars where noted on
Contract Drawings
4.
Fabricate and bend reinforcing steel in accordance with latest edition of the ACI Detailing Manual and
details on Contract Drawings
Welded Wire Fabric:

1.
Welded Steel Wire Fabric with fiber yield strength of 60,000 psi (400 MPa) conforming to ASTM A185
2.
Provide 4 x 4 W1.4/1.4 (100 x 100 MW9.1/9.1) for 4 inch (100mm) slabs and 6 x 6- W2.1/2.1 (150 x
150 MW13.3/13.3) for 5 inch (125mm) slabs unless otherwise noted on the Contract Drawings
3.
Provide mesh in flat sheets only. Mesh rolls will not be acceptable
Expanded Metal Lath:

1.
D.
Reinforcing Fibers:
1.
2.
E.
Expanded Metal Lath with galvanized finish conforming to ASTM C847
Acceptable Manufacturers
a.
Euclid Chemical, Fiberstrand 100
b.
W. R. Grace, Grace Fibers
c.
Fibermesh, Inc.
Fibrillated virgin polypropylene fibers, inch (20mm) long
Supports and Accessories

1.
Tie Wire:

04 February 2016
13 1202/ 2

2.
a.
14 gauge, 0.0641 inch (1.63mm) or 16 gauge, 0.0508 (1.29mm) deformed wire conforming to
ASTM A496
b.
14 gauge, 0.0641 inch (1.63mm) or 16 gauge, 0.0508 (1.29mm) black, soft, smooth iron wire
conforming to ASTM A82
Supports for Reinforcement:

a.
Use 5,800 psi (40 MPa) pre-cast concrete chairs or Dobies with embedded wire ties where
concrete is placed over water or vapor proof membranes
b.
Wire bar type supports complying with CRSI MPS 1-90, Chapter 3, with spacers and upturned
legs. Where support legs are in contact with forms, provide supports with plastic protected legs,
CRSI Class C
c.
Provide chairs, bar supports, spacers, or hangers as recommended by ACI Detailing Manual,
latest edition, except slab on grade. Engineer must approve work, materials, and methods.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PLACEMENT
A.
Provide following minimum concrete cover for reinforcement (ACI 318-89):

1.
2.
3.
Concrete cast against and permanently exposed to Earth

a.
Exterior Slabs on Grade 2 inches (50mm)
b.
Interior Slabs on Grade 2 inches (50mm)
c.
Sections other than Slabs 3 inches (75mm)
Concrete exposed to Earth, Water, or Weather

a.
No. 5 (T16) and smaller bars 2 inches (50mm)
b.
No. 6 (T19) and larger bars 2 inches (50mm)
Concrete not exposed to Earth, Water, or Weather

a.
Slabs, Walls, and Joists 1 inch (25mm)
b.
Beams and Columns 1.2 inches (37mm)
B.
Accurately place and support reinforcement with engineer approved chairs, bar supports, spacers, or
hangers as recommended by the ACI Detailing Manual, latest edition, except slabs on grade work. Support bars
in slabs on grade and footings with specified and approved supports to maintain specified concrete cover.
C.
Securely anchor and tie reinforcing bars and dowels prior to placing concrete
D.
Coordinate with other trades, locations of all formed openings or penetrations for piping or conduits prior to
placing concrete. Accommodate openings and penetrations by providing necessary reinforcement around openings
E.
Avoid splices of reinforcing bars at points of maximum stress. Lap bars 40 bar diameters minimum unless
dimensioned otherwise on the Contract Drawings
F.
Run steel reinforcing bars continuous through cold joints
G.
Torches will not be allowed for cutting or bending reinforcing bars. Cut bars using cutter. Do not use
torches to heat bars for bending, bend bars cold.
H.
Provide full length bars, accurately bent to details. Do not field bend bars partially embedded in concrete
expect as indicated on the Contract Drawings or specifically permitted by the engineer
I.
Bond and ground all reinforcement in accordance with National Electrical Code (NEC) requirements

04 February 2016
13 1202/ 3

J.
Lay welded wire fabric continuously, with edges and ends of adjoining sheets overlapping at least one full
mesh, and not less than 6 inches (150mm), tie splices with 16 gauge, 0.0508 inch (1.29mm) wire. Offset end laps
in adjacent sheets to prevent continuous laps
K.
Support welded wire fabric 2 feet (0.6m) on centers throughout the field and 2 feet (0.6m) on center along
all edges
3.2
EXAMINATION
A.
Provide 48-hour notice to engineer to allow for inspection of completed concrete reinforcement before
placing concrete
B.
Coordinate scheduling of concrete placement to allow for structural engineer inspection and observation
and for making necessary adjustments to the reinforcing placement before delivery of concrete
END OF SECTION

04 February 2016
13 1202/ 4

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.
C.
1.2

1.
Formwork Materials
2.
Formwork Accessories
3.
Concrete Waterstops
Related Sections:
1.
SECTION 13 1202 WATER FEATURE STEEL REINFORCEMENT
2.
3.
SECTION 13 1205 WATER FEATURE SHOTECRETE
4.
5.
SECTION 13 1401 WATER FEATURE PVC AND HDPE PIPE AND FITTINGS
6.
SECTION 13 1403 WATER FEATURE PIPE HANGERS, SUPPORTS, AND ANCHORS
7.
References:
1.
ACI 117 SPECIFICATIONS FOR TOLERANCES FOR CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION AND

MATERIALS
2.
ACI 301 SPECIFICATIONS FOR STRUCTURAL CONCRETE FOR BUILDINGS
3.
ACI 318 BUILDING CODE REQUIREMENTS FOR STRUCTURAL CONCRETE
4.
ACI 347 GUIDE TO FORMWORK FOR CONCRETE
5.
PS 1 CONSTRUCTION AND INDUSTRIAL PLYWOOD

A.
B.
Product Data: Submit Manufacturers product data, materials, specifications, installation recommendations,
and maintenance data for Waterstops and expansion joint material
C.
Shop Drawings: Provide engineered and stamped shop drawings for shoring and bracing, including
details, member sizes, and sequencing instructions, when required
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Perform Work in accordance with ACI 347, 318, and the latest edition of the Building Code adopted by the
governing agency
B.
Design Formwork under direct supervision of a Licensed Professional Engineer experienced in design of
this Work
C.
Safety: Assume responsibility for safety of Formwork and provide necessary design construction,
materials, and maintenance to produce required concrete work safely
D.
All work to be performed in accordance with local Building Code Regulations and OSHA guidelines

04 February 2016
13 1203/ 1

13 1203WATER FEATURE CONCRETE FORM WORK
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
FORMWORK MATERIALS
A.
Conform to ACI 347, Chapter 4 Materials for Formwork, ACI Special Publication No. 4 Formwork for
Concrete, and as herein specified
B.
C.
D.
E.
Lumber
1.
Softwood Framing Lumber: In accordance with AFPA National Design Specification for Wood
Construction, with Supplement. Provide Lumber with a moisture content of 19 percent or less
2.
Grade marked by grading rules agency listed in National Design Specification for Wood Construction
3.
Light framing or studs for board or plywood form: 2 inch to 4 inch (50 to 100mm) and larger in nominal
width and thickness. Construction Grade
4.
Boards for basic forms and form liners: Construction Grade
5.
Board Pattern: Square Edge
6.
Board Surface: Surfaced Four Sides (S4S)
Plywood:
1.
For exposed concrete surfaces: HD Overlay Plyform, B-B Grade, Class I or II (exterior) APA stamped,
5/8 inch (16mm) thick minimum
2.
All other locations: Plyform, B-B Grade, Class I or II (exterior) APA stamped, 5/8 inch (16mm) thick
minimum
3.
Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize the number of joints
Round Column Forms: S

1.
Single-use Fiber/Tubes with separate plastic liner, Spiral Stop as manufactured by Greenstreak
2.
Single-use Fiber/Tubes with integral plastic liner, Smooth Tube as manufactured by Burke
Fiberglass, plastic, and metal forms:

1.
F.
G.
H.
Chamfer Strips:
1.
inch (19mm) Type VE-2 PVC Strips by Vulcan Metal Products, Inc.
2.
Approved equal
Wire Mesh Pool Forms:

1.
Steeltex Wire Mesh with waterproof backing and tri-direction fiberglass reinforcing fibers as
manufactured by Ivy Steel & Wire
2.
Approved equal
Pool Gutter Forms:

1.
2.2
May be used, subject to approval by Engineer, if they produce concrete surfaces equivalent to those
resulting from the use of plywood forms, in the judgment of the Engineer
High Density Styrofoam with Polyurethane Coating, custom cut to the pool design geometry as
manufactured by Lawson Aquatics
FORMWORK ACCESSORIES
A.
Form Ties:
1.
Removable or Snap-off type, galvanized metal, fixed length, cone type, with waterproofing washer, and
free of defects
2.
Form Release Agent:

04 February 2016
13 1203/ 2

a.
3.
Crete-Lease 727 or 20-VOC by Cresset Chemical Company
2).
CleanStrip (J-1 or J-3 VOC) by Dayton Superior
3).
DEBOND Form Coating by L&M Construction Chemicals
4).
Duogard or Duogard II by W. R. Meadows
5).
Approved equal that will provide CCS-2 surface minimum as approved by Engineer
Non-staining clear coating that does not contain oil or wax and will not prevent proper adhesion of
applied finish
c.
Release Agents shall be compatible with forming materials
Pressure Sensitive Tape:
b.
Approved Manufacturers
1).
3M
2).
Approved Equal
Polyurethane or Mylar faced adhesive backed paper tape, 1 inch (25mm) wide, used for all
Formwork joints
Nails, Spikes, Lag Bolts, Through Bolts, Anchors:

a.
2.3
1).
b.
a.
4.
Sized as required, of sufficient strength and character to maintain Formwork in place while placing
concrete
CONCRETE WATERSTOPS
A.
Rubber Waterstops:
1.
B.
a.
Williams Everlastic Waterstop System
b.
BF Goodrich Industrial Products, BFG Vinyl Waterstops
c.
W. R. Meadows, Incorporated, Sealtight
d.
Earth Shield TPE
2.
Extruded ribbed or dumbbell type, 6 inch (150mm) minimum length, tensile strength equal to concrete
design strength
3.
Splice by means of thermal butt fusion
4.
Center bulb styles shall not be used, unless specifically approved by the Engineer
Bentonite/Butyl Rubber Waterstops:

1.
Acceptable Manufacturers:
a.
Waterstops RX
b.
Parastop II
2.
Waterstop shall be 75 percent Bentonite and 25 percent butyl rubber blended together to form a rope
material having sectional dimension of 1 inch (25mm) by inch (19mm)
3.
Bentonite/Butyl Rubber Waterstops shall only be approved for use in conjunction with existing concrete
and new concrete joints

04 February 2016
13 1203/ 3

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify lines, levels, and centers before proceeding with Formwork. Ensure all dimensions agree with
Contract Documents, notify the Engineer of any discrepancies
3.2
ERECTION FORMWORK
A.
Earth forms are only permitted where pre-approved by the Engineer or Architect
B.
Erect formwork, shoring, and bracing to achieve design requirements in accordance with ACI 301
C.
Provide bracing to ensure stability of Formwork. Shore to strengthen Formwork subject to overstressing by
construction loads
D.
Arrange and assemble Formwork to permit dismantling and stripping. Do not damage concrete during
stripping. Permit removal of remaining principal shores
E.
Arrange Formwork, aligning joints, lock forms in place making joints water tight. Tape inside of joints. Keep
form joints to a minimum
F.
Provide inch (19mm) tooled edges or chamfer strips on external corners of all exposed concrete, except
where noted on Contract Documents. Outside corners of all pool edges shall have a minimum 2 inch (50mm)
tooled edge
G.
3.3
Maintain required clear cover between reinforcing bars and Formwork

APPLICATION FORM RELEASE AGENT
A.
Apply Form Release Agent on Formwork in accordance with the Manufacturers recommendations
B.
Apply Form Release Agent prior to placement of reinforcing steel, anchoring devices, and embedded items
C.
Do not apply Form Release Agent where concrete surfaces will receive special finishes or applied
coverings that are affected by Form Release Agents. Soak inside surfaces of untreated forms with clean water.
Keep surfaces coated prior to placement of concrete
D.
Do not allow Form Release Agent on reinforcing steel or concrete surfaces where bonding is intended to
occur or at locations of cold joints
3.4
INSERTS, EMBEDDED PARTS, AND OPENINGS

A.
Provide formed openings where required for items embedded in or passing through concrete Work
B.
Locate and set in place items that will be cast directly into concrete. Coordinate with all other trades to
insure all items to be embedded into concrete are installed and set prior to placing concrete
C.
Locate and coordinate all pipe penetrations as shown on the Contract Documents. Notify Structural
Engineer of any penetrations not shown on the Contract Documents where the structural members are shown,
obtain approval from the Engineer prior to placing concrete. Install any additional reinforcement as directed by the
Structural Engineer
D.
Install Waterstop Flanges for all water feature pipe penetrations into water holding structures and Link
Seals for penetrations into non-water holding structures.
E.
Coordinate with other trades in forming and placing openings, slots, reglets, recesses, sleeves, bolts,
anchors, other inserts, and components of other trades
F.
Install accessories in accordance with the Manufacturers instructions. Accessories shall be straight, level,
and plumb. Ensure items are not disturbed during concrete placement
G.
Install Concrete Waterstops in accordance with the Manufacturers instructions continuous without
displacing reinforcement. Joints shall be water tight
H.
Bentonite/Butyl Rubber Waterstops shall be applied at all below grade construction joints a minimum of 2
inches (50mm) from the exterior face of concrete. To prevent movement, attach water stop to the concrete with
04 February 2016
13 1203/ 4

harden nails every 12 to 18 inches (300 to 450mm) or use approved epoxy continuous along Waterstop. Prevent
damage to Waterstop while placing concrete
I.
Provide temporary ports or openings in Formwork where required to facilitate cleaning and inspection.
Located openings at bottom of forms to allow flushing water to drain
J.
Close temporary openings with tight fitting panels, flush with inside face of forms, and neatly fitted so joints
will not be apparent in exposed concrete surfaces
3.5
FORM CLEANING
A.
Clean forms as erection proceeds, to remove foreign matter within forms
B.
Clean formed cavities of debris prior to placing concrete
C.
Flush with water or use compressed air to remove foreign matter. Ensure that water and debris drain to
exterior through temporary openings or clean-out ports
3.6
3.7
FORMWORK TOLERANCES
A.
Construct Formwork to maintain tolerances required by ACI 301
B.
Camber slabs and beams in accordance with ACI 301

A.
Inspect erected Formwork, shoring, and bracing to ensure that Work is in accordance with Formwork
design, and that supports, fastenings, wedges, ties, and items are secure
B.
Do not reuse plywood Formwork more than three (3) times for concrete surfaces to be exposed to view or
Formwork that has become split, frayed, delaminated, or otherwise damaged. Do not patch Formwork
3.8
FORM REMOVAL
A.
Do Not remove forms or bracing until concrete has gained sufficient strength to carry its own weight and
imposed loads
B.
Loose forms carefully. Do not wedge pry bars, hammers, or tools against finished concrete surfaces
schedule for exposure to view
C.
Store removed forms in a manner that surfaces to be in contact with fresh concrete will not be damaged.
Discard damaged forms
END OF SECTION

04 February 2016
13 1203/ 5

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.
C.

1.
Concrete Materials
2.
Admixtures
3.
Miscellaneous Materials
4.
Concrete Mixes
5.
Cementitious and Reactive Waterproofing
Related Sections:
1.
SECTION 03 0000 - CONCRETE
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
SECTION 31 0000 EARTHWORK
References:
1.
Project Documents: Geotechnical Soils Report
2.
ACI 107 SPECIFICATION FOR TOLERANCES FOR CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION AND

MATERIALS
3.
ACI 211.5R GUIDE FOR SUBMITTAL OF CONCRETE PROPORTIONS
4.
ACI 301 SPECIFICATION FOR STRUCTURAL CONCRETE FOR BUILDINGS
5.
ACI 302.1R GUIDE FOR CONCRETE FLOOR AND SLAB CONSTRUCTION
6.
ACI 303.1 STANDARD SPECIFICAITON FOR CAST-IN-PLACE ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE
7.
ACI 304 MEASURING, MIXING, TRANSPORTING, AND PLACING CONCRETE
8.
ACI 305R SPECIFICATION FOR HOT WEATHER CONCRETING
9.
ACI 306.1 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR COLD WEATHER CONCRETING
10. ACI 308.1 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR CURING CONCRETE

11. ACI 318 BUILDING CODE REQUIREMENTS
12. ACI 350 CODE
STRUCTURES
REQUIREMENTS
OF
ENVIRONMENTAL
ENGINEERING
CONCRETE
13. ACI 503.2 BONDING PLASTIC CONCRETE TO HARDENED CONCRETE WITH A MULTICOMPONENT EPOXY ADHESIVE
14. ASTM C33 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR CONCRETE AGGREGATES
15. ASTM C88 STANDARD TEST METHOD FOR SOUNDNESS OF AGGREATES BY USE OF
SODIUM SULFATE OR MAGNESIUM SULFATE
16. ASTM C94/C94M STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR READY-MIX CONCRETE

04 February 2016
13 1204/ 1

13 1204WATER FEATURE CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE
17. ASTM C150 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR PORTLAND CEMENT

18. ASTM C260 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR AIR-ENTRAINING ADMIXTURES FOR
CONCRETE
19. ASTM C277 SPECIFICATION FOR MAGNESIUM SULFATE
20. ASTM C289 STANDARD TEST METHOD FOR POTENTIAL ALKALI-SILICA REACTIVITY OF
AGGREGATES (CHEMICAL METHOD)
21. ASTM C309 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR LIQUID MEMBRANE-FORMING COMPOUNDS
FOR CURING CONCRETE
22. ASTM C494 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR CHEMICAL ADMIXTURES FOR CONCRETE
23. ASTM C618 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR COAL FLY ASH AND RAW OR CALCINED
NATURAL POZZOLAN FOR USE IN CONCRETE
24. ASTM C948 STANDARD TEST METHOD FOR DRY AND WET BULK DENSITY WATER
ABSORPTION AND APPARENT POROSITY OF THIN SECTIONS OF GLASS-FIBER REINFORCED
CONCRETE
D.
1.2
Related Products Installed But Not Supplied Under This Section:

1.
Inserts, bolts, boxes, templates, and fastening devices for other Work, Including those for bases for
Mechanical and Electrical
2.
Concrete Accessories

A.
B.
Product Data: Submit Manufacturers product literature for each type of admixture, bonding agent, curing
compound, non-shrink grout, epoxy, and sealer for approval by the Engineer
C.
Concrete Mix Design: Submit Concrete Mix Design for each concrete mix type to be used. Include the
following information:
1.
Mix Identification Designation
2.
Statement of Intended Use for Mix
3.
Mix Proportions, including Admixtures
4.
Wet and Dry Unit Weight
5.
Entrained Air Content
6.
Design Slump
7.
Design Compressive Strength
8.
Water/Cementitious Material Ratio
9.
Aggregate Source
10. Admixtures
11. Strength Qualification Data:
a.
Submit required average strength qualification data and documentation per ACI 301 4.2.3
b.
If trial batches are used to qualify average strength, mix design shall be prepared by an
independent testing laboratory and shall achieve average compressive strength a minimum of
1,200 psi (8.25 MPa) greater than specified strength with slump within 1 inch (25mm) of maximum
permitted and air content within 0.05% of maximum allowable
c.
If field test data is used to qualify average strength, submit separate qualification data for each
production facility that will supply concrete to the project, include copies of concrete testing
agencys reports from which the data was compiled

04 February 2016
13 1204/ 2

D.
Test Reports: Provide Test Reports of control tests, special tests, and core tests prepared and distributed
by an independent testing laboratory
E.
Samples: Submit one (1) 12 inch by 12 inch (300 by 300mm) sample of colored concrete for color
verification
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Testing Agency: All testing shall be conducted by an approved testing laboratory. Test results will be
submitted to the Engineer before final acceptance
B.
Records of Work: Maintain and keep accurate records listing time, location, and date of concrete
placement. Include delivery tickets from concrete supplier. Delivery Tickets shall show the following information:
1.
Name of Ready-Mix batch plant
2.
Serial number of Ticket
3.
Date and truck number
4.
Name of Contractor
5.
Name and Location of the Project
6.
Amount of Concrete
7.
Time Loaded
8.
Type, Name, and Amount of Admixtures used
9.
Amount and Type of Cement
10. Total Water Content

11. Sizes, Weights, and Types of sand and aggregates
C.
1.4
MOCKUP
1.
Construct and erected a field sample for Architectural Concrete surfaces receiving special treatment or
finish as a result of Formwork in location specified by the Engineer or Architect.
2.
Sample shall be of sufficient size, approximately 4 feet by 8 feet (1.2 by 2.4m), to indicated and detail
special treatment or finish, including any scoring, joints, joint sealants, etc that will be in the finished
Work
3.
Remove panels at the completion of the Project
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Requirements
1.
2.
Cold Weather Concreting Procedures

a.
When ambient air temperatures on the day of placement are expected to drop below 40 F (4.4
C), placement, preparation, protection, and curing of concrete shall comply with ACI 306.1
b.
Minimum temperature of concrete upon delivery shall conform to ACI 301 4.2.2.7. Concrete
temperature at placement shall conform to minimum values of ACI 306.1 Table 3.2.1, and shall not
exceed minimum values
c.
No frozen material shall be used
d.
Forms, reinforcement, and fillers shall be free from frost
e.
Do not place concrete on frozen ground
Hot Weather Concreting Procedures

a.
When placing concrete in hot weather follow the recommendations of ACI 305R
b.
When ambient air temperatures on the day of placement are expected to exceed 90 F (32.2 C),

04 February 2016
13 1204/ 3

mix ingredients shall be cooled before mixing. Flake ice or well-crushed ice of a size that will melt
completely during mixing may be substituted for all or part of mix water
c.
3.
Protect and prevent rapid drying. Start finishing and curing as soon as possible. The Engineer may
approve the use of fog spray or evaporation retardant to lessen rapid evaporation from concrete
surface
Concrete shall not be placed during rain, sleet, or snow. Precipitation shall not be allowed to increase
the mixing water nor damage the finish surface. The Engineer may approve placement of concrete if it
is determined that there is adequate protection from damage due to environmental conditions
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
CONCRETE MATERIALS
A.
Portland Cement:
1.
B.
General Usage: ASTM C150, Type II with C3A 5% or Type V, provided from one (1) source
Coarse Aggregate:
1.
Meet requirements of ASTM C33 or nonconforming aggregate that by test or actual service produces
concrete of required strength and conforms to local governing codes
2.
Aggregate shall be uniformly graded as follows:

a.
b.
C.
Flat Work Size No. 67

Sieve No.
(U.S. Series)
Opening Size
inches (mm)
Percent Retained
(% by weight)
1 in.
3/4 in.
3/8 in.
4
8
1.0 (25)
0.75 (19)
0.375 (9)
0.187 (4.75)
0.0937 (2.36)
100
90 to 100
20 to 55
0 to 10
0 to 5
Sieve No.
(U.S. Series)
Opening Size
inches (mm)
Percent Retained
(% by weight)
1-1/2 in.
1 in.
1/2 in.
4
8
1.5 (37)
1.0 (25)
0.5 (12)
0.187 (4.75)
0.0937 (2.36)
100
95 to 100
25 to 60
0 to 10
0 to 5
All Other Size No. 57
Fine Aggregates:
1.
Clean, washed hardrock having hard, strong, durable particles, which do not contain deleterious
substances, such as clay lumps, shale, schist, alkali, mica, coated grains, or soft and flaky particles
2.
Clean natural sand, which does not contain deleterious substances, such as clay lumps, shale, schist,
alkali, mica, coated grains, or soft and flaky particles
3.
Aggregate shall be uniformly graded as follows:

Sieve No.

04 February 2016
13 1204/ 4
Opening Size
Percent Retained

D.
2.2
(U.S. Series)
inches (mm)
(% by weight)
3/8 in.
4
8
16
30
50
100
0.375 (9)
0.187 (4.75)
0.0937 (2.36)
0.0469 (1.18)
0.0234 (0.60)
0.0117 (0.30)
0.0059 (0.15)
100
95 to 100
80 to 100
50 to 85
25 to 60
10 to 30
2 to 10
Mix Water:
1.
Clean potable water conforming to ASTM C94
2.
Free from deleterious amounts of acids, alkalis, salts, and organic matter
ADMIXTURES
A.
Mineral
1.
B.
Chemical
1.
No Admixture shall contain calcium chloride nor shall calcium chloride be used as an Admixture. All
chemical admixtures used shall be from the same manufacturer
2.
Approved Manufacturer
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
C.
Fly Ash Pozzolan Meets requirements of ASTM C618, Class F or C and with loss of ignition (LOI) of
3 percent maximum
a.
Master Builders Incorporated
b.
SIKA Corporation
c.
W R Grace Construction Products
Air Entrainment Agent

a.
Meets requirements of ASTM C260
b.
Quality Standard Daravair or Darex II AEA by W R Grace
Water Reducer
a.
Meets requirements of ASTM C494, Type A
b.
Quality Standard Daracem 50/55, WRDA-64, or WRDA-82 by W R Grace
Water Reducer, Set Retarder

a.
Meets requirements of ASTM C494, Type D
b.
Quality Standard Daratard-17 or Daratart-40 by W R Grace
High Range Water Reducer

a.
Meets requirements of ASTM C494, Type F or G
b.
Quality Standard Darachem-100 or WRDA-19 By W R Grace
Non-Chloride Accelerator
a.
Meets requirements of ASTM C494, Type C
b.
Quality Standard Daraset or Polarset by W R Grace
Evaporation Retardant
1.
a.
Sure Film J-74 by Dayton Superior

04 February 2016
13 1204/ 5

b.
D.
Bonding Agents
1.
a.
2.3
Confilm by Master Builders Incorporated
Day-Chem Ad Bond (J-40) by Dayton Superior
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
B.
Curing Compounds:
1.
Do not use concrete curing compounds without the Engineers or Architects written approval
2.
Curing Compounds shall no t be used to replace moist curing unless specifically accepted by the
Engineer
Non-shrink Grout:
1.
C.
a.
Master Builders Incorporated Master Flow 928
b.
Dayton Superior Sure-Grip
c.
L&M Construction Chemicals Crystex Non-Shrink Grout
d.
Euclide Chemical Company Hi-Flow Grout
e.
U.S. Grout Corporation Five Star Grout
f.
A.C. Horn, Incorporated Horn Non-Metallic Grout
g.
UPCO Company UPCON
h.
Sonneborn Building Products Sonogrout
i.
Burke Non-Ferrous, Non-Shrink Grout
2.
Pre-packaged, non-shrink, non-metallic, natural aggregate grout conforming to ASTM C1107, Grade B
or C
3.
Grout shall be fluid with extended working times and temperatures, capable of achieving at least 95
percent bearing strength under base plates and free of gas producing or gas-releasing agents
Anchor Bolt Epoxy

1.
D.
a.
Hilti Corporation
b.
Approved Equal
2.
Anchor Bolt Epoxy shall conform to the design strength requirements of ACI 318 and should follow the
Manufacturers recommendations
3.
Provide as an injectable adhesive, furnished in a side-by-side refill pack that keeps component A and
component B separate and shall be designed to accept static mixing nozzle through which both
components are thoroughly mixed.
Expansion Joint Filler

1.
Wet Areas, such as pool decks:

a.
Acceptable Products
1).
Deck-O-Joint
2).
Deck-O-Foam
3).
Deck-O-Seal
4).
Approved Equal

04 February 2016
13 1204/ 6

b.
2.
Non-Wet Areas:
a.
2.4
Non-bituminous joint filler, inch (12mm) thick by depth of concrete slab
1).
A.C. Horn Company
2).
W R Meadows Company
3).
Approved Equal
b.
Pre-molded asphalt-impregnated type, conforming to ASTM D1751
c.
Pre-compressed, neoprene rubber-impregnated, expanding foam may be used in lieu of premolded type
CONCRETE MIXES
A.
It is intended that concrete for all parts of the concrete Work be homogeneous, and when harden, possess
the required strength, durability, water tightness, appearance, resistance to deterioration and abrasion, and other
qualities as specified or required
B.
No water shall be added at anytime during mixing cycle above the amount required to meet specified
water/cement ratio. No reduction in the amount of cement will be allowed
C.
Mix Designs to meet the following requirements:

1.
2.
Mix No. 1 5,000 psi (34.4 MPa) concrete for use on water retaining structures
a.
Minimum weight of cement per cubic yard 564 lbs
b.
Air Entrainment 6 percent, +/- 1.5%
c.
Water/Cement Ratio 0.40 maximum by weight
Admixtures:
a.
Mix design shall show proposed admixture, amount, usage instructions, and justification for
proposed use. Do not use any admixture without the Engineers/Architects written approval
b.
Mineral An amount equal to 15 percent of weight of cement may be added.

1).
c.
2.5
If added, fly ash shall be considered with the cement in determining the amount of water
necessary to provide the specified water/cement ratio
Chemical:
1).
4 inch (100mm) slump maximum prior to use of high range water reducer
2).
8 inch (200mm) slump maximum with us of high range water reducer
3).
Use accelerator or retarder if necessary to meet environmental conditions
CEMENTITIOUS AND REACTIVE WATERPROOFING
A.
Cementitious and Reactive Waterproofing should only be included in the mix design when specified by the
Engineer
B.
Cementitious Waterproofing
1.
a.
XYPEX Chemical Corporation
b.
Approved Equal
2.
Obtain crystalline waterproofing products from a single manufacturer
3.
Product shall be added to concrete mix at time of batching
4.
Follow all Manufacturer recommendations and instructions for dose rates into concrete mix

04 February 2016
13 1204/ 7

C.
Reactive Waterproofing
1.
a.
HYCRETE Incorporated
b.
Approved Equal
2.
Obtain Reactive Waterproofing products from a single manufacturer
3.
Product shall be compatible with specified concrete mix design
4.
Follow all Manufacturers recommendations and instructions for dose rates into the concrete mix
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
Refer to overall Project Specifications for inspection requirements
B.
Verify requirements for concrete cover over reinforcement in accordance with SECTION 13 1202
WATER FEATURE STEEL REINFORCEMENT
C.
Coordinate locations and install inserts, bolts, boxes, templates, pipes, conduits, and other accessories
required by all other trades prior to inspection and placing concrete
D.
Verify area where concrete is to be placed is free from standing water, dirt, debris, and etc
E.
Clean previously placed concrete with a steel brush, blowing the concrete clean using compressed air, and
wetting or applying bonding agent in accordance with Manufacturers instructions
F.
Verify that all grounding connections are installed prior to placing concrete. All Steel Reinforcement must
be grounded in accordance with the National Electrical Code (NFPA 70)
3.2
PLACEMENT
A.
Place concrete in accordance with ACI 318
B.
Place concrete on properly prepared undisturbed subgrade materials or engineered fill. Refer to the
Geotechnical Soils Report for recommendations
C.
Maintain records of concrete placement as described in this section
D.
Place concrete continuously between predetermined expansion, control, and construction joints
E.
Do not interrupt successive placement; do not permit cold joints to occur
F.
Place concrete in nearly uniform layers.
G.
Do not drop concrete in free fall over 5 feet (1.5m)
H.
Consolidate concrete during and immediately after depositing using mechanical vibrators in accordance
with ACI 301. Do not use vibrators to move or transport concrete inside of forms
I.
Do not use contaminated, deteriorated, or retempered concrete. Avoid accumulation of hardened concrete
J.
Do not use aluminum in concrete
3.3
ACCEPTABLE TOLERANCES
A.
All tolerances for concrete work shall be in accordance with ACI Standards unless specifically specified
otherwise
B.
Tolerances for blockouts and openings:

1.
Size:
1/8 inch (3mm)
2.
Location:
1/4 inch (6mm)

04 February 2016
13 1204/ 8

C.
D.
3.4
Tolerances for stairs and landings:

1.
Treads:
1/8 inch (3mm)
2.
Risers:
1/16 inch (1.5mm)
Walls and Slabs:

1.
Variation from plumb:
1/4 inch (6mm) maximum
2.
Variation from thickness:
1/4 inch (6mm)
3.
Variation from location:
1/2 inch (12mm)
SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
B.
Footings:
1.
Bear 18 inch (450mm) minimum into undisturbed earth or on mechanically compacted engineered fill.
Step Footings at a ratio of 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical (1.5:1) unless detailed otherwise. Exterior
Footings shall bear below finish grades. See Contract Documents
2.
Level tops to finish Footing and leave rough
3.
Where joints are required, bulkhead, waterstop, key horizontally, and dowel with two (2) #4 (T12)
rebar, 4 feet (1.2m) long
Foundations and Walls:

1.
C.
D.
E.
Leave Steel Reinforcement projecting where required for floor ties
Exterior Slabs
1.
Dusting with cement is not permitted
2.
For continuous placing and where shown on the Contract Documents, saw cut a 1 inch (25mm) deep
control joint before shrinkage occurs
Equipment Support Pads (Housekeeping Pads)

1.
Coordinate the location of required equipment bases, support pads, etc with other trades and as
required in all specification sections
2.
All equipment support pads shall be 4 inches (100mm) in height, unless otherwise noted on the
Contract Documents
Anchor Bolts:
1.
Embedded Anchors:
a.
2.
Epoxy Anchors:
a.
F.
Place Anchor Bolts no tied to reinforcement steel immediately following leveling of concrete.
Reconsolidate concrete around Bolt immediately after placement. Do not bolts during finishing
process
Install as per the Manufacturers recommendations and instructions
Expansion Joints:
1.
Install Expansion Joints only in locations where shown on the Contract Documents, or where approved
by the Engineer
2.
Expansion Joint fiber can be held in place by nailing or taping the material to the existing section of
concrete prior to placement
3.
Joint sealant compound shall be applied over the top of the fiber, flush with the finish surface and
continuous along the entire joint. The joint shall be water tight

04 February 2016
13 1204/ 9

3.5
CONCRETE FINISHES
A.
All Concrete Finishes shall be coordinated with the Architect/Landscape Architect. The following are
recommendations when no architectural finish is specified
B.
C.
D.
3.6
Finish No. 1 Exposed Vertical Surfaces

1.
Sack Rubbed Finish
2.
Immediately after removing forms, remove joints, marks bellies, projections, loose materials, and cut
back metal ties from surfaces to be exposed
3.
Repair minor voids as specified in this section, and rub exposed surface with carborundum to smooth
4.
Grind ridges smooth with the face of the exposed concrete
5.
Provide a smooth and even surface
Finish No. 2 Interior Flatwork

1.
Steel Trowel Finish
2.
Float and Steel Trowel interior slabs after concrete has set enough to avoid bringing water and fines to
the surface
3.
If power troweling is used, obtain approval or finish from the Engineer
Finish No. 3 Exterior Flatwork

1.
Broom Finish
2.
Round edges including edges formed by expansion joints
3.
Remove edge marks
CURING AND PROTECTION
A.
Keep concrete moist a minimum of seven (7) days for regular concrete and three (3) days for high early
strength concrete. Do not use concrete curing compounds without the Engineer/Architects written approval. Curing
Compounds shall not be used to replace moist curing unless accepted by the Engineer/Architect
B.
Immediately after placement, protect concrete from premature drying, excessively hot or cold
temperatures, and mechanical injury
C.
Maintain concrete with minimal moisture loss at relatively constant temperature for a period necessary to
hydration of cement and hardening of concrete
D.
Protect newly placed concrete from precipitation until it has sufficiently hardened to avoid excess water in
mix and damaging the surface finish. Concrete with damaged surfaces will be replaced at the direction of the
Engineer
3.7
A.
Provide a free access to Work and cooperated with individuals performing tests, inspectors, Engineers and
Architects
B.
Four (4) concrete cylinders shall be taken for every 75 or less cubic yards (60 cu. m) of each class of
concrete placed
C.
One (1) additional test cylinder will be taken during cold weather concreting and cured on the job site
under the same conditions as concrete it represents
D.
One slump test will be taken for each set of test cylinders taken
E.
Concrete not conforming to required lines, details, dimensions, tolerances, or specified requirements will
be noted as defective. Defective concrete will be removed and replaced, or repaired as directed by the Engineer
and at the Contractors expense

04 February 2016
13 1204/ 10

3.8
PATCHING AND REPAIRING

A.
Allow Engineer/Architect or inspector to inspect concrete surfaces immediately upon removal of forms
B.
Excessive honeycomb or embedded debris in concrete is not acceptable and will be noted as defective.
Defective concrete will be removed and replaced, or repaired as directed by the Engineer and at the Contractors
expense
C.
Do not patch, repair or replace exposed architectural finished concrete except upon the direction of the
Architect or Engineer
D.
Minor defects, defects less than 1/2 inch (12mm) deep and tie holes, not exposing reinforcing can be
repaired by chipping, cleaning and applying epoxy adhesive. Apply non-shrink grout prior to development of tackfree condition of epoxy adhesive
END OF SECTION

04 February 2016
13 1204/ 11

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.
C.
1.2

1.
Shotcrete Materials
2.
Admixtures
3.
Miscellaneous Materials
4.
Proportioning and Design of Mixes
5.
Water Feature Shotcrete Equipment
Related Sections:
1.
SECTION 03 0000 - CONCRETE
2.
3.
SECTION 13 1301 WATER FEATURE PLASTER FINISHES
4.
SECTION 13 1302 WATER FEATURES TILE FINISHES
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
SECTION 31 0000 EARTHWORK
References:
1.
Project Document: Geotechnical Soils Report
2.
ACI 506.2 SPECIFICATION FOR SHOTCRETE
3.
ASTM C33 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR CONCRETE AGGREGATES
4.
ASTM C94 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR READY-MIX CONCRETE
5.
ASTM C150 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR PORTLAND CEMENT
6.
ASTM C260 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR AIR-ENTRAINING ADMIXTURES FOR

CONCRETE
7.
ASTM C330 STANDARD

STRUCTURAL CONCRETE
8.
ASTM C494 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR CHEMICAL ADMIXTURES FOR CONCRETE
9.
ASTM C685 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR CONCRETE MADE BY VOLUMETRIC BATCHING

AND CONTINUOUS MIXING
SPECIFICATION
FOR
LIGHTWEIGHT
AGGREGATES
FOR

A.
B.
Product Data: Submit Manufacturers product literature for each type of admixture, patching compound,
supports, backing materials, etc used in or on the shotcrete material
C.
Concrete Mix Design: Submit Shotcrete Mix Design for each shotcrete mix type to be used. Include the
following information:

04 February 2016
13 1205/ 1

13 1205WATER FEATURE SHOTCRETE
1.
Mix Identification Designation
2.
Statement of Intended Use for Mix
3.
Mix Proportions, including Admixtures
4.
Wet and Dry Unit Weight
5.
Entrained Air Content
6.
Design Slump
7.
Design Compressive Strength
8.
Water/Cementitious Material Ratio
9.
Aggregate Source
10. Admixtures
11. Strength Qualification Data:
a.
Submit required average strength qualification data and documentation per ACI 301 4.2.3
b.
If trial batches are used to qualify average strength, mix design shall be prepared by an
independent testing laboratory and shall achieve average compressive strength a minimum of
1,200 psi (8.25 MPa) greater than specified strength with slump within 1 inch (25mm) of maximum
permitted and air content within 0.05% of maximum allowable
c.
If field test data is used to qualify average strength, submit separate qualification data for each
production facility that will supply concrete to the project, include copies of concrete testing
agencys reports from which the data was compiled
D.
Test Reports: Provide Test Reports of control tests, special tests, and core tests prepared and distributed
by an independent testing laboratory
E.
Shop Drawings: For Artificial Rockwork applications, provide shop drawings showing the following
information:
1.
1.3
Indicate formwork, shaped earthwork, dimensions and thickness, tolerances, contours, reinforcement,
accessories, and structural steel for secondary support
QUALIFICATIONS
A.
Installer Experience: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum of five (5)
years experience and approved by the Engineer/Architect
B.
1.4
Nozzlemen shall have current certification in accordance with ACI 506.3R for type of shotcrete required
TEST PANELS AND MOCKUPS
A.
Test Panels shall be prepared by each nozzleman and tested for all applications of shotcrete per the
following requirements:
1.
Make three (3) test panels at least 30 by 30 inches (750 by 750mm) for each mix being considered and
each surface and shooting positions encountered on the Project
a.
For example: panels representing vertical walls shall be shot with the panels in a vertical position.
Panels representing horizontal surfaces shall be shot with the panels in a horizontal position
b.
Comply with applicable provisions of ASTM C1140
c.
Fabricate test panels to the same thickness as the structure to be shot, but not less than 6 inches
(150mm)
2.
Provide the same reinforcement in the test panel as used in the structure, placed in at least half the
panel to check for proper shotcrete placement around reinforcing steel. Panels may be cut to visually
inspect proper placement
3.
Each application crew performing shotcrete Work shall be required to make test panels

04 February 2016
13 1205/ 2

4.
B.
1.5
Take one (1) 3 inch (75mm) diameter core specimens from each panel for testing. Test specimens for
strength in accordance with ASTM C42. The average compressive strength of the cores taken from the
test panels must equal or exceed 85 percent of specified compressive strength
Mock-up for applications for Special Architectural Treatment:

1.
Construct and erect a field sample for each type of shotcrete structure receiving a special architectural
treatment or finish
2.
Sample panel sized sufficiently, typically 4 feet (1.2m) high by 8 feet (2.4m) in length, to indicated all
aspects of the special treatment or finish
3.
Provide same method of construction and reinforcement in mock-ups as used in the structure. Apply
finish treatment to mock-up
4.
Modify final finished treatment, or construct additional mock-ups, as required until acceptable to the
Architect/Landscape Architect. Accepted sample panel is considered basis of quality for the finished
Work
5.
Locate panels where directed by the Architect/Engineer. Mock-up may not remain as part of the Work
and must be removed at the end of the Project
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Codes and Standards: Comply with provisions of the following codes, specifications, and standards except
where more stringent requirements are shown or specified:
1.
ACI 301 and 506.2
2.
Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI) Manual for Standard Practice
B.
Testing Service: Engage an independent testing laboratory acceptable to the Architect/Engineer to perform
material evaluation tests
1.
C.
Materials and installed Work may require testing and retesting at any time during the progress of the
Work. Testing and retesting of rejected materials shall be done at the Contractors expense
Shotcrete Testing: Test shotcrete for compressive and flexural strength using the following methods:
1.
Prepare test panels and take core samples for testing per the requirements outlined in this section
2.
If test panels were not prepared during construction the Contractor shall take samples for the In-Place
Shotcrete:
a.
Cut a minimum 3 inch (75mm) nominal diameter core from the structure and test in accordance
with ASTM C42.
b.
Do not cut into Steel Reinforcement
c.
Repair the core hole in the structure
3.
Additional samples from In-Place Shotcrete for Pool shells shall be taken only if directed by the
Engineer, and only if any of the test samples from the test panels fail
4.
Strength Evaluation of In-Place core samples:

a.
1.6
If In-Place core samples are taken for testing the mean compressive strength of the core sample
must equal or exceed the specified compressive strength, with no individual core less than 85
percent of the specified compressive strength
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
Ensure materials and ambient air temperatures are a minimum 50 F (10 C) prior to, during, and seven
(7) days after the completion of the Work
B.
During freezing or near freezing weather provided equipment and cover to maintain a minimum 50 F (10
C) and to protect the Work completed or Work in progress

04 February 2016
13 1205/ 3

C.
Suspend shotcrete operation during high winds, rainy weather, or near freezing temperatures, when the
Work cannot be protected
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SHOTCRETE MATERIALS
A.
Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type II with C3A 5% or Type V, provided from one (1) source
B.
Fly Ash: ASTM C618, Type C or F
C.
Normal Weight Aggregates: ASTM C33 and as herein specified. Provide aggregates from a single source
for exposed concrete
1.
Located aggregates not complying with ASTM C33 but that can be shown by special test or actual
service to produce shotcrete of adequate strength and durability may be used when acceptable to the
Engineer
D.
Lightweight Aggregates: ASTM C330
E.
Mix Water:
1.
Clean potable water conforming to ASTM C94
2.
Free from deleterious amounts of acids, alkalis, salts, and organic matter
F.
Pre-Bagged Shotcrete Materials: Proprietary pre-bagged shotcrete materials may be used when proof of
satisfactory applications is acceptable to the Engineer
2.2
ADMIXTURES
A.
General : Provide Admixtures for shotcrete that contain no more than 0.1 percent chloride ions
B.
Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C260, certified by the Manufacturer to be compatible with all other
required admixtures
1.
C.
a.
Air-Tite by Cormix
b.
Air-Mix or Perma-Air by Euclid Chemical Company
c.
Darex AEA or Daravair by W R Grace
d.
MB-VR or Micro-Air by Master Builders Incorporated
e.
Sealtight AEA by W R Meadows, Incorporated
f.
SIKA AER by SIKA Corporation
Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C494, Type A

1.
D.
Acceptable Products Subject to compliance with all requirements:
Acceptable Products Subject to compliance with requirements:

a.
PSI N by Cormix
b.
Chemtard by ChemMasters Corporation
c.
Eucon WR-75 by Euclid Chemical Company
d.
WRDA by W R Grace
e.
Pozzolith Normal or Polyheed by Master Builders Incorporated
f.
Prokrete-N by Protex Industries, Incorporated
g.
Plastocrete 161 by SIKA Corporation
High-Range Water Reducing Admixture (Super Plasticizer) ASTM C494, Type F or G

04 February 2016
13 1205/ 4

1.
E.
a.
Super P by Anit-Hydro Company
b.
PSI Super by Cormix
c.
Eucon 37 by Euclid Chemical Company
d.
WRDA 19 or Daracem by W R Grace
e.
Rheobuild by Master Builders Incorporated
f.
PSP Superplasticizer by Protex Industries Incorporated
g.
Sikament by SIKA Corporation
Water Reducing, Retarding Admixture: ASTM C494 Type D

1.
2.3

a.
PSI-R Plus by Cormix
b.
Eucon Retarder 75 by Euclid Chemical Company
c.
Daratard-17 by W R Grace
d.
Pozzolith-R by Master Builders Incorporated
e.
Protard by Protex Industries, Incorporated
f.
Plastiment by SIKA Corporation
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Surfaces to be finished with tile and/or plaster pool finishes shall not be cured using sealers or curing
compounds unless approved by the Engineer and Manufacturers of the finish material and curing compound.
B.
Surfaces where sealers and curing compounds are used will need to be cleaned to remove any such
compound from the surface prior to applying finishes
C.
Curing Compound: Liquid membrane-forming curing compound complying with ASTM C309, Type I, Class
A. Moisture loss not more than 0.55 kg/sq. m when applied at 200 sq ft/gal (5 sq. m/L)
1.

a.
A-H 3-Way Sealer by Anti-Hydro Waterproofing Company
b.
Spartan-Cote by the Burke Company
c.
Conspec #1 by Conspec Marketing and Maufacturing Company, Incorporated
d.
Hardtop by Cormix
e.
Day-Chem Cure and Seal by Dayton Superior
f.
Eucocure by Euclid Chemical Company
g.
Horn Clear Seal by A C Horn Incorporated
h.
L & M Cure by L & M Construction Chemicals
i.
Masterkure CR (Clear) by Master Builders Incorporated
j.
CS-309 by W R Meadows, Incorporated
k.
LR-151 by Prokrete Industries
l.
Kure-N-Seal by Sonneborn-Rexnord
m. Stantop CS9 by Stonhard, Incorporated

D.
Bonding Compound: Polyvinyl Acetate or Acrylic Base

04 February 2016
13 1205/ 5

1.
2.
Acceptable Polyvinyl Acetate (Interior Only) Products:

a.
Superior Concrete Bonder by Dayton Superior
b.
Euco Weld by Euclid Chemical Company
c.
Weldcrete by Larson Products Corporation
Acceptable Acrylic or Styrene Butadiene Products:

a.
Acrylic Bondcrete by The Burke Company
b.
Day-Chem Ad Bond by Dayton Superior
c.
SBR Latex by Euclid Chemical Company
d.
Daraweld C by W R Grace
e.
Hornweld by A C Horn Incorporated
f.
Everbond by L & M Construction Chemicals
g.
Acryl-Set by Master Builders Incorporated
h.
Intralock by W R Meadows Incorporated
i.
Sonocrete by Sonnoborn-Rexnord
j.
Stanlock LB2 by Stonhard, Incorporated
E.
Epoxy Adhesive: ASTM C881, two-component material suitable for use on dry or damp surfaces. Provide
material Type, Grade, and Class to suit project requirements
1.
2.4

a.
Burke Epoxy M. V. by The Burke Company
b.
Spec-Bond 100 Conspec Marketing and Manufacturing Company, Incorporated
c.
Euco Epoxy 452 or 620 by Euclid Chemical Company
d.
Thiopoxy by W R Grace
e.
Epoxtite Binder 2390 by A C Horn Incorporated
f.
Conressive 1001 by Master Builders Incorporated
g.
Sikadur 32 Hi-Mod by SIKA Corporation
PROPORTIONING AND DESIGN OF MIXES
A.
General: Prepare Mix Designs for each type and strength of shotcrete by either laboratory trial batch or
field experience methods as specified in ACI 301
1.
If trail batch method is used

a.
Use an independent testing facility acceptable to the Architect/Engineer for preparing and
reporting proposed mix designs
2.
The testing facility shall not be the same as used for field quality control testing
3.
Limit the use of fly ash to a maximum of 25 percent of cement content by weight
4.
Submit written reports to Engineer of each proposed mix for each class of shotcrete at least 15 days
prior to the start of the Work
5.
Do not begin shotcrete production until the Engineer has reviewed the proposed mix designs to be in
accordance with the Contract Documents and Specifications
B.
Design Mixes to provide Normal Weight Shotcrete with the following properties, or as indicated on the
Contract Documents and Schedules
1.
5,000 psi (34.5 MPa) minimum 28-day compressive strength

04 February 2016
13 1205/ 6

2.
C.
D.
Air content, when using wet-mix process, of 6 to 8 percent in the pre-placed mix
Adjustment to Shotcrete Mixes:

1.
The Contractor may request mix design adjustments when characteristics of the material, job
conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant at no additional cost to the Owner and
as acceptable by the Architect/Engineer.
2.
Laboratory test data for revised mix design and strength results must be submitted to and accepted by
the Architect/Engineer before use
Admixtures:
1.
Use water-reducing admixture or high range water-reducing admixture (super plasticizer) in shotcrete
as required for placement and workability
a.
Use air-entraining admixture in exterior exposed shotcrete, unless otherwise indicated
b.
Use Admixtures for water-reducing and set control in strict compliance with the Manufacturers
directions
E.
Develop mix design to give good compaction and low percentage of rebound; stiff enough not to sag when
placed vertically
F.
Maintain quality control records during production of shotcrete; records must be made available at all times
during construction and submitted at the end of construction
2.5
WATER FEATURE SHOTCRETE EQUIPMENT

A.
B.
C.
Mixing Equipment:
1.
Capable of mixing shotcrete materials in sufficient quantities to maintain continuous placement and
thoroughly coating aggregate with cement particles
2.
Mixer shall be self-cleaning (i.e. capable of discharging all mixed material without any carry over from
one batched to the next) and be thoroughly cleaned at least once a day to prevent accumulations of
batched material
Air Supply:
1.
Provide uniform, steady supply of clean, dry air to maintain constant nozzle velocity while operating
blow pipe for cleaning away rebound.
2.
Provide air pressure gauge at outlet of the gun to continuously monitor air pressure at the nozzle in
accordance with ACI 506, Table 401c
Wet-Mix Delivery Equipment:

1.
D.
Capable of discharging aggregate-cement-water mixture accurately, uniformly, and continuously
Dry-Mix Delivery Equipment:

1.
Capable of discharging aggregate-cement mixture into delivery hose under close control and
maintaining continuous stream of uniformly mixes material at required velocity to discharge nozzle
2.
Equip discharge nozzle with manually operated water-injection system for directing even distribution of
water to aggregate-cement mixture
3.
Provide water supply with uniform pressure at discharge nozzle sufficiently greater than operating air
pressure to ensure complete mixing with the aggregate-cement mixture
4.
Provide water pump to system if line water pressure is inadequate

04 February 2016
13 1205/ 7

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
BATCHING AND MIXING

A.
B.
General:
1.
Control mix proportion by weight batching, or by volume batching meeting requirements of ASTM C685
2.
If permitted by the Engineer, other batching procedures may be used provided a minimum of one (1)
weight batching check is made every 8 hours or for every 50 cu. yd (38 cu. m) passing through the
nozzle to ensure that specified mixture design is achieved
3.
Use batching and mixing equipment capable of proportioning and mixing ingredients (except water in
the case of dry-mix equipment) at a rate that provides adequate production and with an accuracy that
ensures uniformity of batches
4.
Use weighing equipment capable of batching with accuracy specified in ASTM C94
5.
Use volumetric equipment capable of batching with accuracy specified in ASTM C685. In volume
batching, adjust fine aggregate volume for bulking. Test fine aggregate moisture content at least once
daily to determine extent of bulking
Ready-Mix Materials:
1.
3.2
Comply with ASTM C94, except it may be delivered to shotcrete equipment in the dry state if
equipment is capable of adding water and mixing it satisfactorily with dry ingredients. Or comply with
ASTM C685 when ingredients are delivered dry and proportioned and mixed at site
SURFACE PREPARATION
A.
B.
C.
Existing Concrete or Masonry

1.
Remove unsound material before applying shotcrete
2.
Chip or scarify areas to be repaired to extent necessary to provide a sound substrate
3.
Taper edges to leave no square shoulders at perimeter of cavity. Remove loose material from areas
receiving shotcrete
4.
Sandblast existing surfaces that do not require chipping to remove paint, oil, grease, or other
contaminants and provide roughened surface for proper bonding of shotcrete
5.
Wet surfaces until damp but without visible free water
Earth:
1.
Compact and trim to line and grade before placing shotcrete
2.
Do not place shotcrete on frozen surfaces
3.
Dampen surfaces just prior to shotcrete placement
Rock:
1.
3.3
Clean rock surfaces of loose material, mud, and other foreign matter that will prevent bond of shotcrete
INSPECTION
A.
Refer to overall Project Specification for inspection requirements
B.
Verify that conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive Work
C.
Verify fabricated forms are true to line and dimension, adequately braced against vibration during
placement, constructed to permit escape of trapped air during gunning operations, and constructed to minimize
rebound during gunning operations
D.
Verify pipes, conduits, box outs, and other penetrations required by other trades are installed and properly
anchored and secured prior to applying shotcrete

04 February 2016
13 1205/ 8

E.
Verify that all grounding connections are installed prior to placing concrete. All Steel Reinforcement must
be grounded in accordance with the National Electrical Code (NFPA 70)
3.4
ALIGNMENT
A.
Provide alignment wire to establish thickness and plane of required surfaces
B.
Install alignment wire at corners and offsets not established by forms
C.
Tighten alignment wire true to line. Position adjustment devices to permit additional tightening
3.5
JOINTS
A.
Joints are not allowed in Pool shells. Pool shells are intended to be poured as a continuous and
homogeneous shell. Prior approval must be obtained from the Engineer before installing Joints
B.
C.
3.6
Construction Joints
1.
Locate and install construction joints as indicated on the Contract Documents or, if not indicated,
submit desired location that does not impair strength and appearance of the structure to the Engineer
of Record
2.
Place construction joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across

construction joints where not otherwise shown
3.
Fill and seal joints with appropriate materials to provide a water tight joint
Contraction Joints:
1.
Construct contraction joints in slabs-on-ground to form panels of patterns as shown in the Contract
Documents
2.
Use saw cuts 1/8 inch (3mm) by 1/3 slab depth or inserts 1/4 inch (6mm) wide by 1/3 of shotcrete
depth, where not otherwise indicated
3.
Form contraction joints by inserting pre-molded plastic, hardboard, or fiberboard strip into fresh
shotcrete until top surface of strip is flush with shotcrete surface. Tool edges round on each side of
insert. After shotcrete has cured, remove inserts and clean groove of loose debris
4.
If joint pattern in not shown, provide joints not exceeding 15 feet (4.5m) in both directions and located
to conform to bay spacing wherever possible (at column centerlines, half bays, third bays)
5.
Fill and seal joints with appropriate materials to provide a water tight joint
INSTALLATION OF EMBEDDED ITEMS

A.
General:
1.
B.
Edge Forms and Screed Strips for Slabs:

1.
3.7
Set and build into Work anchorage devices and other embedded items required for other work that is
attached to or supported by shotcrete. Use setting drawings, diagrams, instructions, and directions
provided by suppliers of items to be attached
Set edge forms or bulkheads and intermediate screed strips for slabs to obtain required elevations and
contours in finished slab surface. Provide and secure units sufficiently strong to support types of
screed strips by use of strike-off templates or accepted compacting-type screeds
WATER FEATURE SHOTCRETE APPLICATION

A.
General: Comply with ACI 304 and as herein specified
B.
Place concrete on properly prepared undisturbed subgrade materials or engineered fill. Refer to the
Geotechnical Soils Report for recommendations
C.
Moisten wood forms immediately before placing shotcrete where form coatings are not used
D.
Apply temporary protective covering to guard against splattering during placement

04 February 2016
13 1205/ 9

E.
Direct outlet nozzle perpendicular to surface to ensure maximum compaction with minimum rebound
F.
Deposit shotcrete continuously or in layers of such thickness that shotcrete is not placed on material that
has hardened sufficiently to cause the formation of seams or planes of weakness
G.
Do not permit applied shotcrete to sag, slough, or displace
H.
Placing Shotcrete Slabs:
I.
J.
3.8
1.
Deposit and consolidate shotcrete slabs in a continuous operation until the placing of a panel or
section is complete
2.
Consolidate shotcrete during placing operations so that shotcrete is thoroughly worked around
reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners
3.
Bring slab surfaces to correct level with straightedge and strike off. Use bull floats or darbies to smooth
surface, free of humps or hallows. Do not Disturb slab surface prior to beginning finishing operations
4.
Maintain reinforcing in proper position and with proper coverage during shotcrete placement operations
Cold-Weather Placing:
1.
Protect shotcrete Work from physical damage or reduced strength by frost, freezing, or low
temperatures in compliance with ACI 306 and as specified
2.
When ambient air temperatures has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 F (4.4 C), uniformly heat
water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a shotcrete mix temperature of not less than 50 F (10
C) and not more than 80 F (26.7 C) at point of placement
3.
Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place shotcrete on frozen
subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials
4.
Do not use calcium chloride, salt, and other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical
accelerator unless accepted in the mix designs
Hot-Weather Placing:
1.
When hot-weather conditions exist that would seriously impair quality and strength of shotcrete, place
in compliance with ACI 305 and as specified
2.
Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain shotcrete temperature at time of placement below 90 F (32
C). Mixing water may be chilled, or chopped ice may be used to control temperature provided that
water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Use of liquid nitrogen to cool
shotcrete is the Contractors option
3.
Cover reinforcing steel with water soaked burlap if it becomes too hot, so that steel temperature does
not exceed the ambient air temperature immediately before placement
4.
Fog spray forms, reinforcing steel, and subgrade just before shotcrete is placed
5.
Use water-reducing retarding admixture (Type D) when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or
other adverse placing conditions
SURFACE FINISHES
A.
Unexposed Surfaces: Provide natural gun finish unless otherwise indicated
B.
Exposed Surfaces:
1.
Screed smooth areas on exposed face of structures to original plane, then lightly float and trowel for
continuous, smooth finish. Remove alignment wires or other alignment control devices
2.
Flash Coat: After screeding, apply a 1/8 to 1/4 inch (3 to 6mm) coat of shotcrete using fine screened
sand. Keep application nozzle at a distance greater than required for normal shotcreting
3.
Provide wood float finish after application of flash coat

04 February 2016
13 1205/ 10

3.9
CURING AND PROTECTION

A.
Cure surfaces in accordance with ACI 308
B.
General : Protect freshly placed shotcrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures
C.
Start initial curing as soon as free water has disappeared from shotcrete surface after placing and finishing
using the following approved methods
1.
2.
Horizontal Surfaces
a.
Wet Curing by Ponding: Maintain 100 percent coverage of water over floor slab areas maximum
1/4 inch (6mm) deep
b.
Wet Curing by Spraying: Spray water over floor slab area as required to prevent surface drying
Vertical Surfaces
a.
Wet Curing with Burlap Sacks: Place burlap sacks over the entire surface, wet sacks as required
to prevent surface drying
b.
Wet Curing by Spraying: Spray water over floor slab area as required to prevent surface drying
D.
Continue curing placed shotcrete and maintain surface wetting for at least seven (7) days using the
method described in this section or as approved by the Engineer
E.
3.10
Curing compounds may not be used, unless specifically approved by the Engineer prior to application
REMOVAL OF FORMS
A.
Forms not supporting weight of shotcrete may be removed after 24 hours if shotcrete has cured at
temperatures greater than 50 F (10 C) and provided shotcrete is sufficiently hard that it will not be damaged by
form removal operations and provided curing and protection operations are maintained
B.
Forms supporting weight of shotcrete may not be removed in less than 14 days and until shotcrete has
attained design minimum compressive strength at 28-days. Determine potential compressive strength of In-Place
shotcrete by testing field-cured specimens representative of shotcrete location or members
C.
Form-facing material may be removed four (4) days after placement only if shores and other vertical
supports have been arranged to permit removal without loosening or disturbing shores and supports
3.11
REPAIR OF DEFECTS
A.
Remove and replace shotcrete that lacks uniformity, or exhibits segregation, honeycomb, delamination, or
contains dry patches, single voids in excess of 1/2 inch (12mm) in any direction or sand pockets
B.
Perform a sounding test to the applied material with a hammer for voids. Expose voids and replace with
new shotcrete ensuring full bond with adjacent Work
C.
Remove over spray and rebound material that does not fall clear of Work; discard salvaged rebound
END OF SECTION

04 February 2016
13 1205/ 11

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.
C.
1.2

1.
Cementitious (Marcite) Plaster Finishes
2.
Exposed Aggregate Finishes
Related Sections:
1.
2.
3.
SECTION 13 1302 WATER FEATURE TILE FINISHES
4.
5.
References:
1.
ASTM C136 STANDARD TEST METHOD FOR SIEVE ANALYSIS OF FINE AND COURSE
AGGREGATE
2.
ASTM C150 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR PORTLAND CEMENT

A.
B.
Product Data: Submit manufacturers literature and product information including recommended surface
preparation, mix proportions, application guidelines, maintenance and repair recommendations, and cleaning
methods including cleaning solutions and stain removal methods
C.
Samples: Submit four (4) 2 x 4 inch (50 x 100mm) color samples of each type and color of finish.
Architect/Landscape Architect shall approve color samples
D.
Laboratory Tests: Provide lab test results on potable water to be used in cleaning, mixing, and filling the
pool systems. The Test shall include heavy metals, such as copper and iron, along with levels of carbon dioxide,
pH, total alkalinity, total calcium hardness, total dissolved solids, and temperature.
E.
Special Project Warranty: Provide a written warranty, executed by the Contractor, Installer, and
Manufacturer, agreeing to repair or replace materials that fail in material or workmanship within two (2) years after
the date of Substantial Completion
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Minimum of five (5) years experience in supplying plaster pool finish materials
B.
Installer Experience: Minimum of five (5) years of documented experience specialized in the installation of
plaster pool finishes
C.
Single Source Supplier: Obtain plaster materials from a single source manufacturer to insure uniformity
and compatibility
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Cementitious (Marcite) Plaster Finish

04 February 2016
13 1301/ 1

13 1301WATER FEATURE PLASTER FINISHES
B.
2.2
1.
Premix Marbletite Architectural Finishes - Poolcote
2.
CL Industries - Hydrazzo
3.
Approved Alternate
Exposed Aggregate Finish

1.
SGM, Incorporated - Diamond Brite
2.
Universal Pool Supply, LLC Gemstone
3.
Pebble Technology International Pebble Tec
4.
CL Industries Krystalkrete
5.
Approved Alternate
MATERIAL PROPERTIES
A.
B.
2.3
Cementitious (Marcite) Plaster Finish

1.
Aggregate shall be pure white crushed marble meeting ASTM C136-81
2.
Cement shall be white Portland cement meeting ASTM C150
3.
Ratio of cement to aggregate (mix) shall be proportioned to meet local region standards that are based
upon experience and have a proven track record within the region. Minimum acceptable mix shall
consists of one part cement and two parts aggregate by weight
Exposed Aggregate Finish

1.
Use only polished aggregate, rough cut aggregate is not acceptable
2.
Submit mixture for approval
FINISH SPECIFICATION
A.
General
1.
B.
Pool finish material and color selection shall be in accordance with the finish schedule of the
Architect/Landscape Architect
Pools Finish
1.
Pool Finish and Finish Color shall be as specified by the Architect/Landscape Architect
2.
Refer to SECTION 13 1302 WATER FEATURE TILE FINISHES for Waterline Tile, Stair Tile, and
Depth Markers
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSPECTION
A.
Examine surfaces for conditions that will adversely affect execution, permanence, and quality of the Work
1.
Such as calcium leaching, pitting, chalking, or chipping
B.
Verify surfaces to be finished are free of dirt, dust, loose particles, oils, grease, and foreign matter that may
affect bonding
C.
Verify concrete/shotcrete surfaces are uniform and smooth. Purge uneven areas that are greater than 2
inches (50mm) deep with a 3 to 1 mix of sand and cement or as recommended by the manufacturer
D.
Verify anchors, escutcheons, caps, covers, jets, inlets, light fixture housings, and other embedded items
are installed prior to proceeding with the Plaster Work

04 February 2016
13 1301/ 2

3.2
APPLICATION
A.
Install plaster material in strict accordance with all manufacturers application guidelines and
recommendations
B.
C.
Use only surface preparation cleaners and cleaning agents approved by the manufacturer.
1.
If recommended, provide an acid wash with a 50/50 solutions of muriatic acid and water
2.
Rinse with water and baking soda solution to neutralize the acid
3.
Rinse a final time with clean water
Use only potable water, soft water is unacceptable, in all applications of cleaning, rinsing, and mixing.
1.
Potable water shall be Laboratory Tested as stated above
D.
Install Tile around the perimeter and where indicated on the Contract Documents as specified in SECTION
13 1302
E.
Prior to application of plaster, wet or mist walls and/or bottom of the pool in the area where the plaster is
to be applied just prior to applying plaster.
1.
F.
Concrete surface should be dampened, plaster should not be applied over running or standing water
Finish to be installed to a thickness of 3/8 to inch (9mm to 19mm) over the entire surface
1.
Smooth and level walls and floors while troweling and floating finish.
2.
Plaster thickness around and under fittings shall be in accordance with the fitting manufacturers
recommendations
G.
Trowels used to finish plaster shall be sufficiently long enough to even out small variations in the pool wall.
Plaster shall be finished smooth.
H.
I.
3.3
Finish shall be applied over the entire surface at one time to eliminate joint lines.
1.
The Contractor shall provide all necessary tools, manpower, and materials to complete the job at one
time
2.
Tile joints will not be acceptable
Use light water washing and cleaning solutions as recommended by the manufacturer
QUAILTY CONTROL
A.
Neatly patch or replace damaged finish surfaces. Voids or hollow areas in the pool plaster are to be
considered damaged surface
B.
Fill pool with potable water within the manufacturers recommended time frame, usually within several
hours (no more than 48 hours) after the application of the finish material
C.
Water shall be filled through the main drains allowing the fill water to flow out of the main drain and across
the pool floor, filling the lowest levels of the pool.
1.
Water shall not be allowed to flow over the finished plaster
D.
Water should be chemically balanced immediately after the pool is filled or while filling the pool
E.
Brush the entire pool finish twice a day for the first week
F.
Acid washing after the finish is applied will not be allowed and is unacceptable
END OF SECTION

04 February 2016
13 1301/ 3

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.
C.
1.2

1.
Waterline Tile
2.
Nosing Tile
3.
Depth and Safety Markers
4.
Mosaic Tiles
5.
Pool Coping
6.
Adhesives and Grout
Related Sections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
References:
1.
ANSI A108.4 CERAMIC TILE INSTALLED WITH ORGANIC OR EPOXY ADHESIVES
2.
ANSI A108.6 CERAMIC TILE INSTALLED WITH CHEMICAL EPOXY MORTAR GROUT
3.
ANSI A118.3 SPECIFICATION FOR CHEMICAL RESISTANT, WATER CLEANABLE TILESETTING AND GROUTING ADHESIVE
4.
ANSI A118.4 FAST-SETTING LATEX HYDRAULIC THIN-SET MORTAT AND LATEX PORTLAND
CEMENT MORTAR
5.
ANSI A137.1 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR CERAMIC TILE
6.
HANDBOOK FOR CERAMIC TILE INSTALLATION

A.
B.
Tile Product Data: Submit manufacturers literature and product data, specifications, installation
instructions, cleaning instructions, and recommended stain removal methods for each type of Tile and Coping
C.
Grout Product Data: Submit manufacturers literature and product data, specifications, and instructions for
using mortars, adhesives, and grouts
D.
Shop Drawings: Provide a shop drawing indicating tile and coping layout, patterns, color arrangement,
terminating edge conditions, and setting details
E.
Samples:
1.
Samples shall be approved by the Architect/Landscape Architect
2.
Submit representative color samples of each type and size of tile
3.
Submit a 12 x 12 inch (0.3 x 0.3m) sample of coping with finish edge conditions
4.
Upon final selection, submit tile mock-up on a plywood backer board, illustrating tile patterns and
colors, grout joint widths and colors, and maximum color variations anticipated.

04 February 2016
13 1302/ 1

13 1302WATER FEATURE TILE FINISHES
a.
F.
Size of mock-up to allow for at least four (4) tiles, minimum 12 by 12 inches (0.3 x 0.3m)
Grout Samples:
1.
Submit manufacturers full range of standard and designated color samples for each type of designers
selection for review by the Architect/Landscape Architect
2.
Submit samples mounted in a 6 inch (150mm) long metal channel for each type and color specified for
review by the Architect/Landscape Architect
G.
Tile Certifications: Submit Master Grade Certificate for each type of ceramic tile in accordance with
requirements of ANSI A137
H.
Grout Certifications: Submit manufacturers certifications that mortars, adhesives, and grouts are suitable
for use in swimming pools, hot tubs, and/or fountains
I.
Special Project Warranty: Submit a written warranty, executed by the Contractor, Installer, and
Manufacturer, agreeing to repair or replace materials that fail in material or workmanship within two (2) years after
date of Substantial Completion
1.3
FIELD SAMPLES
A.
Construct and install field samples of approximately 50 sq ft (4.6 sq. m) of each type of tile and grout for
final review.
B.
Show workmanship of finished work and construction techniques
C.
Approved field samples may remain as part of the Work
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing of pool tile products having a
minimum of five (5) years experience
B.
Installer Experience: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum of five
years experience
C.
Single Source Supplier: Obtain tile and grout materials from single source manufacturer to ensure
uniformity and compatibility
1.5

A.
Deliver materials in manufacturers unopened containers, fully identified with name, brand, type, and grade
B.
Protect materials from contamination, dampness, freezing, or overheating in accordance with the
manufacturers instructions
C.
Broken, cracked, chipped, stained, or damaged tile will be rejected, whether built-in or not
D.
Protect mortar and grout from moisture, soiling, staining, freezing, or overheating in accordance with
manufacturers instructions
1.6
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
Comply with requirements of material manufacturers recommendations and reference standards for
environmental conditions before, during, and after installation
B.
Maintain temperatures of not less than 50 F (10 C) or more than 95 F (35 C) during installation of tile
and mortar materials and for seven (7) days after completion, unless higher temperatures are required by ANSI
Installation Standards or manufacturers written instructions
C.
When necessary, build temporary shelters and use indirect auxiliary heaters to maintain adequate
temperature level in working environment. Exhaust temporary heaters to an exterior location to prevent damage to
work from carbon dioxide emissions

04 February 2016
13 1302/ 2

1.7
EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
Provide at least two percent (2%) of each size, color, and surface finish of each type of tile specified to be
delivered to the Owner
B.
Store in location as directed by the Owner
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
TILE MANUFACTURERS
A.
B.
C.
D.
Waterline Tile
1.
Dal-Tile
2.
Alpha Tile
3.
Bolart Custom Tile
4.
Crevill, Incorporated
5.
Approved Alternate
Nosing Tile
1.
Dal-Tile
2.
Tile Specialties High Springs, Florida
3.
Approved Alternate
Depth and Safety Markers

1.
Inlays, Incorporated
2.
Agape Tile Manufacturers
3.
Degroot Studios, Incorporated
4.
Approved Alternate
Mosaic Tile
1.
Alpha Tile
2.
Agape Tile Manufacturers
3.
Artistry in Mosaics
4.
Bolart Custom Tile
5.
Dal-Tile
6.
Degroot Studios, Incorporated
7.
Graphic Tile
8.
Innovative Marble and Tile
9.
Interstate Ceramic and Glass
10. Kolorines
11. Renato Misazza, Incorporated
12. Swedecor Specialist
13. Talisman Tiles
14. Approved Alternate

04 February 2016
13 1302/ 3

E.
F.
2.2
Pool Coping
1.
DC Kerckhoff
2.
Federal Stone
3.
Wausau Tile
4.
Approved Alternate
Adhesives and Grouts

1.
Mapei Corporation
2.
Laticrete International, Incorporated
3.
Dal-Tile
4.
Approved Alternate
FINISH SPECIFICATIONS
A.
Pools Tile Finish

1.
Pool Coping
a.
2.
Waterline Tile:
a.
3.
2.3
Refer to Architect/Landscape Architect specifications for Material, Color, Pattern, Size and Style
Nosing Tile:
a.
5.
Mosaic Tile
a.
4.
Refer to Architect/Landscape Architect specifications for Material, Color, Size and Style
Depth and Safety Markers:

a.
Material: Glazed, semi-gloss finish, slip resistant, ceramic tile
b.
Pattern:
1).
Depth Marker: 4 inch (0.1m) tall solid black letters on white background
2).
Safety Marker: black letters, red symbol on white background
c.
Font: Arial
d.
Size: 6 x 6 inches (150 x 150mm)
GENERAL MATERIAL PROPERTIES

A.
All Tiles:
1.
Single manufacturer for each type, variety, and color for each pool
2.
Frost resistant
3.
Resistant to chemical attack
4.
Water absorption of 0.5% or less
5.
Colors shall be resistant to fading
6.
Designed to be used in a swimming pool or spa environment
7.
Tiles placed on horizontal surfaces shall be slip resistant

04 February 2016
13 1302/ 4

B.
Colors, Textures, and Patterns: Where manufacturers standard products are indicated for tile, grout, and
other products requiring selection of colors, surface textures, patterns, and other appearance characteristics,
provide specific products or materials complying with the following requirements:
1.
Match Designers sample, if provided
2.
Provide tile trim and accessories that match color and finish of adjoining tile unless noted otherwise
C.
Factory Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within the ranges selected during sample submittal,
blend tile in the factory and package accordingly, so that tile units taken from one package show the same range in
color as those taken from other packages and match the approved samples
D.
Mounting: Do not use back or edge mounted tile assemblies unless tile manufacturer specifies that the
type of mounting is suitable for the application and has been successfully used on other projects
2.4
CERAMIC TILES
A.
2.5
Comply with ANSI A137.1 for types, compositions, and grades of tile indicated
MOSAIC TILES
A.
Glass Mosaic Tiles: Tile shall be impervious glass tiles, textured backs for adhesive grip, beveled edges
for smooth corners, and smooth face
1.
2.6
Jagged or sharp edges are unacceptable
SETTING MATERIALS
A.
Flexible Acrylic Latex Portland Cement Mortar: KERABOND/KERALASTIC, white color, two component
flexible mortar system conforming to ANSI A118.4 standards, as manufactured by Mapei or approved equal
B.
Flexible Fast Setting Latex Hydraulic Mortar: KER 318 GRANI/RAPID, white color, two component flexible
latex hydraulic thin-set mortar conforming to ANSI A118.10 standards, as manufactured by Mapei or approved
equal
2.7
GROUTING MATERIALS
A.
Sanded Tile Grout: KER 200 polymer-modified sanded Portland cement grout conforming to ANSI A118.6
standards, as manufactured by Mapei or approved equal. Color shall be approved by Architect/Landscape
Architect
B.
Fast-Curing Sanded Grout: KER 700 Ultra/Color polymer-modified hydraulic sanded tile grout conforming
to ANSI A118.6 standards, as manufactured by Mapei or approved equal. Color shall be approved by
Architect/Landscape Architect
C.
2.8
Water: Clean, Cold, Potable Water

WATERPROOF BARRIER
A.
Waterproofing compound as recommended by the tile manufacturer
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify concrete surface to receive tile finish has been cured a minimum of 28 days prior to installing tiles,
mortar beds, and grout
B.
Verify no sealer or curing compounds were used on concrete surfaces to be covered with tile and that the
concrete surfaces have been finished with a wood float.
1.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the removal of any such contamination that may prevent or
reduce adhesion by bead-blasting or sand-blasting. Then wetting down or washing the entire surface

04 February 2016
13 1302/ 5

and removing excess water prior to application of mortar bed

C.
Verify anchors, escutcheons, caps, covers, jets, inlets, light fixture housings, and other embedded items
are installed prior to proceeding with the Tile Work
D.
Verify that areas to receive tile installed by thin-set bed method have a wood float finish, are true within
inch (6mm) in 10 feet (3m), and are pitched to drains where required
E.
Verify surfaces to be finished are free of dirt, dust, loose particles, oils, grease, and foreign matter that may
affect bonding
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
Prepare surfaces in strict accordance with instructions of the manufacturer whose setting materials or
additives are being used
B.
Scarify concrete substrates with blast track equipment, if necessary, to completely remove curing
compounds or other substances that would interfere with proper bond of setting materials
C.
Apply waterproofing membrane over the entire area where tile is to be installed in strict accordance with
the manufacturers recommendations. Grout and tile do not constitute a waterproof barrier
3.3
GENERAL INSTALLATION
A.
Install tile material in strict accordance with
recommendations and in accordance with ANSI A137.1
the manufacturers
application guidelines and
B.
When installing large tiles, ceramic or mosaic, trowel small quantity of mortar or adhesive onto the back of
each tile or sheet of tiles, lay tile to pattern. Do not interrupt tile pattern through openings, cut tile insuring tight fit.
Ensure finish trim will cover cut tile edges
C.
Cut and fit tile tight to protrusions and vertical interruptions. Form corners and bases neatly. Form internal
angles coved and external angles bull nosed
3.4
LAYOUT
A.
Layout work to pattern indicated so that full tile or joint is centered on each wall and no tiles of less than
half width need be used. Do not interrupt pattern through openings. Layout tile to minimize cutting and to avoid tile
less than half size
B.
No staggered joints in the tile will be allowed
C.
Align joints in both directions
D.
Align joints between the floor and wall tiles
E.
Make joints between sheets of tile exactly the same width as joints within the sheet
F.
Cut and fit tile at penetrations through tile. Do not damage the visible surface of the tile. Carefully grind
edges of tile abutting built-in items. Fit tile at all pipe and fitting penetrations, insure covers overlap cut tiles
G.
Extend tile work into recesses, inside gutters, and behind fixtures, to form a complete covering without
interruptions. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners with disrupting the pattern or joint
alignments
3.5
TILE INSTALLATION
A.
Thin-Set Installation Option

1.
Apply mortar or adhesive with notched trowel using a scraping motion to work material into good
contact with surface to be covered and in strict accordance with the manufacturers recommendation.
Maintain 90% coverage on the back of the tile and fully bed all corners
2.
Apply only as much mortar or adhesive as can be covered within allowable windows as recommended
by mortar or adhesive manufacturer on while surface is still tacky
3.
Set tile or sheet of tiles in place and beat tile with wooden block. Beat or rap tile to ensure proper bond

04 February 2016
13 1302/ 6

and also to level surface of tile
B.
4.
Align tile to show uniform joints between all tiles and allow to set until firm
5.
Clean excess mortar or adhesive from surface of tile with wet cheese cloth (no sponges will be
allowed) while the mortar is fresh
6.
Allow face mounted tile to set until firm before removing paper and before grouting
7.
Sound tile after setting. Replace hollow sounding tiles
8.
Allow tile to set for a minimum of 48 hours prior to grouting. After tile has set, grout tile joints
Thick Bed Installation Option

1.
Apply slurry bond coat (scratch coat) approximately 1/16 inch (1.5mm) thick to substrate surface using
a flat trowel
2.
Place thick bed mortar, to 1-1/4 inch (19 to 32mm) thick nominally onto slurry bond coat while coat is
still wet and tacky. Apply rod and float mortar bed to a uniform plumb and level surface
3.
Apply mortar bed over an area that can be covered by tile before mortar dries. Do not let mortar bed
dry or place tile on a dried mortar bed
4.
Before placing tiles on green or wet mortar bed, apply waterproof slurry bond coat approximately 1/16
inch (1.5mm) thick to mortar using a flat trowel
5.
Apply water proof slurry coat to back of each tile or sheet of tile immediately prior to placing on bed.
Place tiles in wet slurry coat before surface dries maintaining uniform joints
6.
After each tile or sheet of tiles is laid, beat tile with wooden block to level surface and embed tiles into
slurry coat. Move block in diagonal movements in a manner to prevent misalignment of the tiles or
sheet lines. Immediately correct uneven or misaligned tiles.
7.
Place each tile or sheet of tiles into place insuring the separation between tiles is uniformly the same
between all tiles on the sheet
8.
Sound tiles after setting. Replace hollow sounding tiles
9.
Clean excess mortar or adhesive from surface of tile with wet cheese cloth (not a sponge) with mortar
is fresh
10. After tile has set, grout tile joints

3.6
EXPANSION AND CONTROL JOINTS
A.
Install control joints where the tile abuts restraining surfaces, around the perimeter of the tile work and
where two substrates of different compositions meet in the same place
B.
Install and space expansion and control joints in all directions in strict accordance with the instructions of
the Tile Council of Americas Detail #EJ-171 as described in the latest edition of their Handbook for Ceramic Tile
Installation. Expansion joints shall be raked or cut through the setting bed to the supporting slab or structure
C.
Do not cut expansion and control joints after the tile has been installed. The installer should tile to the joint
and stop. If required, cut the tile and commence tiling from the opposite side. Before continuing rake the joint clean
3.7
GROUTING
A.
Allow tile to set a minimum of 48 hours prior to grouting, or in accordance with the manufacturers
installation instructions
B.
After the tile has set, install grout in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations
C.
Pack joints full and free before mortar takes initial set. Clean tiles completely leaving no apparent cement
laitance or epoxy film on the surface. Do not acid wash
D.
Seal grout in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations. Insure sealer, if used, is compatible
with the tile finish

04 February 2016
13 1302/ 7

3.8
PROTECTION
A.
Protect finish Work against weather, freezing, and complete water immersion for at least 72 hours after
completion of the Work. Do no immerse in water until full setting has occurred as recommended by the
manufacturer
B.
Protect finished work from damage due to traffic, impact, vibration, hammering, etc. for a minimum of 72
hours after installation
C.
Protect Work so that it will be without any evidence of damage or use at time of acceptance
END OF SECTION

04 February 2016
13 1302/ 8

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.

1.
Supplying and installing High-Density Polyethylene (HDPE) geomembrane liner
2.
Supplying and installing Linear Low-Density Polyethylene (LLDPE) geomembrane liner
REFERENCES
1.
ASTM D413 STANDARD TEST METHODS FOR RUBBER PROPERTY
2.
ASTM D751 STANDARD TEST METHODS FOR COATED FABRICS
3.
ASTM D471 STANDARD TEST METHOD FOR RUBBER PROPERTY EFFECTS OF LIQUIDS
4.
ASTM D792 STANDARD TEST METHODS FOR DENSITY AND SPECIFIC GRAVITY OF
PLASTICS BY DISPLACEMENT
5.
ASTM D882 STANDARD TEST METHOD FOR TENSILE PROPERTIES OF THIN PLASTIC
SHEETING
6.
ASTM D1004 STANDARD TEST METHOD FOR TEAR RESISANCE OF PLASTIC FILM AND
SHEETING
7.
ASTM D1203 STANDARD TEST MEHTODS FOR VOLATILE LOSS FROM PLASTICS USING
ACTIVATED CARBON METHODS
8.
ASTM D1204 STANDARD TEST METHOD FOR LINEAR DIMENSIONAL CHANGES OF

NONRIGID THERMOPLASTIC SHEETING OR FILM AT ELEVATED TEMPERATURES
9.
ASTM D1238 STANDARD TEST METHOD FOR MELT FLOW RATES OF THERMOPLASTICS BY
EXTRUSION PLASTOMETER
10. ASTM D1505 STANDARD TEST METHOD FOR DENSITY OF PLASTICS BY THE DENSITYGRADIENT TECHNIQUE
11. ASTM D1593 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR NONRIGID VINYL CHLORIDE PLASTIC FILM
AND SHEETING Paragraph 9.13
12. ASTM D1603 STANDARD TEST METHOD FOR CARBON BLACK CONTENT IN OLEFIN
PLASTICS
13. ASTM D1693 STANDARD TEST METHOD FOR ENVIRONMENTAL STRESS-CRACKING OF
ETHYLENE PLASTICS
14. ASTM D2136 STANDARD TEST METHOD FOR COATED FABRICS LOW-TEMPERATURE
BEND TEST
15. ASTM D4833 STANDARD TEST METHOD FOR INDEX PUNCTURE RESISTANCE OF
GEOMEMBRANES AND RELATED PRODUCTS
16. ASTM D5199 STANDARD TEST METHOD FOR MEASURING NOMINAL THICKNESS OF
GEOSYNTHETICS
17. ASTM D5397 STANDARD TEST METHOD FOR EVALUATION OF STRESS CRACK RESISTANCE
OF POLYOLEFIN GEOMEMBRANES USING NOTCHED CONSTANT TENSILE LOAD TEST
18. ASTM D5884 STANDARD TEST METHOD FOR DETERMINING TEARING STRENGTH OF
INTERNALLY REINFORCED GEOMEMBRANES
19. ASTM D6392 STANDARD TEST METHOD FOR DETERMINING THE INTEGRITY OF
NONREINFORCED GEOMEMBRANE SEAMS PRODUCED USING THERMO-FUSION METHODS

04 February 2016
13 1303/ 1

13 1303WATER FEATURE MEMBRANE LINER
20. ASTM D6393 STANDARD TEST METHOD FOR BULK SOLID CHARACTERIZATION BY CARR
INDICES
21. ASTM G155 STANDARD PRACTICE FOR OPERATING XENON ARC LIGHT APPRATUS FOR
EXPOSURE OF NON-METALLIC MATERIALS
1.2

A.
B.
Product Data: Submit Manufacturers literature, application instruction, product test reports
C.
Shop Drawings: Fabricator to provide shop drawings showing the proposed panel layout to cover the lined
area as shown on the drawings. The shop drawings shall show the location of seams, include details showing the
termination of the panels at the edges, and method of sealing around penetrations.
D.
E.
1.3
Warranty and Certifications: Submit the following certification and test results prior to installing material:
1.
Written certification that the material meets all the requirements of PART 2.1.A Membrane Material
2.
Written test results for the testing required by PART 2.1.C Testing of Roll Goods Prior to Fabrication
3.
Written certification that the factory seams were inspected and tested in accordance with PART 2.1.E
Inspection and Testing of Factory Seams
Sample Submit four (2) 12 inch (0.3m) square samples

QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.4
Qualification of Suppliers and Installers:

1.
The fabricator shall provide a list of not less than ten (10) projects and not less than 100,000 sq. m
(one (1) million sq. ft) of manufactured membrane lining and have at least five (5) years continuous
manufacturing experience
2.
The installer shall provide a list of not less than ten (10) projects and not less than 100,000 sq. m (one
(1) million sq. ft) of successfully installed membrane lining
3.
Project lists shall show the name, address, and telephone number of the contact person
4.
Installation contractors shall be the manufacturer or a dealer trained to install manufactured lining
MEETING
A.
A daily meeting shall be held at the work area just prior to commencement of the work to discuss work
activities. The earthwork contractor, the liner installer, the inspector, and the owners representative shall be
present
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A.
FABRICATION
1.
The EPDM liner shall have a nominal thickness as specified on the drawings and be specifically
manufactured to be suitable for use in exposed and buried conditions.
2.
The liner shall conform to the material properties in Table 1 or 2.

04 February 2016
13 1303/ 2

2.2
ETHYLENE PROPYLENE DIENE MONOMER (EPDM) GEOMEMBRANE LINER

A.
MATERIALS
1.
The geomembrane should be Ethylene Propylene Diene Monomer (EPDM)
2.
The material shall be uniform in color, thickness, size, and surface texture
3.
The finish liner shall be free of pinholes, blisters, and contaminants
4.
The EPDM liner shall have a smooth or matte finish on both sides and shall not be embossed
5.
The membrane shall be manufactured from a composite of high quality ingredients specifically
compounded for use in hydraulic structures
6.
Only first run materials shall be used. Reprocessed or regroud materials are not acceptable
7.
Clean rework of the same virgin ingredients generated from the Manufacturers own production run will
be allowed
8.
The lining material shall have the following minimum properties: (Note that all values, unless specified
otherwise, are minimum average roll values as reported for the test method.)
Table 1- Requirements for Non-Reinforced EPDM Liner

45mil
Properties (Value Units)
Test Method
Nominal
Thickness
60mil
Nominal
Thickness
Specific Gravity
ASTM D 792
1.1
1.1
Tensile Break Stress(lb/in)
ASTM D 882
50
50
Tensile Break Elongation (%)
(Type IV at 20
in/min)
400
400
Tear Resistance (lb)
ASTM D 1004
11
Puncture Resistance (lb)
ASTM D 4833
35
60
Low Temperature Brittleness (F)
ASTM D 1790
-45
-45
ASTM D
413/4437(NSF
modified 20 in/min
strain rate)
35
35
14
14
Shear Strength (lb/in)

At 200% Strain
Peel Strength (lb/in)
Cohesive Bong Mode
Table 2 - Requirements for Reinforced EPDM Liner

Properties (Value Units)
Test Method
45mil Nominal
Thickness
Specific Gravity
ASTM D 792
1.1
ASTM D 751
Tensile Properties
Method A
Tear Resistance (lb)

04 February 2016
ASTM D 5884
13 1303/ 3
125
130

Method B
FTMS 101C
Puncture Resistance (lb)
ASTM D 413
Ply Adhesion (lb/in)
Machine method
Low Temperature brittleness (F)

Shear Strength (lb/in)
At 200% Strain
Peel Strength (lb/in)
Cohesive Bong Mode
B.
45
Method 2031
ASTM D 1790
-45
ASTM D 751
35
ASTM D 413
14
FABRICATION
1.
The EPDM liner shall have a nominal thickness as specified on the drawings and be specifically
manufactured to be suitable for use in exposed and buried conditions.
2.
The liner shall conform to the material properties in Table 1 or 2.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
SUBGRADE PREPARATION
A.
Do not begin lining installation until a proper base has been prepared to accept the membrane lining
B.
Base for lining requires the following preparations:

1.
Base material shall be free from angular rocks, roots, grass, and vegetation
2.
Remove foreign materials and protrusions
3.
Fill all cracks and voids
4.
Make surface level or uniformly sloping as indicated on the drawings
5.
The subgrade shall be uniformly compacted to ensure against settlement
6.
Steel wheel roll subgrade prior to liner installation
C.
Maintain the surface on which the lining is to be placed, in a firm, clean, dry, and smooth condition during
lining installation
D.
If groundwater is present within 12 inches (0.3m) below the surface to be lined, dewater the area prior to
and during installation of the line
3.2
PVC PANEL PACKAGING AND STORAGE
A.
Accordion-fold factory fabricated PVC panels onto a sturdy wooden pallet designed to be moved by a
forklift or similar equipment
B.
Each factory fabricated panel shall be prominently and indelibly marked with the panel size.

04 February 2016
13 1303/ 4

C.
Fully enclosed panels in heavy, water resistant cardboard and protected to prevent damage to panel
during shipment
D.
On site, store panels in their original, unopened containers in a dry area and protected from the direct heat
of the sun where possible
E.
3.3
Do not stack pallets

EPDM GEOMEMBRANE INSTALLATION
A.
B.
General
1.
The placement of the liner shall be performed by, or under the direction of, an experienced Contractor
or Installer.
2.
The installation shall comply with the manufacturers procedures and specifications.
3.
Continuous inspection shall be provided by an experienced third party (not an employee of the
Contractor or membrane suppliers) for all deployment, seaming, seam testing, and concrete
placement.
Method of Placement
1.
The liner material shall be deployed using methods approved by the liner manufacturer. The method
chosen to deploy the panels shall not cause scratches or crimps in the liner and shall not damage the
supporting soil.
2.
The liner shall not be deployed during fog, precipitation, high humidity, condensation, in the presence
of excessive winds, or when sheet temperatures are less than 32F or greater than 122F.
3.
The liner shall be loosely spread over the foundation with sufficient slack to accommodate thermal
expansion and contraction expected during construction. Sufficient slack shall be provided near all
points of solid anchorage (welds to embedment strips fixed in concrete and pipe penetrations, etc.) to
accommodate thermal expansion and contraction expected prior to final acceptance of the work. Any
damage due to inadequate slack in the liner shall be the responsibility of the installer and shall be
repaired.
4.
Each panel shall be laid out and positioned to keep the number and length of the liner field joints to a
minimum and consistent with proper methods of installation. The method used to place the panels shall
minimize wrinkles especially along field seams. Wrinkles shall not exceed 6 inches in height or fold
over.
5.
Seams shall be oriented down, not across the slope. No horizontal seams are allowed on the side
slopes or within 5 feet of the toe or crest of a side slope. Sharp corners shall be avoided. On the floor
of a facility, up slope panel overlaps shall shingle down slope. Horizontal and T-shaped seams shall
not be placed on slopes. All T-seams or seams where three or more panels come together shall
include a minimum 24-inch diameter patch centered over the seam intersection and installed in
accordance with this specification. No base T-shaped seam shall be closer than 5 feet to the toe of the
side slope. Seams shall be aligned with the least possible number of wrinkles or "fishmouths." All
fishmouths shall be cut out and the area repaired by patching.
6.
Adequate loading (e.g., sand bags or similar items that will not damage the liner) shall be placed to
prevent relocation of the compensating wrinkles or uplift of the liner by wind.
7.
The top edge of the liner shall be placed in the anchor trench and anchored with compacted backfill.
Compact the backfill by wheel rolling with light rubber-tired equipment or a manually directed power
tamper.
8.
Construction equipment contact shall not be allowed to operate directly on the liner except for all
terrain vehicles that produce ground pressure less than 5 pounds per square inch. Portable generators
may be positioned on the lined area provided that the liner is protected by an adequate cushion of
geotextile or an additional layer of liner material. The installer shall not refuel generators or other
equipment that uses petroleum products while the equipment is located on the liner. Equipment shall

04 February 2016
13 1303/ 5

be maintained such that no petroleum products come into contact with the liner.
9.
C.
D.
Seaming
1.
Seams shall be joined using double-faced inseam tape or a cover strip in accordance with procedures
recommended by the liner manufacturer.
2.
Seaming shall not be performed when the ambient sheet temperature is below zero degrees
Fahrenheit or above 120 degrees Fahrenheit.
3.
Seaming shall extend to the outside edge of the liner to be placed in the anchor trenches. Seaming
shall not be conducted in the presence of moisture, dust, dirt, standing water, or soft subgrade.
4.
All panels must be installed without tension and without wrinkles, overlapping by at least 4 inches. All
seams on slopes must be parallel to the slope with no horizontal seams allowed.
5.
Inseam tape A primer shall be applied to both panels by a scrub pad or other approved method
recommended by the manufacturer. The primer shall cover the entire seam overlap. As soon as the
primer has flashed, install the tape on the bottom sheet, remove tape backing, lap the top sheet over
the tape, and roll with sufficient pressure to provide adequate contact between the panels.
6.
Cover strip A primer shall be applied to both panels by a scrub pad or other approved method
recommended by the manufacturer. The top sheet shall be lapped over the bottom sheet and rolled to
provide contact between the panels. Additional primer shall be applied to cover the entire seam
overlap. As soon as the primer has flashed, install the cover strip and roll it with sufficient pressure to
provide adequate contact between the cover strip and the panels.
Seam Testing
1.
2.
E.
F.
No equipment or tools shall damage the liner by handling, traffic, or by other means. Personnel
working on the liner shall not smoke, wear damaging shoes, or engage in other activities that could
damage the liner. Use of metal tools shall be kept to a minimum.
Non-Destructive Testing
a.
All field seams must be non-destructively tested using the air lance (ASTM D4437) method over
their full length. Seam testing shall be performed as the work progresses.
b.
The air lance method uses a jet of exit pressure of 50 psi directed through a 3/16 inch diameter
orifice. The jet of air is directed at the upper overlap edge of the seam to detect unbonded areas.
When an unbonded area is located, air passes through the area and inflates the overlap.
Destructive Testing
a.
Seam samples shall be cut at no more than one sample per 500 feet of weld for destructive seam
testing.
b.
All destructive seam samples shall be tested in shear and peel modes in accordance with the
ASTM specification shown in Table 1 or 2. Test seams shall meet the requirements shown in
Table 1 or 2.
c.
Repair holes in liner resulting from destructive seam sampling immediately and vacuum test in
accordance with procedures described in this specification.
Appurtenances
1.
Gas Vents or Vent Pipes shall be installed in accordance with the drawings to provide adequate
venting for the liner system.
2.
Pipe Boots for all pipes shall be fabricated in the field from the same liner material as shown on the
drawings. Pipe boots shall be clamped to the pipe as shown on the drawings to provide a leak-free
attachment.
Defects and Repairs

1.
All defective liner and seams shall be repaired and non-destructively tested prior to completion of the

04 February 2016
13 1303/ 6

installation.
3.4
2.
All tears, punctures, or material defects in the liner shall be repaired by installation of a patch over the
defective area. Surface of the liner to be patched shall be cleaned no more than 15 minutes prior to
the repair. All patches shall be made of the same liner material and extend a minimum of 6 inches
beyond the edges of the defect area. Patches shall have rounded corners and shall be seamed to the
liner.
3.
All failed seams shall be repaired by installing a cap strip over the entire length of the failed seam. The
cap strip shall be of the same liner material and shall extend beyond the failed seam a minimum of 6
inches in all directions.
COVER MATERIAL AND BACKFILLING OF ACHOR TRENCH
A.
The geomembrane shall be covered as soon as possible. The covering operation shall not damage the
geomembrane. The cover soil material shall be free of foreign and organic material, sharp objects, or debris of any
kind, which could potentially damage geomembrane. No construction equipment or machinery that may damage
the geomembrane shall operate directly on the geomembrane. The use of lightweight machinery (e.g. generator,
etc.) with low ground pressure is allowed
B.
The anchor trench shall be backfilled by the earthwork contractor. Trench backfill material shall be placed
and compacted in accordance with the project specifications
C.
Care shall be taken when backfilling the trenches to prevent any damage to the geomembrane. If damage
occurs, it shall be repaired prior to backfilling
3.5
GEOMEMBRANE ACCEPTANCE
A.
The installer shall retain all ownership and responsibility for the geomembrane until accepted by the
owner.
B.
Final acceptance is when all of the following conditions are met:

1.
Installation is complete
2.
Verification to the adequacy of all field seams and repairs, including associated testing, is complete
3.
The inspector shall provide a full report including all testing documentation for the owners and
engineers records
END OF SECTION

04 February 2016
13 1303/ 7

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.

1.
Underwater Light Fixtures
2.
Handrails
3.
Ladders
4.
Portable Vacuum Systems
5.
Pool Access Lifts
6.
Thermal Pool Covers
7.
Lane Dividers, Anchors, and Safety Lines
8.
Maintenance Kit
9.
Safety Kit
10. Safety Signage

B.
Related Sections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
SECTION 13 1511 WATER FEATURE VALVES, GAUGES, AND METERS
10. SECTION 13 1608 WATER FEATURE LIGHTING AND CONTROLS

C.
References:
1.
ASTM A967 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR CHEMICAL PASSIVATION TREATMENTS FOR

STAINLESS STEEL PARTS
2.
ASTM D751 STANDARD TEST METHODS FOR COATED FABRICS
3.
ASTM D3773 STANDARD TEST METHODS FOR LENGTH OF WOVEN FABRICS
4.
ASTM D3774 STANDARD TEST METHODS FOR WIDTH OF WOVEN FABRICS
5.
ASTM D3775 STANDARD TEST METHODS FOR WARP (END) AND FILLING (PICK) COUNT OF
WOVEN FABRIC
6.
ASTM D3776 STANDARD TEST METHODS FOR MASS PER UNIT AREA (WEIGHT) OF FABRIC
7.
ASTM G154 STANDARD PRACTICE OF OPERATING FLUORESCENT ULTRAVIOLET LAMP

APPARATUS FOR EXPOSURE TO NONMETALLIC MATERIALS
8.
National Sanitation Fountains (NSF) Standard 50 Specifications

04 February 2016
13 1305/ 1

13 1305WATER FEATURE ACCESSORIES
9.
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 70 National Electrical Code (NEC) Article 680-21
10. Underwriters Laboratories (UL)

11. 2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Designs
1.2

A.
B.
Product Data: Submit manufacturers literature including printed recommendations, compliance with
standards and testing agencies, dimensions and sizes.
1.
Indicate on submittal which materials, models, data, ratings, and options are being selected
C.
Shop Drawings: Indicate layout, general assembly, components, dimensions, clearances, and method of
assembly
D.
Maintenance Data: Include manufacturers literature, maintenance recommendations, and replacement
parts list.
1.3

A.
Accept components on site in factory packing and inspect for damage
B.
Protect all components received at site from physical damage, including effects of weather, water, and
construction
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
UNDERWATER LIGHT FIXTURES

A.
2.2
Refer to lighting consultant (Visual Energy) drawings and specifications for water feature lighting
HANDRAILS
A.
Approved Manufacturers and Suppliers

1.
Spectrum Aquatics
2.
Lincoln
3.
Recreonics
4.
Custom Fabrication
5.
Approved Equal
B.
Handrails shall be constructed of 316L stainless steel. Stair handrails shall extend at least 800mm (32
inches) above the pool deck and any other local code requirements
C.
All bends shall be wrinkle free
D.
Handrail anchors shall be H. D. bronze with bronze wedge and stainless steel bolt. Anchor shall be cast in
concrete deck, stairs, and/or pool shell
E.
Handrails and accessories must be approved by the architect prior to ordering
F.
Handrails shall be grounded according to the latest NEC requirements
2.3
LADDERS
A.

1.
Spectrum Aquatics
2.
Lincoln

04 February 2016
13 1305/ 2

3.
Recreonics
4.
Custom Fabrication
5.
Approved Equal
B.
Grab rails shall be constructed of 316L stainless steel. Stair handrails shall extend at least 700mm (28
inches) above the pool deck and any other local code requirements.
C.
Provide number of rungs necessary for the depth of pool in location shown on Constructions Documents.
Rungs shall be constructed of HDPE with molded nut inserts
D.
Grab rail anchors shall be H. D. bronze with bronze wedge and stainless steel bolt. Anchor shall be cast in
concrete deck, stairs, and/or pool shell
E.
Grab rails, recess treads, and accessories must be approved by the architect prior to ordering
F.
Grab rails shall be grounded according to the latest NEC requirements
2.4
POOL ACCESS LIFT

A.

1.
S. R. Smith
2.
Spectrum Aquatics
3.
Global Lift Corporation
4.
Recreonics
5.
Lincoln
B.
Pool lift shall be compliant with all aspects of the 2012 ADA Standards for Accessible Design, Sections
242 and 1009
C.
The Contractor shall provide the appropriate number of pool lifts to comply with the 2010 ADA Standards
for Accessible Designs.
D.
The Contractor shall provide a installation drawing from the pool lift manufacturer showing the as-built
edge condition and the interaction of the specified pool lift
E.
The Contractor shall follow all manufacturer recommendations for installation of pool lift and associated
anchors
2.5
MAINTENANCE KIT
A.
Acceptable Suppliers
1.
Recreonics
2.
Lincoln
B.
Provide one (1) maintenance kit for each swimming pool over 200 sq. feet (18.5 sq. m) of surface area,
with a minimum of one (1) kit per pool area.
C.
Each kit shall include the following:

1.
Three (3) 8 foot (2.5m) sections of 1.25 inch (32mm) diameter heavy duty stainless steel handles
2.
One (1) 24 inch (0.6m) heavy duty nylon bristle wall brush
3.
One (1) 18 inch (0.45m) algae brush
4.
One (1) nylon bristle corner brush
5.
One (1) heavy duty leaf skimmer
6.
One (1) heavy duty leaf rake

04 February 2016
13 1305/ 3

2.6
SAFETY KIT
A.
Acceptable Suppliers
1.
Recreonics
2.
Lincoln
B.
Provide one (1) safety kit for each swimming pool over 200 sq. feet (18.5 sq. m) of surface area, with a
minimum of one (1) kit per pool area.
C.
Each kit shall include one (1) of each of the following items for pools under 50 feet (15m) in both directions
and two (2) if any direction is over 50 feet (15m)
2.7
1.
20 inch (0.5m) Ring Buoy, U. S. Coast Guard approved, PFD Type IV with integral rope and holder
2.
18 foot (5.5m) heavy duty yellow aluminum pole with shepherds hook
SAFETY SIGNAGE
A.
Approved Suppliers
1.
Recreonics
2.
Lincoln
3.
Custom Fabricator
B.
Signage shall be coordinated with the architect and facility operator for layout and format of each sign
C.
Signage shall comply with local code requirements as to size of lettering and content
D.
The following are minimum recommendations:

1.
POOL RULES: Provide one (1) sign for each pool listing the following rules, coordinate with owner and
architect for additional rules for each pool:
a.
All persons using the Pool do so at their own risk. Owner and Management are responsible for
accidents or injuries.
b.
No Food or Beverages may be served on the Pool wet deck
c.
No Animals allowed in the Pool or on the Pool Deck
d.
No Running or Rough Play in Pool Area
2.
NO LIFE GUARD ON DUTY: Provide a minimum of one (1) warning sign indicating there is No Life
Guard On Duty
3.
POOL CAPACITY: Provide one (1) sign for each pool stating the maximum number of people allowed
in each pool
4.
POOL HOURS: Provide one (1) sign for each fenced pool area stating the hours of operation for the
Pool.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
GENERAL
A.
Install products, equipment, and accessories in accordance with manufacturers recommendations, local
building codes, and Public Health Department requirements
B.
Locate Underwater Light Fixtures, Handrails, Ladders, and Accessories in locations shown in the Contract
Documents

04 February 2016
13 1305/ 4

3.2
UNDERWATER LIGHT FIXTURES
A.
Install Light Fixtures a minimum of 18 inches (450mm) below water level, unless fixture is specifically
designed for shallower water
B.
All metal niches shall be positively grounded according to NEC requirements
C.
All conduit shall be water tight
D.
All floor mounted fixtures shall have foot friendly mounting rings to prevent foot entrapment or injury
E.
The Contractor shall provide the necessary junction boxes, potting compound, low voltage transformers,
and LED control systems required for complete operation of the lights
3.3
HANDRAILS AND LADDERS
A.
Install Handrails and Ladders in locations shown on the Contract Documents and in compliance with local
code requirements
B.
3.4
Contractor shall verify that all elements are properly grounded in accordance with NEC and local codes.
POOL ACCESSIBLE LIFTS
A.
Contractor shall provide the appropriate number of pool lifts to comply with the 2010 ADA Standards for
Accessible Design
3.5
POOL SIGNAGE
A.
Contractor shall locate Pool Signage as shown on the Contract Documents.
B.
When Signage is not shown on the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall refer to the architect or
landscape architect for placement
END OF SECTION

04 February 2016
13 1305/ 5

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.

1.
Furnishing and installing PVC pipe and tubing
2.
Furnishing and installing PVC pipe joints and fittings
3.
Furnishing and installing Above Grade Copper Pipe and Fittings
Related Sections:
1.
SECTION 13 1402 WATER FEATURE PIPE TESTING AND CLEANING
2.
3.
4.
SECTION 13 1501 WATER FEATURE MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.

C.
References:
1.
ASME B16.18 CAST COPPER ALLOY SOLDER JOINTS
2.
ASTM B88 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR SEAMLESS COPPER WATER TUBING
3.
ASTM D1248 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR POLYETHYLENE MOLDING AND EXTRUSION

MATERIALS
4.
ASTM D1785 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR POLY(VINYL CHLORIDE) (PVC) PLASTIC PIPE,
SCHEDULES 40, 80 AND 120
5.
ASTM D2464 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR THREADED POLY(VINYL CHLORIDE) (PVC)

PLASTIC PIPE FITTINGS, SCHEDULE 80
6.
ASTM D2466 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR POLY(VINYL CHLORIDE) (PVC) PLASTIC PIPE
FITTINGS, SCHEDULE 40
7.
ASTM D2467 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR SOCKET-TYPE POLY(VINYL CHLORIDE) (PVC)

PLASTIC PIPE FITTINGS, SCHEDULE 80
8.
ASTM D2564 STANDARD SPECIFICATION SOLVENT CEMENT FOR POLY(VINYL CHLORIDE)

PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS
9.
ASTM D2657 STANDARD PRACTICE FOR HEAT FUSION JOINING OF POLYOLEFIN PIPE AND
FITTINGS
10. ASTM D2683 STANDARD SPECIFICATION SOCKET-TYPE POLYETHYLENE FITTINGS FOR

OUTSIDE DIAMETER-CONTROLLED POLYETHYLENE PIPE AND TUBING
11. ASTM D2774 STANDARD PRACTICE
THERMOPLASTIC PRESSURE PIPING
FOR
UNDERGROUND
INSTALLATION
OF
12. ASTM D2837 STANDARD TESTING METHOD FOR OBTAINING HYDROSTATIC DESIGN BASIS

04 February 2016
13 1401/ 1

13 1401WATER FEATURE PIPE AND FITTINGS
FOR THERMOPLASTIC PIPE MATERIALS

13. ASTM D2855 STANDARD PRACTICE FOR MAKING SOLVENT-CEMENTED JOINTS WITH
POLY(VINYL CHLORIDE) (PVC) PIPE AND FITTINGS
14. ASTM D3035 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR POLYETHYLENE (PE) PLASTIC PIPE (DR-PR)
BASED ON CONTROLLED OUTSIDE DIAMETER
15. ASTM D3261 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR BUTT FUSION POLYETHYLENE (PE) PLASTIC
FITTINGS OR POLYETHYLENE (PE) PLASTIC PIPE AND TUBING
16. ASTM D3350 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR POLYETHYLENE PLASTICS PIPE AND
FITTINGS MATERIALS
17. ASTM F412 STANDARD TERMINOLOGY RELATING TO PLASTIC PIPING SYSTEMS
18. ASTM F905 STANDARD PRACTICE FOR QUALIFICATION OF POLYETHYLENE SADDLEFUSION JOINTS
19. ASTM F1056 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR SOCKET FUSION TOOLS FOR USE IN SOCKET
FUSION JOINTING POLYETHYLENE PIPE OR TUBING AND FITTINGS
20. AWWA C207 STEEL PIPE FLANGES FOR WATERWORKS SERVICE SIZES 4 INCH THROUGH
144 INCHES
21. AWWA C508 AWWA STANDARDS FOR SWING-CHECK VALVE FOR WATERWORKS SERVICE
2 INCHES THROUGH 24 INCHES NPS
22. AWWA C509 AWWA STANDARD FOR RESILIENT SEATED GATE VALVES FOR WATER AND
SEWER WORKS
23. AWWA C901 STANDARD FOR POLYETHYLENE (PE) PRESSURE PIPE AND TUBING, INCH
THROUGH 3 INCH, FOR WATER SERVICE
24. AWWA C906 STANDARD FOR POLYETHYLENE (PE) PRESSURE PIPE AND FITTINGS, 4 INCH
THROUGH 63 INCH
25. PPI TR-4 HYDROSTATIC DESIGN BASES, PRESSURE DESIGN BASES, AND MINIMUM
REQUIRED STRENGTH RATINGS FOR THERMOPLASTIC PIPING MATERIALS OR PIPE
1.2

A.
B.
Standards and Testing agencies, dimensions and sizes for all piping material, and fittings.
1.
Indicate on submittal which materials, models, data, ratings, and options are being selected
C.
Project Record Documents: The Contractor shall record actual horizontal and vertical locations of pipes,
fittings, valves, and accessories for all site piping.
1.3
1.
As-built information shall be given to the owner
2.
Information format shall be specified by the owner.
MATERIALS HANDLING
A.
Upon receiving of shipments the Contractor shall check to insure that the correct products and quantities
have been delivered. The receiver shall have a procedure for reconciling any shipping discrepancies
B.
Shipment shall be inspected for cuts, abrasions, scrapes, gouges, tears, and punctures
C.
Unloading of shipments shall be done in accordance with manufacturers recommendations
D.
Pipes shall not be rolled or pushed off the delivery truck
E.
All fabricated parts or fittings shall not be pushed or dumped off or dropped off the delivery truck
F.
Wire rope slings and chains shall not be permitted to move pipe or fittings

04 February 2016
13 1401/ 2

G.
Small diameter pipe shall not be stored inside of larger diameter pipe
H.
Storage facility shall be clear of debris
I.
Stacking and storage of pipe and fitting shall conform to manufacturers recommendations
J.
years
Non-UV protected components shall not remain in unprotected outdoor storage for more than two (2)
K.
Pipe shipped by trucking shall have the first third of the load covered with tarpaulins to insure against
diesel smoke contamination
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPING

A.
B.
C.
D.

1.
Harvel Plastics
2.
JM Eagle
3.
Pacific Plastics Incorporated
4.
North American Pipe Corporation
5.
Approved Equal
Buried Unplastisized Polyvinyl Chloride (uPVC) Pressure Pipe:

1.
To comply with ASTM D1785, Schedule 40
2.
If buried depth of pipe exceeds manufacturers recommended loading, Schedule 80 Pipe will be used
3.
Schedule 80 pipe will be used for all sleeves
Above Grade Unplastisized Polyvinyl Chloride (uPVC) Pressure Pipe:

1.
To comply with ASTM D1785, Schedule 80
2.
Light gray in color
Screwed and Socketed PVC Pipe:

1.
2.2
To comply with ASTM D2464
POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) FITTINGS AND JOINTS

A.
B.

1.
Spears Manufacturing
2.
LASCO Fittings
3.
JM Eagle
4.
Naco Industries
5.
Approved Equal
Buried Unplastisized Polyvinyl Chloride (uPVC) Fittings:

1.
To comply with ASTM D2466 or ASTM D2467
2.
Flanged or solvent weld. No slip type or push on type gasket joints will be permitted
3.
Gasket Material for flanged couplings to be composed of Viton, EPDM, or Teflon (PTFE)
4.
Solvent Cement to comply with ASTM D2564

04 February 2016
13 1401/ 3

C.
D.
Above Grade Unplastisized Polyvinyl Chloride (uPVC) Fittings:

1.
2.
Flanged or solvent weld. No slip type or push on type gasket joints will be permitted
3.
4.
Solvent Cement to comply with ASTM D2564
5.
All PVC pipe exposed to sunlight shall be coated to resist deterioration due to ultraviolet radiation
6.
Color to match above grade piping, light gray
Screwed and Socketed PVC Fittings:

1.
E.
2.3
Flanges:
1.
Dimensions and drilling to comply with ANSI Standards
2.
Rated as 250 lbs (113.5 kg) flanges
3.
4.
Back-up rings, bolts, washers, nuts, and threaded studs shall be 316L Stainless Steel
COPPER PIPE AND FITTING

A.
B.
C.

1.
Mueller Industries
2.
NIBCO
Above Grade Copper Pipe

1.
To comply with ASTM B88
2.
Type L, Hard Drawn
3.
Solder: ASTM B32, Grade 95TA
Above Grade Copper Fittings:

1.
To comply with ASME B16.18 or ASME B16.22
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
GENERAL
A.
All pipe installation shall be in strict accordance with the instruction and recommendations provided by the
pipe manufacturer
B.
Size of any section of pipe for which size is not indicated or any intermediate section erroneously shown
undersized shall be the same size as the largest pipe connecting to it.
C.
Pipe sizes shown on the Contract Documents are nominal
D.
Design Velocities in pipe shall not exceed 5.5 feet per second (1.7 m/s)
E.
All Pipe used to transport water that will come in contact with the general population shall be NSF 50
Approved for potable water use
F.
Pipe shall have a print line every 2 feet (0.6m) stating the manufacturer, product, trade name, material,
size, and dimension ratio, manufacturing standard, production lot code, and date of manufacturing
G.
Fitting shall be individually marked with the following information: description, material, manufacturing
standard, and production lot number
04 February 2016
13 1401/ 4

3.2
PREPARATION
A.
Hot dip galvanize all items that are not factory furnished or 316L Stainless Steel
B.
Determine depth, size, and alignment of existing utilities before beginning excavation
C.
Use only tools and components required to construct and installed joints in accordance with the
manufacturers recommendations
D.
All field connection methods and procedures required that the component ends to be free of surface
defects before the connection is made
E.
3.3
Heat Fusion of HDPE Pipe Preparation

1.
During inclement weather a temporary shelter shall be set up over the joining operation to shield
operations from rain, frozen precipitation, and cold winds
2.
Entirely review the specific procedures outlined by manufacturer for performing heat fusion joints
PVC PIPE INSTALLATION

A.
Below Grade Piping (Site Piping)

1.
Obtain written approval from governing Municipality prior to connecting to main lines. Connect to main
lines where indicated on the Contract Documents and as approved by governing Municipality
2.
Verify dimensions and elevations of main lines are as indicated on the Contract Documents.
Immediately notify Owner/Engineer of any discrepancies or conflicts
3.
Make connections to main lines and visually inspect for leakage with line under pressure prior to
backfilling
4.
Install pipe to indicated elevation to within tolerance of 5/8 (15mm). Avoid installing pipe with high and
low points. Install air/vacuum valves at all high points
5.
Exercise due care to avoid deposit of excavation material and other foreign substance in interior of
pipe. Remove foreign material from pipe before proceeding with the Work. Plug pipe during work
stoppages to prevent debris from entering pipes
6.
Place a minimum of 4 inch (0.1m) deep bed of approved bedding material
7.
Where two or more pipes are placed side by side in the same trench maintain clear spacing between
pipes to all for hand operated mechanical compaction equipment or 12 inches (0.3m) whichever is
greater
8.
Joint deflection greater than two (2) degrees will not be allowed
9.
PVC pipe saddles shall be secured to the pipe with two (2) 316L Stainless Steel pipe clamps and both
saddle and straps shall be wrapped in a fiberglass liner
10. Where pipes extend under footings run pipe in Schedule 80 pipe sleeves. Sleeves shall be next larger
pipe size and extend 10 feet (3m) beyond front and back face of footing
11. Repair broken small diameter pipes with glued couplings, large diameter pipes with flexible repair
couplings
12. Install liner boots and provide water tight joints between liner and liner boot at all pipe penetrations
13. Install link seal through all wall penetrations that have dry conditions on both sides of the wall
14. Install water stop flanges at all wall penetration that have wet conditions on either side of the wall
15. Welded (glued) buried pipe does not require thrust blocks, except at locations shown on the Contract
Documents and immediately after flexible couplings.
B.
Above Grade Piping

1.
Locate equipment in location shown on the Contract Documents. Position or rotate equipment to result
in good appearance and easy access to all components for maintenance and repairs prior to installing
piping

04 February 2016
13 1401/ 5

2.
Install, level, and secure equipment. Provide shims, anchors, support straps, angles, grouted bases or
other items as required to accomplish proper installation
3.
Install flanges on pipe larger than 3 inches (80mm) where ever connections are made to pumps,
valves, strainers, and other equipment to facilitate removal for servicing. For pipes smaller than 3
inches (80mm) use union connections
4.
Install piping, flues, breaching ducts, and supports so they do not interfere with equipment access
5.
Change pipe size within three pipe diameters of final connection to pumps, filters, and other equipment
where it is necessary to reduce pipe size
6.
Cut pipe accurately to job measurements within plus or minus inch (6mm) and install without
springing or forcing, true to line and grade, generally square with building and structures
7.
Adequately support pipe, fittings, and accessories to prevent undue stress and to comply with
SECTION 13 1403.
8.
Arrange pipe and hangers to allow for expansion, contraction, and structural settlement
9.
Make changes of direction with manufactured fittings
10. Street elbows, bushings, reducing flanges, close nipples, or bending pipe will not be allowed
11. Pipe shall not contact structure except at penetrations shown on the Contract Documents
12. Run pipe full size through shutoff valves, balance valves, and control valves unless otherwise noted on
the Contract Documents
13. Seal pipes penetrating and existing wall through core drilled holes with Link Seal type expansion
seals
14. Seal pipes penetrating new walls under construction through a PVC sleeve with water stop flange and
a Link Seal placed between pipe and approved sleeve
15. Provide dielectric connections between copper and dissimilar metals Install connections in vertical
sections of piping only
16. The Contractor shall coordinate pipe routing with electrical duct banks and heating/ventilation duct
work
17. All pipes that are installed above grade and outdoors shall have a heavy coat of light color latex base
paint that is chemically compatible with PVC pipe and fittings. Compatibility should be confirmed by
paint manufacturer
C.
D.
Joints and Solvent Welds

1.
Install above grade, below grade, buried, and imbedded PVC piping using solvent weld fittings in
accordance with ASTM D2564, ASTM 2774, and ASTM D2855
2.
Remove any burrs and chamber pipe ends after cutting then prepare each fitting and pipe end with
solvent primer
3.
Join each fitting individually and allow enough time for the joint to seal solidly before assembly of
adjacent joints
4.
After joining, and even ring of primer shall be visible around entire fitting
5.
If fittings are installed without visible primer, fitting shall be removed and discarded and piping re-cut,
re-chambered, and joint made up again using a new fitting
Above Grade Piping

1.
Locate equipment in location shown on the Contract Documents. Position or rotate equipment to result
in good appearance and easy access to all components for maintenance and repairs prior to installing
piping
2.
Install, level, and secure equipment. Provide shims, anchors, support straps, angles, grouted bases or
other items as required to accomplish proper installation

04 February 2016
13 1401/ 6

3.
Install flanges on pipe larger than 3 inches (80mm) where ever connections are made to pumps,
valves, strainers, and other equipment to facilitate removal for servicing. For pipes smaller than 3
inches (80mm) use union connections
4.
Install piping, flues, breaching ducts, and supports so they do not interfere with equipment access
5.
Change pipe size within three pipe diameters of final connection to pumps, filters, and other equipment
where it is necessary to reduce pipe size
6.
Cut pipe accurately to job measurements within plus or minus inch (6mm) and install without
springing or forcing, true to line and grade, generally square with building and structures
7.
Adequately support pipe, fittings, and accessories to prevent undue stress and to comply with
SECTION 13 1403.
8.
Arrange pipe and hangers to allow for expansion, contraction, and structural settlement
9.
Make changes of direction with manufactured fittings
10. Pipe shall not contact structure except at penetrations shown on the Contract Documents
11. Run pipe full size through shutoff valves, balance valves, and control valves unless otherwise noted on
12. Seal pipes penetrating and existing wall through core drilled holes with Link Seal type expansion
seals
13. Seal pipes penetrating new walls under construction through a PVC sleeve with water stop flange and
a Link Seal placed between pipe and approved sleeve
14. Provide dielectric connections between copper and dissimilar metals Install connections in vertical
sections of piping only
15. The Contractor shall coordinate pipe routing with electrical duct banks and heating/ventilation duct
work
E.
Joining and Connections

1.
Connection design limitations and manufacturers joining procedures shall be observed throughout
construction
2.
All field connection methods and procedures require that the component ends shall be clean, dry, and
free of detrimental surface defects before the connection is made
3.
Cleaning: General dust and light soil shall be removed with clean, dry, lint free cloths. Heavier soil may
be washed off with mild soap and water followed by a through rinsing with clean water and drying with
a dry, clean, lint free cloth. Chemical cleaning solvents shall not be used
4.
Cutting:
5.
a.
Small diameter pipe (4 inches (100mm) and smaller) shall be cut with guillotine shears, run-around
cutters, or small manual saws
b.
Large diameter pipe shall be cut with handsaws and chainsaws. Chainsaws shall be operated
without chain lubrication
c.
Chips from saws shall be removed from pipe bore
d.
De-burr pipe ends
e.
Branch outlet holes shall be cut with hole saws specified by the pipe manufacturer to insure
adequate chip clearance, saw depth, and an inside relief to retain the coupln
f.
Hole saws shall be withdrawn frequently to clear chips
g.
Power hole saws shall be operated at low speeds to avoid overheating and melting pipe material
Heat Fusion Joining:

a.
Open flame shall not be used for heating pipe ends

04 February 2016
13 1401/ 7

b.
6.
Faulty Fusions:
1).
Socket or butt fusions shall be removed and redone
2).
Heat Fusion joints cannot be repaired and shall be removed
3).
Socket and saddle fusion fittings cannot be reused
c.
Socket fused pipe or tubing shall be manufactured to Outside Diameter controlled pipe or tubing
specifications
d.
Saddle fusion processes shall be applied to pipe sizes and pressure ratings as dictated by the
pipe manufacturer, and only with approved equipment to perform sizes required
e.
Molded butt fusion fittings and fabricated fittings are acceptable for use
f.
When installing Polyethylene (PE) pipe in a butt fusion machine, do not bend the pipe against and
open fusion machine collets or clamp
g.
Bead removal of butt fusion is not required. If bead removal is necessary the pump must be cooled
to ambient temperature and the bead shall only be removed down to the pipes surface
h.
Electro-fusion shall be used to repair damaged sections of pipe or tie-in joints in the trench
Flanged Connections
a.
All flange connections shall have back-up flanges
b.
Back-up flanges shall be 316L Stainless Steel
c.
One edge of back-up ring bore shall be chamfered. This edge fits against the back of the sealing
flange
d.
Back-up rings shall be fitted to flange adapter before fusion to pipe
e.
f.
Gasket material shall be between 1/8 3/16 inch (3.2 4.8mm) thick
g.
Stub end flanges are not permitted
h.
Full face gaskets shall be used on larger pipes (greater than 12 inch (0.3m)). Drop-in gasket shall
be used on smaller pipe sizes
i.
Back-up ring dimensions and drilling shall comply with ANSI standards
j.
Bolting materials shall be of 316L Stainless Steel. Flange bolts are 1/8 inch (3mm) smaller than
the bolt hole diameters on the back-up ring. Flat washers of 316L stainless steel shall be used
between the nut and the back-up ring.
k.
Full face HDPE flanges without back-up rings are not acceptable
l.
Mating flanges shall be aligned together before tightening
m. Flange connections shall be properly supported to avoid bending stresses

1).
Below grade flanges shall require a support foundation of compacted, stable, granular fill, or
compacted cement stabilized granular backfill, or reinforced concrete
2).
Flanged connections adjacent to pipes passing through structural walls must be structurally
supported to avoid shear loads as indicated on the Contract Documents
3).
Above grade flanges shall be supported on rigid structures that are designed to withstand
flexing due to thermal changes and insure that the flange does not become anchored in soil
n.
Prior to fit-up, lubricate flange bolt threads, washers, and nuts, with non-fluid lubricant
o.
Gasket and flange sealing surfaces must be clean and free of significant cuts or gouges
p.
Fit flange components together loosely. Tighten bolts by hand and re-check alignment. Adjust
alignment as necessary.

04 February 2016
13 1401/ 8

7.
8.
9.
F.
q.
Tighten bolts in sequence determined my manufacturer to 5 ft-lbs (6.8 N-m) torque to establish a
sealing surface
r.
Once the sealing surface has been established, continue tightening bolts in the recommended
sequence in 15 ft-lbs (20 N-m) torque or less. Tighten completely through the sequence before
changing to higher torque
s.
Do not exceed maximum recommended bolt tightening torque values as established by the
manufacturer
t.
Once recommended torque values are reached wait at least one (1) hour and retighten bolts for
final value the first time. Retighten bolts in same sequence as outlined before
u.
Do not exceed 15 ft-lbs (20 N-m) torque in any sequence
v.
When connecting HDPE Pipe to cast iron tighten torque increments should not exceed 10 ft-lbs
(13 N-m)
w.
When connecting flanges to butterfly valves, the Installer shall use tubular spacers to insure that
the valve disc clears the inside diameter of the HDPE pipe. Bolt lengths shall be increase to meet
spacer requirements
Mechanical Joints
a.
Only fully restrained joints shall be approved for use on pressure lines
b.
Fully restrained joints shall include insert stiffeners and exterior mechanical coupling. Materials of
mechanical joints shall be approved by the Design Engineer before installation
c.
Partially restrained joints and unrestrained joints are only appropriate on non-pressure pipe
systems and must be approved for use by the Design Engineer before installation
Other Joining Techniques

a.
Pipe Treads: Pipe threads shall not be used to join HDPE pipe
b.
Extrusion Welding shall not be used on pressure pipe systems
c.
Hot Gas Welding shall not be used to join HDPE pipe
Branch Connections
a.
Tees in main line sizes large than 16 inches (0.4m) shall be flanged on two of the three
connections
b.
Mechanical saddles or branch fittings that clamp around the main and seal with gaskets shall not
be installed without the specific consent of the Design Engineer
c.
Service Saddles shall be secured with wide band straps, and double band straps designs. U-bolt
type service saddles shall not be accepted
Flexible Supports and Expansion Loops

1.
Above Grade Supports

a.
Edges of cradle shall be rounded or rolled to prevent cutting into pipe
b.
Use of U-bolt, narrow strap-type hanger, and roller type supports are unacceptable
c.
Long term deflection of pipe between hangers shall not exceed 1 inch (25mm)
d.
Use of pipe racks for support shall be of sufficient width to accommodate expansion and
contraction of pipe
e.
Centered anchored pipe shall be allowed to pivot at the anchor point
f.
Expansion joints are not recommended
g.
An initial deflection shall be provided so HDPE pipe does not contract to a straight line
h.
Fittings shall be protected from flexing due to expansion or contraction of piping system

04 February 2016
13 1401/ 9

i.
2.
Below Grade Pipe Supports

a.
3.
Expected temperature changes in buried pipe shall be addressed with thrust blocks as suggested
by the manufacturer
Anchoring Structures
a.
3.4
Fittings and flanges shall be supported on sleepers to insure that fittings will not become anchored
in soil
Ballast Design for HDPE pipe shall conform to manufacturers recommendations and include the
following:
1).
Submergence weights shall be made of reinforced concrete and formed in two or more
sections that clamp around the pipe leaving a clearance between the sections
2).
An elastomeric padding material shall be used between the submergence weights and the
pipe
3).
Submergence weights shall be sized such that bottom sections are generally 50% heavier
thank the top sections.
4).
All fasteners that connect the submergence weights shall be rated for marine use
INSPECTION AND TESTING

A.
Please refer to SECTION 13 1402 WATER FEATURE PIPE TESTING AND CLEANING
END OF SECTION

04 February 2016
13 1401/ 10

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.

1.
B.
1.2
Testing and Cleaning of the piping system
Related Sections:
1.
2.

A.
B.
Prior to installing pipe, provide a plan to remove foreign materials from pipes that may have gained access
into newly installed or repaired main lines
C.
Certification: Provide certification that the piping system to be tested has been thoroughly cleaned and
meets or exceeds specified requirements prior to testing pipeline
D.
Test Reports: Provide results of every test passing or failing. The Contractor and Owners Representative
shall sign each Test Report. Reports shall include a description of the pipeline being tested, date, start time,
pressure at the start of the test, pressure as the second part of the test, ending time, and pressure at the end of the
test. If any additional water was added to the pipeline during the test, the quantity and times must be noted. Any
other comments specific to the test shall also be noted
PART 2 - PRODUCTS NOT USED

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
GENERAL
A.
All newly laid and installed piping shall be subjected to a Hydrostatic Pressure Test
B.
Prior to test verify all piping, valves, and fittings have been laid and properly installed. Verify bolts on all
flanges are tight and secure
C.
Test each pipeline within five (5) days after completion of the pipeline section. Each section of pipeline
must successfully pass the Pressure Test and have been thoroughly flushed prior to submittal of payment
D.
The Hydrostatic Pressure Test shall not be done in conjunction with a line disinfection process
E.
A Leakage Test shall be conducted in connection with the Pressure Test, if and only if directed by the
Engineer
F.
The Contractor shall furnish all the necessary equipment and manpower for completing the Hydrostatic
Pressure Test and Leakage Test
G.
The Contractor shall provide sufficient flanges, plugs, or caps so that a pipe that has successfully passed
the Tests can and shall remain under pressure for the duration of the construction period or until start-up
H.
Keep all personnel a safe distance away from test points during testing
I.
The test section shall be supervised at all times during the test
J.
All piping shall be restrained against possible movement from catastrophic failure at joints and
connections. Never conduct Test on unrestrained piping

04 February 2016
13 1402/ 1

13 1402WATER FEATURE PIPE TESTING AND CLEANING
K.
All joints of test sections shall be properly cured and/or cooled before testing can begin
L.
Mechanical connections must be completely installed and tightened per manufacturers instructions
M.
If backfill provided restraint, backfill shall be properly placed and compacted. Joints and connections must
be exposed for inspection
N.
End closures must be suitable for pressure service and pressure-rated for the test pressure
O.
Fill out appropriate worksheet indicating information of section tested. Samples of worksheets are found
immediately following this specification
3.2
HYDROSTATIC PRESSURE TESTS FOR PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS
A.
Test the pipeline at 1.5 times the maximum static pressure anticipated in the pipeline, or at 70 psi (482
kPa), whichever is greater
B.
Prior to testing, the pipeline shall be flushed or vacuumed to remove all construction debris and foreign
material from the pipeline
C.
Perform the Hydrostatic Pressure Test using the following procedure:

1.
Install flanges on both ends of the pipeline and at any tees or branches in the line as required
2.
Install a test pressure gauge at the lowest end of the pipeline. The full scale reading of the test gauge
shall not be more than 15% of the specified test pressure. For a test pressure of 70 psi (482 kPa) the
maximum gauge reading would be 80 psi (551 kPa)
3.
Slowly fill the pipeline with clean water
4.
Expel any air from the pipeline, make necessary taps at points for highest elevation before test made
and insert plugs after the test has been completed
5.
Bring pipe to specified test pressure plus 10 psi (69 kPa), by means of a pump connected to the pipe in
a manner satisfactory to the Engineer. The pressure on the gauge must be corrected to account for the
elevation for which the gauge is installed
6.
Maintain the specified test pressure plus 10 psi (69 kPa) for one (1) hour by adding additional water as
required.
7.
At the end of the hour, reduce the pressure in the line by 10 psi (69 kPa) to the specified test pressure
8.
Immediately after the pressure has been reduced to the specified test pressure begin Part 2 of the test.
Part 2 of the test shall last for two (2) hours
9.
A successful test shall consist of maintaining the specified test pressure for the entire two (2) hour
duration without a drop in pressure on the test pressure gauge
10. During the test period, neither additional water nor air is to be added to the pipeline, unless a Leakage
Test had been requested by the Engineer, and only if requested
D.
3.3
3.3
After the Hydrostatic Pressure Test has been completed the line shall be flushed as described in t Section
LEAKAGE TEST FOR PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS ONLY
A.
The Leakage Test shall serve as a secondary acceptance test and is to be used solely at the discretion of
the Engineer and if the Hydrostatic Pressure Test failed
B.
The Test shall be performed in the same manner as the Hydrostatic Pressure Test described in Section
3.2. However, once the two (2) hour time period described in Section 3.2.C.8 is started, water shall be added to the
system as required to maintain the specified test pressure for the entire two (2) hour duration
C.
The amount of leakage is defined as the quantity of water added to the pipeline to maintain the specified
test pressure for the entire two (2) hours
D.
No pipe installation will be accepted until the leakage test is less than 10 gallons per mile (38 liters per
1,609m), per 2 inch (50mm) diameter, per day

04 February 2016
13 1402/ 2

3.4
FLUSHING PIPELINES FOR PVC

A.
All pipelines shall be thoroughly flushed or vacuumed before and immediately after the Pressure Test.
B.
If the line is damaged after the initial Pressure Test, the lines shall be thoroughly flushed or vacuumed
and the Pressure Test repeated
C.
Flushing will only remove the lighter solids and cannot be relied upon to remove heavy material or debris
that was allowed to enter the main during installation
D.
Extreme care and thorough inspection shall be practiced during installation of pipelines to prevent small
stones, pieces of concrete, particles of metal, sand, dirt, or other foreign material from gaining access into the
pipelines
E.
Once the line has been thoroughly flushed, flanges, plugs, and/or caps shall be installed on the pipeline.
The pipe shall be filled with water and shall remain full for the duration of construction or until start-up
3.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Should any test of pipe fail to maintain pressure or exceed the allowable leakage for the entire two (2) hour
duration, the Contractor, at his own expense, shall located and repair or replace defective pipe, fittings, or
connections and then re-test the pipe again until test results are within the specified allowances
B.
The Engineer or Owner may direct the Contractor to repair specific leaks regardless of the test results, if
leaks are found in the pipeline
END OF SECTION

04 February 2016
13 1402/ 3

(Pertains to Section 13 1402.3.2)
Date:_____________________
PVC PIPE PRESSURE TEST For: _________________________________________

SITE CONDITIONS:
Ambient Air Temperature: __________________ F or C (circle one)
Description of section being tested: _______________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Nominal Pipe Diameter: ___________________
inches or mm (circle one)
Pipe Length: ____________________________
Feet or Meters (circle one)
Testing Media: __________________________
(Water or Other, please specify)
Maximum Pressure Reading: _______________
psi or kPa (circle one)
TESTING DATA:
Section Testing Pressure: __________________
Initial time of brining section to test pressure + 10 psi (69 kPa): __________________________ a.m. or p.m.
Time when pressure test began: ___________________________________________________ a.m. or p.m.
Time when pressure test ended: ___________________________________________________ a.m. or p.m.
Pressure at end of test: ____________________
Test Passed? ______ Yes or ______ No
____________________________________________________
(Contractors Signature)
____________________________________________________

04 February 2016
13 1402/ 4

(Owners Representatives Signature)

04 February 2016
13 1402/ 5

(Pertains to Section 13 1402.3.4)
Date:_____________________
HDPE PIPE PRESSURE TEST For: ________________________________________

SITE CONDITIONS:
Ambient Air Temperature: __________________ F or C (circle one)
Testing Section Temperature: _______________
F or C (circle one)
Temperature Multiplier: _________
Description of section being tested: _______________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Nominal Pipe Diameter: ___________________
inches or mm (circle one)
Pipe Length: ____________________________
Feet or Meters (circle one)
Testing Media: __________________________
(Water or Other, please specify)
TESTING DATA:
Section Testing Pressure (Testing Pressure * Temperature Multiplier): ____________________ psi or kPa
Time Test Section filling begain: ____________
a.m. or p.m.
Time when Section Test Pressure is achieved: _______________________________________
a.m. or p.m.
Time when pressure test began: ___________________________________________________ a.m. or p.m.

Time when pressure test ended: ___________________________________________________ a.m. or p.m.
Amount of water added during Pressure Test: _______________________________ gallons or liters (circle one)
Test Passed? ______ Yes or ______ No
____________________________________________________
(Contractors Signature)
____________________________________________________
04 February 2016
13 1402/ 6

(Owners Representatives Signature)

04 February 2016
13 1402/ 7

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.
C.
1.2

1.
Pipe and Equipment Hangers and Supports
2.
Equipment Pads and Supports
3.
Sleeves, Seals, and Waterstop Flanges
4.
Thrust Blocks
5.
Flexible Couplings
Related Sections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
References:
1.
ASME B31.2 FUEL GAS PIPING
2.
ASME B31.9 BUILDING SERVICES PIPING
3.
ASTM A536 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR DUCTILE IRON CASTING
4.
ASTM F708 STANDARD PRACTICE FOR DESIGN AND INSTALLATION OF RIGID PIPE
HANGERS
5.
MMS SP58 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS MATERIALS, DESIGN AND MANUFACTURER
6.
MMS SP69 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS SELECTION AND APPLICATION

A.
B.
Product Data: Provide manufacturers catalog data including type of material and load capacity.
C.
Shop Drawings: the Contractor shall provide drawings indicating hanger schedule and layout showing
location, type, and material of hanger, sign and sealed by a Structural Engineer
D.
Design Data: Indicate load carrying capacity of trapeze, multiple pipe and riser support hangers
E.
Manufacturers Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and assembly of components
F.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A.

04 February 2016
13 1403/ 1

13 1403WATER FEATURE PIPE HANGERS, SUPPORTS,
AND ANCHORS
B.
C.
D.
1.
Grinnell
2.
B-Line
Pipe Hangers:
1.
Conform to ASME B31.9 and ASTM F708
2.
All Hangers shall be fiberglass or stainless steel. Galvanized is acceptable only for installations in nonmarine or non-coastal environments subject to approval by the Engineer
3.
Hangers for pipe sizes inch to 1-1/2 inch (15mm to 40mm): adjustable swivel, split ring style
4.
Hangers for pipe sizes 2 inch (50mm) and larger: adjustable, clevis style
5.
Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: fiberglass channels with spacers and hanger rods. Galvanized material is
acceptable for non-marine or non-coastal environments subject to approval by the Engineer
6.
Hangers shall be sized to support the pipe when full of water
Hanger Rods:
1.
Use rod threaded at both ends or continuously threaded. Stainless steel rod for marine environments.
For non-marine or non-coastal environments galvanized steel is acceptable, subject to approval by the
Engineer
2.
Sized adequately to support pipes full of water
Fasteners:
1.
2.2
Shall be fiberglass or stainless steel. Galvanized is acceptable only for non-marine or non-coastal
environments, subject to approval by the Engineer
WALL SLEEVES AND SEALS

A.
1.
Linkseal
2.
Thunderline Corporation
3.
Innerlynx
B.
Sleeves: Molded, non-metallic high density polyethylene
C.
Fasteners: 316L Stainless Steel
D.
Pressure Plates: Molded glass reinforced nylon
E.
Elastomers: EPDM
2.3
WATERSTOP FLANGES
A.
B.
C.
1.
ASA Manufacturing Incorporated
2.
Lawson Aquatics
3.
Approved Custom Fabrication
PVC Waterstop Sleeve Fittings

1.
Shall be constructed of PVC and be capable of being primed and glued in place
2.
Waterstop shall be place between the water-retaining side of the wall and the reinforcing steel
3.
Waterstop shall be tied in place to the reinforcing steel
Fiberglass Waterstop Sleeve Fittings

1.
Shall be constructed of fiberglass and be capable of accepting Schedule 40 and Schedule 80 PVC

04 February 2016
13 1403/ 2

AND ANCHORS
pipe with socket to socket connections

2.4
FLEXIBLE COUPLINGS
A.
1.
Cascade Waterworks
2.
Baker Flex Couplings
3.
Dresser Couplings
B.
Ductile Iron end and center rings complying with ASTM A536
C.
EPDM or Viton gaskets
D.
Fasteners shall be 316L Stainless Steel, including nuts, bolts, and washers
E.
Coupling shall be designed for below ground installation
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
General:
1.
Acceptable pipe supports are shown in the General Details section of the Contract Documents
2.
Support Valves and Equipment adequately at both flanges, if in a horizontal position, and by the top
flange if in a vertical position
Pipe Hangers and Supports

1.
Support horizontal and vertical piping as scheduled
2.
Install hangers to provide a minimum inch (13mm) space between finished covering and adjacent
work
3.
Place hangers within 12 inches (0.3m) of each horizontal elbow.
4.
Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch (38mm) minimum vertical adjustment
5.
Support horizontal pipe with a 5 feet (1.5m) maximum spacing between hangers, or as determined by
Structural Engineer
6.
Provide lateral restraints at bends in pipe as required and as directed by the Structural Engineer
7.
Support vertical piping at every floor the pipe passes through. Provide intermediate supports where
spacing exceeds 10 feet (3m) between supports
8.
Support for vertical piping shall include both vertical and lateral support
9.
Install couplings or similar tight fitting metal sleeve at each floor support for vertical piping. Couplings or
sleeves shall rest on and transmit load to support
10. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at the same elevation, provide multiple or trapeze
hangers
11. Provide copper plated hangers and supports for copper piping
12. Design hangers for pipe movement without disengagement of supported pipe
13. Size Hanger Rods, screws, bolts, nuts, etc according to manufacturers sizing charts for mass and pipe
size being supported
14. Do not use wire or other makeshift devices for hangers
15. Pipe located near the floor may be supported with galvanized steel stanchions welded to end plates
and secured to pipe and floor
04 February 2016
13 1403/ 3

AND ANCHORS
16. To prevent sway and lateral movement due to thrust, provide angle iron bracing anchored into walls or
overhead framing at bends. In seismic zones, use appropriate sway suppression devices
C.
D.
E.
F.
Equipment Pads and Supports

1.
Provide Equipment, or Housekeeping, Pads of concrete, minimum of 4 inches (0.1m) thick and
extending a minimum of 3 inches (75mm) beyond supported equipment, unless otherwise noted on the
Contract Documents
2.
Provide templates, anchor bolts, and accessories for mounting and anchoring equipment
3.
Provide shims, anchors, support straps, angles, grouted bases, or other items required to accomplish
proper installation
4.
Construction of galvanized steel stanchions welded to end plates secured to the floor and pipe or
equipment
Sleeves, Seals, and Water Stop Flanges

1.
Set Sleeves in position in form work. Provide adequate reinforcing around sleeves
2.
Size Sleeves large enough to allow for movement due to expansion and contraction
3.
Extend Sleeves through floors 1 inch (25mm) above finished floor level. Chalk Sleeves
4.
Install Link Seal type waterproof seal at all penetrations to floors, ceilings, or walls that do not
penetrate into water retaining structures
5.
Install water stop flanges with a bead of Swell Seal around pipe at the base of the flange for all
penetrations into water retaining structures
6.
Waterstop shall be place between the water-retaining side of the wall and the reinforcing steel
7.
Provide a minimum 2 inch (50mm) cover of concrete for all Waterstop Flange couplings.
8.
Waterstop shall be tied in place to the reinforcing steel
Thrust Blocks
1.
Install concrete anchor blocks, thrust blocks, and support blocks with tie downs to support pipe, fittings,
or valves as indicated on the drawings
2.
For buried piping install concrete thrust blocks at the first bend after mechanical fasteners, or after a
pipe penetrates a wall.
Flexible Couplings
1.
Install Flexible Couplings in areas of anticipated differential settlement including, but not limited to:
a.
Building wall penetrations
b.
Retaining and site wall penetrations
2.
Install two (2) couplings per pipeline with a minimum of 2 feet (0.6m) spacing between couplings
3.
Support couplings to prevent pipe pullout
4.
Provide concrete thrust block at first bend after flexible couplings
5.
When couplings are used to repair broken pipes, install concrete thrust blocks upstream and
downstream from the coupling
END OF SECTION

04 February 2016
13 1403/ 4

AND ANCHORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.

1.
Prefabricated Skimmers
2.
Prefabricated Bottom Drains
3.
Prefabricated Gutter
4.
Gutter Drains
5.
Perimeter Grating
6.
Large Drain Sump Grating
7.
FRP Balance Tanks
8.
Floor and Wall Inlet Jets
9.
Hydrotherapy Jets
10. Hydrostatic Relief Valves

B.
C.
1.2
Related Sections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
References:
1.
National Sanitation Foundation (NSF) Standard 50 Specification
2.
NFPA 70 National Electrical Code (NEC) Article 680-21
3.
Underwriters Laboratories (UL)
4.
Virginia Graeme Baker Pool and Spa Safety Act (VGB)

A.
SECTION 01 3300 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURE.
B.
Standards and Testing Agencies, dimensions and sizes of products.
1.
Indicated on submittal which materials, models, data, ratings, and options are being selected
C.
Shop Drawings: Indicated layout, general assembly, components, dimensions, clearances, and method of
assembly

04 February 2016
13 1404/ 1

13 1404WATER FEATURE WHITE GOODS
D.
Maintenance Data: Include manufacturers literature, maintenance recommendation, and replacement
parts list
1.3

A.
Accept components on site in factory packing and inspect for damage
B.
Protect components received at site from physical damage, including effects of weather, water, and
construction
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PREFABRICATED SKIMMERS
A.
B.

1.
Pentair Pool Products
2.
Hayward Industries
3.
Waterway Plastics
4.
Recreonics
5.
Lincoln
Prefabricated Skimmers shall be NSF 50 approved
C.
Skimmer body shall be constructed of molded non-corrosive material such as ABS, PVC, or HDPE and
designed to be cast into concrete with a minimum of 4 inches (0.1m) concrete covering the basket housing
D.
A floating removable weir that automatically adjusts to variations in the water level shall be provided and
installed in the skimmer
E.
An equalizer valve assembly shall be installed in the wall of the pool or into the bottom drain and piped to
the skimmer as noted on the Contract Documents
1.
All equalizer pipes shall have a VGB Compliant cover when installed in the wall of the pool
F.
A removable debris basket shall be provided. Basket shall be constructed of a non-corrosive material such
as nylon or stainless steel and shall be access by removal of a cover plate
G.
Provide an adjustable deck collar with cover plate. Cover plate shall be heavy duty, non-corrosive, and of a
non-slip design. The cover plate shall be secured to the collar and skimmer body with stainless steel locking screws
or clips. The Contractor shall provide extension collars as required.
2.2
PREFABRICATED BOTTOM DRAINS

A.

1.
2.
Hayward Industries
3.
ASA Manufacturing, Incorporated
4.
Lawson Aquatics
5.
Recreonics
6.
Lincoln
B.
Prefabricated Drains shall be certified as compliant to VGB requirements and applicable NSF 50
Standards

04 February 2016
13 1404/ 2

C.
Prefabricated Drains shall be constructed of non-corrosive and non-conductive materials, such as
fiberglass, PVC, or HDPE and suitable for continuous exposure to chlorinated water environments. Materials shall
be UV stabilized. The interior finish shall be smooth and finish color to match the color of the bottom of the pool.
D.
Each prefabricated drain shall have pipe side outlets (FIP) as specified on the Contract Documents. In
addition, 2 inch (50mm) bottom outlets (FIP) shall be provided for the placement of hydrostatic relief valves. The
Contractor shall verify all pipe connection sizes as shown on the Contract Documents.
E.
Bottom Drain Grates shall be certified as compliant to VGB requirements. Each grate shall be constructed
of non-corrosive and non-conductive materials, such as FRP or PVC and shall have a minimum open area of 50%.
Grate color shall match the finish of the bottom of the pool or as specified by the architect/landscape architect.
F.
Grates shall be fastened to the frame with 316L stainless steel fasteners. Removal of grate fastener shall
require the use of a tool.
2.3
PREFABRICATED GUTTER
A.

1.
ASA Manufacturing
2.
Lawson Aquatics
B.
Prefabricated Gutters shall be constructed of multiple layers of premium fiberglass and resin. Interior of
gutters shall have a smooth gel coat finish. A water stop flange shall be integral to the gutter construction
C.
Individual fiberglass sections to be available in either straight or curved sections in lengths up to 10 feet
(3m) and are to be flanged, pre-drilled, and include the necessary stainless steel hardware for bolting the sections
together
D.
Gutter outlets shall be sized as shown on the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall verify all pipe
connection sizes
E.
Gutter shall be installed as per manufacturers recommendations for leveling and assembly. All gutters
shall be level within 0.125 inches (3mm) along the entire perimeter
F.
2.4
The Contractor shall provide Perimeter Grating that is compatible with the gutter system
GUTTER DRAINS
A.
B.
1.
2.
Hayward Industries
3.
Recreonics
4.
Lincoln
Gutter Drain fittings shall be NSF 50 approved
C.
PVC.
Gutter Drain fittings shall be constructed of a non-corrosive and non-conductive material, such as ABS or
D.
The Contractor shall provide gutter drain fittings as shown on the Contract Documents and shall verify the
pipe connection sizes.
2.5
PERIMETER GRATING
A.

1.
Lawson Aquatics
2.
RenoSys
3.
Natare
4.
Recreonics

04 February 2016
13 1404/ 3

5.
Lincoln
B.
Perimeter grating shall be constructed of UV stabilized PVC, FRP, or other non-corrosive and nonconductive material. Stone or precast concrete grating shall be non-porous.
C.
dry
The top surface must have a raised, non-slip pattern to meet the static coefficient of friction when wet or
D.
The space between the pieces must not exceed 0.375 inches (10mm) and provide a minimum open area
of 37.5% per foot to allow unrestricted water flow.
E.
The grate color shall be as specified by the architect/landscape architect.
F.
The Contractor shall verify the thickness of the grate is compatible with the construction of the gutter
2.6
LARGE DRAIN SUMP GRATING

A.

1.
Seasafe Grating
2.
Grating Systems Incorporated
B.
Large Drain Sump Grating shall be custom fabricated from molded ore pultruded FRP or PVC, of sufficient
strength to support a live load of 40 lbs/sq. foot (366 kg/sq. m), maximum deflection of L/360, maximum clearance
space of 0.375 inches (10mm), and a minimum clear open area of 50%. The grate color shall be as determined by
the architect/landscape architect
C.
Custom fabricated grating shall meet the requirements of the VGB and shall be provided with the
appropriate identification of compliance
D.
The Contractor shall provide all recommended support structure as determined by the manufacturer
E.
The grating shall be fastened to the frame with 316L stainless steel screws or clips. All fasteners shall
require the use of a tool to remove
2.7
FLOOR AND WALL INLET JETS

A.

1.
2.
Hayward Industries
3.
Waterway Plastics
4.
Lawson Aquatics
5.
Recreonics
6.
Lincoln
B.
Floor Inlets or Returns shall be fully adjustable molded white PVC or Cycolac body with diffuser plate to
provide uniform distribution.
C.
Wall Inlets or Returns shall be non-directional flow PVC or Cycolac wall fittings with internal threads that
allow interchangeable eyeball fittings.
D.
2.8
The Contractor shall verify all pipe connection sizes as shown on the Contract Documents
HYDROTHERAPY JETS
A.

1.
Waterway Plastics
2.
Recreonics
3.
HydroAir

04 February 2016
13 1404/ 4

B.
Body: Molded white PVC hydrotherapy body with internal threads that allow interchangeable fittings. Body
style shall provide a venture for air mixing
C.
Jet Type and Nozzle Sizes shall vary as indicated on the Construction Documents. If information is not
provided on the Construction Documents, the Contractor shall provide the following:
1.
Internal Jet: 0.375 inch (10mm) diameter orifice
2.
Provide 1/3 of hydrotherapy jets with power massage style jet; 1/3 with pulsator style jet; and 1/3 with
roto-style jet
3.
All but one of the hydrotherapy jets shall be fully adjustable from full open to full close. One of the jets
shall be non-adjustable.
D.
Hydrotherapy jets shall be located at various elevations within plus or minus 2 inches (50mm) of the
location shown in the Contract Documents to allow variety of jet position for the bather
E.
2.9
The Contractor shall verify the size and number of hydrotherapy jets with the Contract Documents
HYDROSTATIC RELIEF VALVES
A.

1.
2.
Waterman
3.
Recreonics
4.
Lincoln
B.
For Prefabricated Drain boxes provide 1.5 to 2 inch (40-50mm) threaded Cycolac hydrostatic relief valve
with a Cycolac collector tube, as shown in the Contract Documents.
C.
Cast in Place Drain boxes provide a 2 inch (50mm) commercial grade, heavy duty cast bronze body and
valve plate, valve seal gasket and brass cover plate with compatible collector tube, as shown in the Contract
Documents.
D.
The Contractor shall provide hydrostatic relief valves as indicated on the Contract Documents and
whenever ground water is present. Hydrostatic relief valves shall be located in the bottom drain boxes.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
GENERAL
A.
Install products, equipment, and accessories in accordance with manufacturers recommendations, local
building codes, and Public Health Department requirements.
B.
3.2
Locate skimmers, inlets, jets, drains, and etc. in locations shown on the Contract Documents
PREFABRICATED SKIMMERS
A.
Skimmers shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations and in accordance
with the Contract Documents
B.
Locate Skimmers in the pool shell as shown in the Contract Documents. Provide a minimum of 4 inches
(0.1m) concrete coverage around the body of the skimmer
C.
Skimmers shall be set to the correct elevation, leveled and held in place during application of shotcrete, or
concrete for the pool shell. Skimmers that are not level will be removed, replaced and reinstalled at the Contractors
expense
D.
Skimmers shall be flush with the finish of the pool surface and Skimmer access lids shall be flush with the
pool deck
E.
The Contractor shall install water stop flanges on the pipes connecting to the Skimmer

04 February 2016
13 1404/ 5

F.
3.3
The Contractor shall provide a VGB compliant cover for all equalizer lines that are installed in the pool wall
PREFABRICATED BOTTOM DRAINS
A.
Install drains as shown on the Contract Documents. Provide at a minimum one (1) bottom drain in the
deepest areas of the pool
B.
Drain shall be level with the top of the drain and grate edges flush with the finish of the pool surface, or in
accordance with the specific grate manufacturers recommendations. Slope pool surface to drains with a minimum
1:40 slope. Pool floor shall be constructed such that the low points only occur in the location of the bottom drains
C.
The Contractor shall provide proper reinforcing steel and concrete cover as per the Contract Documents
D.
The Contractor shall install water stop flanges on the pipes connecting to the bottom drains
3.4
PREFABRICATED GUTTER SYSTEM

A.
3.5
Install gutter system as per manufacturers recommendations, including leveling and support devices.
GUTTER DRAINS
A.
Install gutter drains as shown on the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall verify the spacing of the
gutter drains
B.
3.6
The Contractor shall slope the gutter to the gutter drains.

PERIMETER GRATING
A.
Install Perimeter Gutter as shown on the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall install the grating as
recommended by the manufacturer
B.
The Contractor shall verify that the grating thickness is compatible with the gutter installation
C.
The grating shall be flush with the pool deck or pool shell as per installation condition
3.7
LARGE DRAIN SUMP GRATING
A.
Install grating as shown on the Contract Documents. Contractor shall obtain manufacturers fabrication
and support drawing and install per manufacturers recommendations
B.
The grating shall be flush with the pool finish.
C.
The Contractor shall properly anchor grating to frame with 316L stainless steel screws or clips as per
manufacturers recommendations. Fastener shall require the use of a tool to remove.
3.8
FRP BALANCE TANKS

A.
Install FRP Balance tanks in accordance with the Contract Documents.
B.
The Contractor shall obtain manufacturers shop drawing showing penetration locations, sizes, and
elevations
C.
The Contractor shall provide concrete ballast for tanks installed in locations where ground water may be
present
D.
The Contractor shall provide the appropriate cover for the surrounding area, whether in landscape,
pedestrian, or back of house spaces
E.
The Contractor shall notify the Engineer of Record if the tank is installed four (4) or more feet below the
bottom of the pool, as this may create a potential suction condition
F.
Enclosed FRP balance tanks shall have a vent pipe, of sufficient diameter, that extends above the water
surface of the pool. The vent shall be configured to prevent obstruction, whether by manmade means or natural
means
G.
The Contractor shall provide necessary float control valves as specified in the Contract Documents or as
per Manufacturer recommendation
04 February 2016
13 1404/ 6

3.9
FLOOR AND WALL INLET JETS
A.
Install floor and wall jets in accordance with manufacturers recommendation and as indicated on the
Contract Documents.
B.
Install jets in locations as shown on the Contract Documents. Jets shall be installed flush with the finished
surface of the pool
C.
The Contractor shall make the necessary adjustments to the floor inlet jets to provide a balance and even
distribution throughout the pool
3.10
HYDROTHERAPY JETS
A.
Install hydrotherapy jets in accordance with manufacturers recommendations and as indicated on the
Contract Documents
B.
Install hydrotherapy jets in locations as shown on the Contract Documents. Jets shall be installed flush
with the finishes surface of the pool
C.
Install hydrotherapy jets with the air port on the top. The Contractor shall install the air supply line at the
highest possible elevation between the pool and the Hartford Loop.
D.
The Contractor shall install a Hartford Loop in a location that has been coordinated with the landscape
architect/architect to provide as much concealment as possible. The Hartford Loop shall be located in close
proximity of the pool
3.11
HYDROSTATIC RELIEF VALVES
A.
Install hydrostatic relief valves in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations and as indicated
on the Contract Documents.
B.
The Contractor shall prepare an area around the collector tube that provides free draining material and
filter fabric between the native material and the free draining material
END OF SECTION

04 February 2016
13 1404/ 7

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.

1.
Name Plates
2.
Equipment and Valve Tags
3.
Stencils
4.
Pipe Markers
Related Sections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10. SECTION 13 1515 AQUARIUM ACCESSORY EQUIPMENT

1.2

A.
B.
Product Data: Provide manufacturers catalog literature for each product required
C.
Shop Drawings: Provide drawings indicating wording, symbols, letter size, and color coding for mechanical
identification
D.
1.
Submit drawing of process diagram indicating equipment numbers and valve tag numbers with a valve
schedule and chart. Schedule shall indicate valve position during normal and shutdown operation
2.
Approved drawing shall be mounted on foam board, laminated, and mounted on mechanical room wall
Samples: Submit two samples of name plates, equipment tags, and pipe markers
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
NAME PLATES
A.
Approved Manufacturers:
1.
Brady Company
2.
Allen Systems
3.
Seton Corporation
4.
Approved Contractor Submitted Alternate

04 February 2016
13 1501/ 1

13 1501WATER FEATURE MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
B.
2.2
Description: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved black letters on light contrasting background color
EQUIPMENT AND VALVE TAGS
A.
1.
Brady Company
2.
Allen Systems
3.
Seton Corporation
4.
B.
Description: 2 inch by 3 inch (50mm x 75mm) Laminated three-layer plastic tag with black letters on light
contrasting background with brass chain
2.3
STENCILS
A.
B.
2.4
1.
Brady Company
2.
Allen Systems
3.
Seton Corporation
4.
Description: Stencils with clean cut symbols and letters of the following size:
1.
to 1-1/4 inch (19 to 32mm) Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 8 inch (200mm) long color field,
inch (13mm) high letters.
2.
1-1/2 to 2 inch (40 to 50mm) Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 8 inch (200mm) long color field,
inch (19mm) high letters
3.
2-1/2 to 6 inch (65 to 150mm) Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 12 inch (300mm) long color field,
1-1/4 (32mm) high letters
4.
8 to 10 inch (200 to 250mm) Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 24 inch (600mm) long color field,
2-1/2 inch (63mm) high letters
5.
Larger than 10 inch (250mm) Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 32 inch (800mm) long color field,
3-1/2 inch (88mm) high letters
PIPE MARKERS
A.
B.
1.
Brady Company
2.
Allen Systems
3.
Seton Corporation
4.
Wording and Color: Conform to ANSI A13.1 for text heights, field lengths, and locations
Sample Wording
Background Colors
Bromine
Chlorine
Acid
Carbon Dioxide (CO2)
Ozone Gas
Soda Ash

04 February 2016
13 1501/ 2
Yellow
Yellow
Yellow
Yellow
Yellow
Yellow

Natural Gas
Propane
Hot Water Supply
Hot Water Return
Potable Water
Filtered Water
Raw Water
Process Water Supply
Process Water Return
Backwash Water
Sanitary Waste Water
Sanitary Drain
Fire Protection
Fire Sprinklers
Compressed Air
Low Pressure Air
Yellow
Yellow
Yellow
Yellow
Green
Green
Green
Green
Green
Green
Green
Green
Red
Red
Blue
Blue
C.
Plastic Pipe Markers: Factory fabricate, flexible, semi-rigid plastic, preformed to fit around pipe or pipe
insulation covering; minimum information indicating flow direction arrow and identification of fluid being conveyed
as follows:
Pipes carrying unfiltered water to be labeled as:
Pipes carrying filter water to be labeled as:
Backwash piping labeled as:
Chlorine piping labeled as:
Ozone gas piping labeled as:
Acid piping labeled as:
Soda Ash piping labeled as:
RAW WATER
FILTERED WATER
BACKWASH
CHLORINE
OZONE
ACID
BASE
D.
Plastic Tape Pipe Markers: Flexible, vinyl film tape with pressure sensitive adhesive backing and printed
markings
E.
Underground Plastic Pipe Markers: Bright colored continuously printed plastic ribbon tape, minimum 6
inches (150mm) wide by 4 mil (0.1mm) thick, manufactured for direct burial service
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
B.
C.
Name Plates
1.
Install plastic name plates with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive. Apply with
sufficient adhesive to ensure permanent adhesion and seal with clear lacquer
2.
Identify pumps, filters, controllers, generators, and all other equipment with plastic name plates
3.
Identify control panels and major control components outside panels with plastic name plates
Equipment and Valve Tags

1.
Install tags with corrosion-resistant chain, brass or other suitable material
2.
Tag automatic controls, instruments, and relays. Key to control schematic
3.
Identify valves in main and branch piping with tags
Stencils
1.
D.
Apply stencil painting in accordance with the manufacturers instructions
Pipe Markers
1.
Install plastic tape pipe markers completely around pipe in accordance with manufacturers instructions

04 February 2016
13 1501/ 3

2.
Install plastic pipe markers in accordance with manufacturers instructions
3.
Install underground plastic pipe markers 6 to 8 inches (150 to 200mm) below finish grade, directly
above buried pipe
4.
Identify all piping, concealed or exposed, with plastic pipe markers or stenciled painting. Identify
service, flow direction, and pressure. Install in clear view and align with axis of piping. Spacing
between identifying markers/stencils not to exceed 20 feet (6m)
END OF SECTION

04 February 2016
13 1501/ 4

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.

1.
Pump Performance
2.
Fresh Water Pumps
3.
B.
a.
End Suction, Long Coupled, Centrifugal Pumps
b.
End Suction, Closed Coupled, Centrifugal Pumps
c.
Submersible Pumps
d.
Vertical Turbine Pumps
e.
Axial Flow and Mixed Flow Pumps
Salt Water Pumps

a.
b.
Axial Flow and Mix Flow Pumps
c.
Magnetic Drive Pumps
Related Sections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
SECTION 13 1501 WATER FEATURE MECHANICAL IDENIFICATION
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.

C.
References:
1.
ANSI B16.5 STANDARDS OF PIPES AND FITTINGS
2.
ASTM A48 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR GRAY IRON CASTING
3.
ASTM A53 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR PIPE, STEEL, BLACK AND HOT-DIPPED, ZINCCOATED, WELDED AND SEAMLESS
4.
ASTM A108 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR STEEL BAR, CARBON AND ALLOY
5.
ASTM A242 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR HIGH-STRENGTH LOW ALLOY STRUCTURAL

STEEL
6.
ASTM B108 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ALUMINUM-ALLOY PERMANENT MOLD

CASTING
7.
AMERICAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION (AWWA) SPECIFICATION E101-88
8.
NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA) 70 or NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

04 February 2016
13 1502/ 1

13 1502WATER FEATURE PUMPS AND MOTORS
(NEC)
9.
NATIONAL SANITATION FOUNDATION (NSF) STANDARD 50
10. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) Regulations

11. UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL)
1.2

A.
B.
Product Data: Submit manufacturers literature including pump and motor general assembly, dimensions,
weights, clearances, service connections, wiring diagrams and controls.
C.
1.
Provide pump curves showing performance characteristics of pump and system, operating point
indicated, required NPSH and efficiency curves.
2.
Provide name plate data and ratings
Shop Drawings: Indicated layout, clearances, and methods of assembly and installation
D.
Operation and Maintenance Data: Provide manufacturers installation instructions, and specifications,
start-up procedures, assembly drawings, troubleshooting check lists, scheduled maintenance recommendations,
replacement parts list and repair data
E.
F.
Manufacturers Certification: Submit documentation from the manufacturer certifying that pumps conform
with NSF 50 guidelines
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the Work of this Section with a minimum five
(5) years documented experience
B.
Comply with all applicable requirements of Division 16 Sections
C.
Comply with NFPA 70 and local energy codes
D.
Comply with BSEN and local energy codes
1.4

A.
Coordinate delivery with installation time to assure minimum holding time
B.
Accept pumps and components on site in factory packaging. Immediately upon receipt of shipment,
inspect, and check for damage
C.
Protect pumps and components from physical damage including effects of weather, water, and
construction debris
D.
Store pumps in accordance to Manufacturers recommendations
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PUMP PERFORMANCE
A.
Provide pumps matching discharge, electrical, and performance characteristics as shown on the
equipment schedules on the Contract Documents
2.2
FRESH WATER PUMPS

A.

04 February 2016
13 1502/ 2

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
a.
Marlow
b.
PACO Products
c.
Peerless Pump
Casing:
a.
Class 35 (minimum) cast iron
b.
Hydro-statically tested per the Hydraulic Institute Standards
c.
Connections to comply with ASME B16.1 and ANSI 125/250 psi flanges for suction and discharge
d.
Casing Wear Ring: Bronze, replaceable
Impeller:
a.
Enclosed type cast bronze, statically and dynamically balanced
b.
Diameter not greater than 90 percent of the casing cut-water diameter
Mechanical Seal
a.
Single, inside mounted, end face, BUNA N rubber bellows
b.
All stainless steel springs and metal parts
c.
Carbon rotating washer
Shaft and Shaft Sleeve

a.
Carbon steel shaft, maximum 0.002 inch (0.05mm) deflection at 95% and 105% of capacity at
maximum speed
b.
Bronze shaft sleeve
c.
Sleeve shall extend beyond mechanical seal flanges
Bearing Frame
a.
One piece cast iron, fully supported on both coupling and pump ends
b.
Single row, deep groove, greasable ball bearings
c.
Bearings designed for 100,000 hour average life
d.
Rubber slinger on shaft and lip seal in bearing housing
Pump and Motor Assembly

a.
Rigid steel base plate, with open grouting area
b.
Factory aligned prior to shipment
c.
OSHA approved coupling guard
d.
Coupling
1).
Woods Sureflex for constant speed applications
2).
Falk Steelflex for variable speed applications
e.
Pump motor to be Totally Enclosed Fan Cooled (TEFC) high efficiency motor
f.
Motor to have Class F insulation with temperature rise as specified by NEMA standards for class
of insulation used and shall have a 1.15 service factor
g.
Motor noise level to be less than 80 dBa at 3 feet (1m) or provide with a sound shroud
h.
Reduced voltage starting, squirrel cage induction type

04 February 2016
13 1502/ 3

8.
Basket Strainer
a.
B.
Acceptable Basket Strainer Manufacturers

1).
Mer-Made Filter
2).
Neptune Benson Guardian
3).
Fluidtrol Process Technologies
b.
All fiberglass body with corrosion liner on all interior surfaces and flange faces
c.
ANSI Standard flanged inlet sized to pipe
d.
ANSI Standard eccentric reducing outlet sized to match pump inlet
e.
Provide a quick release to allow strainer basket to be removed quickly and easily. Release to be
make of stainless steel bolts with fiberglass knobs\
f.
V-wire 304 stainless steel basket with 3/16 inch (5mm) rectangular holes and 75% open area.
Holes in the basket shall not be larger than 50 percent of minimum opening size of the pump it is
protecting
g.
Provide a inch (6mm) Ball Cock Valve to be installed in the top of the strainer or lid to relieve
trapped air
End Suction, Closed Coupled, Centrifugal Pumps

1.
2.
a.
Pentair
b.
Hayward
c.
Sta-Rite
Casing
a.
3.
Impeller
a.
4.
7.
Ceramic
Shaft and Shaft Sleeve

a.
6.
Polycarbonate
Mechanical Seal
a.
5.
Molded from glass reinforced, corrosion-resistant thermoplastic with Bronze Wear Ring
Stainless steel with neoprene sleeve

a.
Mounted on molded glass reinforced, corrosion resistant thermoplastic supporting both pump and
motor ends
b.
Motor to have Class F insulation with temperature rise as specified by NEMA Standards for class
of insulation used and shall have a 1.15 service factor
c.
Motor noise level to be less than 80 dBa at 3 feet (1m) or provided with a sound shroud
Basket Strainer
a.
Body to be integral with pump housing
b.
Transparent acrylic or Plexiglas lid with an ethylene propylene O ring
c.
Quick release to allow strainer basket to be removed quickly and easily
d.
304 stainless steel basket with 3/16 inch (5mm) rectangular holes and 75% open area. Holes in
basket shall not be larger than 50 percent of minimum size of the pump it is protecting

04 February 2016
13 1502/ 4

e.
2.3
Provide inch (6mm) Ball Cock Valve to be installed in top of the strainer or lid to relieve trapped
air
SALT WATER PUMPS

A.

1.
2.
a.
MET PRO Corporation - Fybroc
b.
Ingersoll-Dresser
Casing:
a.
3.
Impeller:
a.
4.
B.
Statically balanced semi-open design
Shaft and Sleeve:

a.
5.
High grade glass reinforced (GRP) construction
Heat treated polygon Type 4140 Steel shaft with non-metal sleeve, and oil lubricated bearings with
external oilers

a.
Pump mounted on a molded glass reinforced vinyl ester base with integral drain rim and mounting
inserts
b.
Couplings to be flexible spaces type permitting disassembly and inspection without disturbing
pump and piping, drives, or alignment
c.
Couple guards to meet OSHA standards
d.
Pump motor to be Totally Enclosed Fan Cooled (TEFC) high efficiency motor
e.
Motor noise level to be less than 80 dBa at 3 feet (1m), or provided with a sound shroud
f.
Reduced voltage starting, squirrel cage induction type
Axial Flow and Mixed Flow Pumps

1.
2.
a.
Flygt
b.
MWI
Propeller bowl shall be a single stage, shop assembled unit consisting of the following:
a.
Venturi Housing: Manufactured of alloy steel fitted with a machined, removable housing liner of
316L Stainless Steel
b.
Stainless Steel Liner
c.
Stainless Steel Propeller Blades: Manufactured of 316L Stainless Steel. Shall be statically and
dynamically balanced and secured firmly on the taper shaft with alignment key and locknut
d.
Propeller Shaft: Machined from high tensile strength, solid stainless steel bar stock and shall
conform to ASME code for transmission shafting to transmit full load torque and shall have
additional safety factor for shock loads
e.
Bearings: Multiple angular contact bearings to prevent axial and radial misalignment of vibration of
the shaft
f.
The shaft bearing shall be sealed, self-lubricating by low pressure hydraulic oil designed for
bearing life of 50,000 hours of use
g.
The propeller shaft and bearing shall be contained in a machined bearing housing centrally

04 February 2016
13 1502/ 5

supported by flow straightening vanes in the propeller bowl assembly and shall be protected
against sand particle intrusion with bronze restrictor rings
h.
3.
4.
5.
Bearing shall be designed to accept thrust in either direction, along with a reverse rotation
mechanism
Suction Bell Assembly

a.
Manufactured from alloy steel and conforming to ASTM A242
b.
Shall have a minimum inlet diameter of 1.5 times the propeller diameter
c.
Bell shall be constructed so to minimize vortex formation by maintaining equal pressure and
velocities across the entrance
d.
The entrance shall be manufactured with cross bars placed across the bell mouth to prevent
entrance of large sticks, logs, or debris
e.
Inlet bell face shall be parallel to the water surface regardless of the angle of installation
Discharge Tube and Head Assembly

a.
Manufactured of abrasive resistant steel conforming to ASTM A242
b.
The complete pump assembly shall be painted inside and outside with black bitumastic enamel
Hydraulic Motor:
a.
Shall be factory assembled consisting of the assembly housing, hydraulic motor, propeller shaft
coupling, inlet and outlet port pipe connections
b.
Assembly housing shall be shop manufactured of alloy steel conforming to ASTM A242, and shall
be fitted with connecting flanges for assembly with the pump bowl assembly and the discharge
pipe assembly
c.
The housing assembly shall contain a hydraulic motor which shall be coupled to the mating
propeller shaft by means of jaw or chain type coupling
d.
The bearings, shaft, and coupling shall be totally enclosed and high pressure sealed to permit
totally submerged operation in any position
e.
The hydraulic motor shall be provided with inlet and outlet port pipe connections extended from
hydraulic motor through the assembly housing and shall terminate with female quick coupling
connections on each end
f.
Hydraulic motor shall be mounted on the discharge side of the propeller. Suction side installations
shall not be allowed
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine surfaces, substrates, and conditions for compliance with requirements of other sections in which
the related Work is specified, and determine if surfaces, substrates, and conditions affecting performance of the
Work of this Section are satisfactory. Do not proceed with the Work of this Section until unsatisfactory conditions
have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer. Starting installation shall constitute acceptance of
surfaces, substrates, and conditions
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Install pumps and motors in strict compliance with the manufacturers recommendations to insure
manufacturers warranty conditions are met
B.
Locate pumps in locations indicated on the Contract Documents. Mount pumps on concrete housekeeping
pads with embedded anchor bolts. Build templates for pump mounting from actual base plates delivered to site with
pump and motor
04 February 2016
13 1502/ 6

C.
Inspect pumps and remove any dirt or foreign material from the pump suction and discharge. Check motor
to make sure not foreign objects have entered through fan and cooling openings
D.
Verify clearances around the pump meet the manufacturers recommendations
E.
Pump and motor shall be leveled and grouted in place
F.
Piping connected to pump suction must be eccentric and aligned with the pump inlet. Piping connected to
pump discharge must be concentric and aligned with the pump outlet
G.
Pipe enlargements at the pump suction and discharge must be made with reducer fittings. Bushing type
fittings are not acceptable and will be replaced with eccentric or concentric reducers
H.
Check pump for alignment, lubrication, and rotation
I.
Provide drains for bases and seals, piped to and discharging into floor drains
J.
Provide connection to electrical service in accordance with all applicable sections of Division 16
3.3

A.
Test entire system with pump manufacturers representative present
B.
Test to include three point pump performance by measuring the amp draw and voltage, the discharge
pressure and the rate of flow
C.
Rate of flow must be within 10 percent above the approved curve for acceptance
D.
Discharge pressure head must be within 5 percent above the approved curve for acceptance
E.
Submit three (3) copies of the test results to the Engineer

END OF SECTION

04 February 2016
13 1502/ 7

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.

1.
B.
C.
1.2
High Rate Sand Filters

a.
Horizontal Tank Configuration
b.
Vertical Tank Configuration
c.
Sand Filter Media
d.
Backwash Control Valving
2.
Cartridge Filters
3.
Backwash Holding Tanks and Sumps
Related Sections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
References:
1.
ASTM 6063 ALUMINUM MATERIAL PROPERTIES
2.
ASTM B179 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ALUMINUM ALLOYS IN INGOT AND MOLTEN
FORMS FOR CASTINGS FROM ALL CASTING PROCESSES
3.
ASTM S12A ALUMINUM ALLOY SPECIFICATION
4.
5.
UNDERWRITERS LABORATORY, INC (UL) STANDARD 508

A.
B.
Product Data: Submit manufacturers literature including printed recommendations, dimensions and sizes
for filters, control panels, and accessories.
1.
Indicate on each submittal which materials, models, data, and options are being selected
C.
Shop Drawings: Provide certified engineering drawings and calculations to demonstrate structural strength
of filter vessels

04 February 2016
13 1503/ 1

13 1503WATER FEATURE FILTERS
D.
Operation and Maintenance Data: Provide manufacturers installation instructions, specifications, start-up
procedures, assembly drawings, troubleshooting checklists, scheduled maintenance recommendations,
replacement parts list and repair data
E.
Manufacturers Certification: Submit documentation from the manufacturer certifying that Control Console
meets UL Standard 508, Industrial Controller
F.
Manufacturers Certification: Submit documentation from the manufacturer certifying that the Filter Vessels
conform with NSF Standard 50 guidelines
G.
and registered with the manufacturer
H.
Filter Manufacturers shall guarantee to repair or replace any filter tank, lateral, diverter, or internal header
found defective due to any structural failure caused by delamination, fatigue, rust, scaling, corrosion, and UV rays
for a period of five (5) years form date of final payment
1.3
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A.
All Work shall conform to applicable state and local codes, specifically, local electrical and health codes as
they apply to public water features
1.4
A.
All components of the filter system shall be supplied in wooden creates to facilitate shipments, handling
and/or storage on the job site
B.
C.
Accept filters and components on site in factory packing. Immediately upon receipt of shipment, inspect
and check for damage
D.
debris
Protect filters and components from physical damage including effects of weather, water, and construction
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
HIGH RATE SAND FILTERS

A.
Horizontal Tank Configuration

1.
a.
Neptune-Benson
b.
Paragon Aquatics
c.
Astral Filter
2.
Shall be capable of filtering water rates of 15 gpm/sq ft (10 lps/sq m) and backwashing rates from 15
gpm/sq ft (10 lps/sq m) to 20 gpm/sq ft (13.5 lps/sq m) of the filter media area
3.
Backwash Cycle shall be accomplished by reversing the flow through the vessel using filtered water
from adjacent vessel(s). Backwash with raw source water is not acceptable
4.
Horizontal Filter Systems include the following components:

a.
Filter Vessel
b.
Distribution Piping
c.
Header Piping
d.
Fastening Hardware
e.
Automatic Filter Control Console

04 February 2016
13 1503/ 2

5.
6.
7.
8.
Filter Vessel:
a.
Horizontal type pressure vessel for use with a single grade of media
b.
Manufactured of filament wound fiberglass reinforced with premium isophthalic polyester
c.
Consisting and inner corrosion barrier/liner wound with continuous strand fiberglass filaments
wrapped in circumferential and longitudinal patterns
d.
Coated with a minimum 20 mil (0.5mm) premium grade isophthalic gelcoat with UV inhibitor
e.
Reinforced openings and penetrations with continuous filaments
f.
Provide a drain in the bottom of the vessel to allow draining of the tank without having to expel the
sand media
g.
Access manhole shall be 12 inches (300mm) by 16 inches (400mm) into the vessel with yoke,
cover and gasket fitted on the side to facilitate servicing of the vessel
h.
Automatic internal and a manual external air relief system in the top of the vessel
i.
Listed by NSF for a maximum flow rating of 20 gpm/sq ft (13.5 lps/sq m)
j.
Rated for a design vacuum of 14.68 psi (101 kPa)
k.
Vessels shall be designed and have provision for stacked installation configuration
Distribution Piping:
a.
Influent and effluent connections shall be sized as shown on the Contract Documents
b.
Influent and effluent pipes shall be fitted with Schedule 80 PVC flanged fittings with a minimum
strength requirement of 1,500 lb-ft (207 kg-m) of bending moment and 200 lb-ft (28 kg-m) of
torque
c.
Internal distribution and collection system constructed of ABS plastic and Schedule 80 PVC pipe,
fabricated with flow distributors threaded into Schedule 80 PVC pipe
d.
All distributors an laterals shall be threaded and replaceable
e.
Internal flow velocities of laterals not to exceed 2 feet (0.6m) per second at the design flow rate
f.
All internal components shall be hydraulically balanced to prevent migration of filter media during
the filtration cycle
g.
Each tank shall uniformly fluidize media in backwash cycle without channeling or breakthrough at
any on location
Header Piping:
a.
All header piping and fittings to be constructed of Schedule 80 PVC
b.
Piping and fittings to be connected with flanges
c.
Flanges to meet ANSI Standard pattern and designed with a minimum strength requirement of
1,500 ft-lb (207 kg-m) of bending moment and 200 lb-ft (28 kg-m) of torque
d.
Backwash control valve(s) shall be supplied with each filter
e.
Provide a backwash sight glass with each filter system
f.
Header piping shall include all piping and fittings which connect two or more filters and valves into
a system to provide a single influent, effluent, and backwash connection point
g.
Header piping and fittings shall be sized as shown on the Contract Documents
Fastening Hardware
a.
9.
All fastening hardware on flanges, man ways, viewing ports, etc. shall be 316L Stainless Steel
Automatic Filter Control System

04 February 2016
13 1503/ 3

a.
Listed by UL as a filter controller under Standard 508, Industrial Controllers
b.
Filter Control System shall consist of an automatic controller, with its associated temperature,
pressure and flow sensors and backwash control valves
c.
Control System shall govern operation of the filter system with logic provided by a programmable
microprocessor capable of maintaining program memory without need for power
d.
Ability to initiate an emergency telephone call in an alarm condition
e.
All components housed within a fully gasketed NEMA 4 hinged non-conductive enclosure featuring
a security locking device, plus a view window
f.
Controller shall continuously monitor and be capable of displaying the following:
g.
1).
Filter Inlet Pressure in psi (kPa)
2).
Filter Outlet Pressure in psi (kPa)
3).
Differential Pressure in psi (kPa)
4).
Current Water Temperature in F and C
5).
System Flow Rate in gpm (lps)
6).
Accumulated flow since last backwash cycle in gallons (liters)
7).
Elapse time since last backwash cycle
8).
Current time of day
9).
Current day and date
10).
Mode of operation
Controller shall provide the following features and functions

1).
7 day/24 hour ON/OFF energy saver timer clock to turn the system ON/OFF on a daily basis
2).
7 day/24 hour backwash initiation time clock to allow backwash cycle to occur any time
during the day on any day of the week
3).
Automatically initiate backwash cycle by user selection and setting of either:

a).
Differential Pressure
b).
Time
c).
Flow Rate
d).
Accumulated Flow
e).
Or combination of above
h.
Manually initiate a backwash cycle
i.
Fail-safe monitor and shut down if backwash cycle is interrupted or inhibit signal is received
j.
Backwash volume counter
k.
Provide control logic for the following controls allowing the controller to coordinate with accessory
equipment
1).
Controller only initiates backwash after confirming that there are no other systems already in
backwash and that no other inhibit condition exists
2).
A Firemans Delay contact that initiates a constant +24 VAC signal at a user adjustable
time prior to the actual backwash cycle, and during the entire backwash cycle, and for a
user adjustable time after the backwash cycle. (Used to shut down the ozone generator and
heater before backwash cycle and delaying startup after backwash cycle.)
3).
A Pump contact that initiates a continuous signal during the entire backwash cycle. (Used

04 February 2016
13 1503/ 4

to turn filter pump(s) off while switching valves if necessary)
l.
4).
A Valve contact that initiates a continuous signal during the entire backwash cycle. (Used
to move backwash control valve into correct position)
5).
A Sump contact that initiates a continuous signal during backwash and for a user
adjustable time after the backwash cycle is completed. (Used to start a sump pump as
required)
Easily accessible terminal hook-up board and switching to control accessory equipment
m. Battery backup to maintain time and date in the event of a power failure
10. Metal fasteners shall be Grade 316L Stainless Steel
11. Provide gauge panel for two (2) oil pressure gauges for influent/effluent read outs
B.
Vertical Filter Configuration

1.
a.
Pentair Triton Commercial
b.
Neptune-Benson
c.
Hayward Industrial Products
2.
Shall be capable of filtering water rates of 15 gpm/sq ft (10 lps/sq m) and backwashing rates from 15
gpm/sq ft (10 lps/sq m) to 20 gpm/sq ft (13.5 lps/sq m) of the filter media area
3.
Backwash Cycle shall be accomplished by reversing the flow through the vessel using filtered water
from adjacent vessel(s). Backwash with raw source water is not acceptable
4.
Vertical Filter System shall include the following:
5.
6.
a.
Filter Vessel
b.
Distribution Piping
c.
Header Piping
Vessel:
a.
Constructed of molded colorfast polymeric material or seamless filament wound fiberglass

reinforced plastic
b.
Automatic air-relief valve
c.
Drain port location in the bottom of the vessel
d.
Inspection cover in the top of the vessel
e.
Internal distribution piping to direct water evenly across the entire sand surface
Distribution Piping:
a.
Influent and effluent connections shall be sized as shown on the Contract Documents
b.
Influent and effluent pipes shall be fitted with Schedule 80 PVC flanged fittings with a minimum
strength requirement of 1,500 lb-ft (207 kg-m) of bending moment and 200 lb-ft (28 kg-m) of
torque
c.
Internal distribution and collection system constructed of ABS plastic and Schedule 80 PVC pipe,
fabricated with flow distributors threaded into Schedule 80 PVC pipe
d.
All distributors an laterals shall be threaded and replaceable
e.
All internal components shall be hydraulically balanced to prevent migration of filter media during
the filtration cycle
f.
Each tank shall uniformly fluidize media in backwash cycle without channeling or breakthrough at
any on location

04 February 2016
13 1503/ 5

7.
2.2
Header Piping:
a.
All header piping and fittings to be constructed of Schedule 80 PVC
b.
Piping and fittings to be connected with flanges
c.
Flanges to meet ANSI Standard pattern and designed with a minimum strength requirement of
1,500 ft-lb (207 kg-m) of bending moment and 200 lb-ft (28 kg-m) of torque
d.
Backwash control valve(s) shall be supplied with each filter
e.
Provide a backwash sight glass with each filter system
f.
Header piping shall include all piping and fittings which connect two or more filters and valves into
a system to provide a single influent, effluent, and backwash connection point
g.
Header piping and fittings shall be sized as shown on the Contract Documents
SAND FILTER MEDIA
A.
filters:
2.3
Grade #20 Silica Sand conforming to the following shall be used for both horizontal and vertical sand
1.
Effective size:
0.018 inch (0.45mm)
2.
Uniformity Coefficient:
1.5
3.
Mean Diameter:
0.0243 inch (0.61mm)
4.
Standard Deviation:
0.00432 inch (0.11mm)
5.
Conforming to the following gradation:

Sieve No.
(U.S. Series)
Opening Size
Inches (mm)

(% by weight)
20
30
40
50
0.033 (0.838)
0.023 (0.584)
0.016 (0.406)
0.012 (0.305)
2
58
36
4
BACKWASH CONTROL VALVING

A.
B.
1.
ASAHI AMERICA
2.
Approved Filter Manufacturer
3.
Approved Equal
Horizontal Sand Filter System

1.
2.
Motorized Butterfly Valve

a.
Electric actuator with reversing type motor and manual override
b.
Integral thermal overload protection with auto-reset
c.
Permanently lubrication gear train
d.
Adjustable travel-stop limit switches
e.
Capable of being operated by a low voltage signal from filter control center and separate HandOff-Auto (HOA) switch
f.
Fully field adjustable closure stops to limit the percent of valve closure to assure proper system
flow rate
Pneumatically Actuated Butterfly Valve and Pneumatic Actuator with manual override

04 February 2016
13 1503/ 6

a.
Double Piston, Rack and Pinion Design Double Acting Air-to-Air Operation
b.
ISO mounting pattern for valve with NAMUR mounting pattern for solenoids and accessories
c.
Valves 4 inches (100mm) and smaller to include flats on actuator shaft for manual override. Valves
larger than 4 inches (100mm) to include de-clutchable gear operated manual override
d.
Actuator bodies to be of highly corrosion resistant glass filled polyamide or aluminum with Rilsan
coating
e.
Solenoid valve to be NEMA IV, with manual override and speed controls
f.
Actuators shall be incorporated valve position limit switches coupled to the valve shaft and
indicating to the PLC the fully OPEN or CLOSED position of the valve
g.
Fully field adjustable closure stops to limit the percent of valve closure to assure proper system
flow rate
h.
Supply air pressure regulator to be provided, properly rated for working range of actuator
i.
Supply air working range 80-120 psi (550-830 kPa)
j.
Each actuator air line to be supplied with a ball valve for isolation
k.
Actuator Seals shall be BUNA N
l.
Integral thermal overload protection with auto-reset
m. Permanently lubricated gear train

n.
3.
C.
Capable of being operated by a low voltage signal from filter control center and separate HOA
switch
Tandem Butterfly Valves (up to 14 inches (350mm) diameter)

a.
Body construction shall be one piece thermoplastic PVC conforming to Cell Classification 12454.
Body shall be wafer type conforming to ANSI B 16.5 bolt circle
b.
Disc shall be PVC or Polypropylene
c.
Stem shall be 316L Stainless Steel non-wetted type
d.
External metallic trim shall be 300 Series Stainless Steel, epoxy or powder coated
e.
Seals: Full Seat design, Isolating stem from median and functioning as a gasket for mating
flanges. Material shall be EPDM
f.
Valves shall have bubble tight shut-off with the following pressure ratings:
1).
Sizes up to 10 inches (250mm) 150 psi (1.0 MPa)
2).
Size 12 inches (300mm) and larger 100 psi (690 kPa) based on ambient Temperature
g.
Tandem Butterfly arrangement shall consist of two (2) butterfly valves mounted to a flanged Tstyle fitting
h.
Tandem mounting kit and hardware shall be manufactured Stainless Steel, and allow independent
adjustment of opening and closing of valves
i.
Tandem mounting kit shall be of a design that fully supports valves and actuator
j.
Valves shall operate in opposite directions (i.e. one valve is opening as the other valve is closing)
k.
All valves shall be tested by the manufacturer prior to shipment. Test documents shall be available
upon request
Vertical Sand Filter System

1.
Multiport Type Control Valve

a.
Include the following settings:

04 February 2016
13 1503/ 7

2.
2.4
1).
Filter:
Normal operation
2).
Backwash:
For cleaning filter sand bed
3).
Rinse:
For rinsing after backwash
4).
Waste:
Bypassing filter for draining or lowering pool water
5).
Recirculate:
Water bypasses filter
6).
Closed:
Shuts off flow from the pump to the filter
b.
All construction materials shall be either PVC, CPVC, ABS, or similar thermoplastic material
c.
Control Valves shall be sized to meet the flow requirements of the filter system with minimal
pressure loss of less than 10 psi (69 kPa)
d.
Control Valves shall include a integral sight glass sufficient in size to enable operator visual
inspection of the backwash water
e.
Selection of the Control Valve setting shall be operated with a level action handle for ease of
function selection
f.
Selection of the Control Valves shall be provided with a liquid filled pressure gauge
g.
Backwash Control Valves shall be proven to operate properly with filter system selected and
approved for use by the filter manufacturer
Tandem Butterfly Valves (up to 8 inches (200mm) diameter)

a.
Body construction shall be one piece thermoplastic PVC conforming to Cell Classification 12454.
Body shall be wafer type conforming to ANSI B 16.5 bolt circle
b.
Disc shall be PVC or Polypropylene
c.
d.
External metallic trim shall be 300 Series Stainless Steel, epoxy or powder coated
e.
Seals: Full Seat design, Isolating stem from median and functioning as a gasket for mating
flanges. Material shall be EPDM
f.
Tandem Butterfly arrangement shall consist of two (2) butterfly valves mounted to a flanged Tstyle fitting
g.
Tandem mounting kit and hardware shall be manufactured Stainless Steel, and allow independent
adjustment of opening and closing of valves
h.
Tandem mounting kit shall be of a design that fully supports valves and actuator
i.
Valves shall operate in opposite directions (i.e. one valve is opening as the other valve is closing)
j.
upon request
CARTRIDGE FILTER SYSTEM

A.
B.
1.
Pentair
2.
Hayward
Cartridge Filter System shall include the following:

1.
Filter Vessel
2.
Chemical resistant tank body
3.
High flow manual air relief valve
4.
Unionized connections

04 February 2016
13 1503/ 8

2.5
5.
Minimum one (1) replacement cartridge
6.
Isolation valves for each filter vessel
7.
Distribution Piping
BACKWASH HOLDING TANKS AND SUMPS

A.
B.
Backwash Holding Tanks

1.
Tanks shall be constructed of cast-in-place concrete per location and dimensions as indicated on the
Contract Documents
2.
Tank walls and floor shall be water tight
3.
Tank floor shall slope to the drain
4.
Tank shall have an open top
5.
Provide a means of access into the tank by means of a fiberglass ladder inside the tank. For above
grade tanks, provide a fiberglass ladder on the outside of the tank
Backwash Sumps
1.
a.
ASA Manufacturing Incorporated
b.
Approved Equal
2.
Sumps shall be constructed of premium fiberglass and resin with a durable smooth gelcoat interior
3.
Include a heavy duty grate cover
4.
Drain pipe shall discharge from the bottom of the box. Side discharges may only be used as approved
by the Engineer
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine surfaces, substrates, and conditions for compliance with requirements of other sections in which
related Work is specified, and determine if surfaces, substrates, and conditions affecting performance of the Work
of this section are satisfactory. Do not proceed with the Work of this section until unsatisfactory conditions have
been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer. Starting installation constitutes acceptance of surfaces,
substrates, and conditions
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Install filters in strict compliance with the Manufacturers recommendations to insure the Manufacturers
warranty conditions can be met
B.
Locate filters in locations indicated on the Contract Documents, on smooth and level concrete
housekeeping pads
C.
Inspect filters removing any dirt or foreign material from the Filter vessel and influent, effluent, and
distribution piping
D.
Verify access to filter man ways, control panel, drains, and valves in accordance to the Manufacturers
recommendations
E.
Install appropriate amount of filter media in each Filter vessel in accordance to manufacturers
recommendations

04 February 2016
13 1503/ 9

F.
Assemble header piping and valves on site as indicated on the Contract Documents. Pipes may need to
be trimmed in the field. Header piping shall be installed without springing or forcing, true to line and grade, and
square with the filter system
G.
Mount filter control console in the location indicated on the Contract Documents
H.
Pipe drain from filter drain locations with Schedule 40 pipe to floor drain. Anchor drain pipe to unistrut
supports and concrete floor as required
I.
Install backwash site glass in accordance with the Manufacturers recommendation. Sight glass shall be
installed in line so backwash flow from each vessel shall flow directly through the site glass.
J.
3.3
Pipe backwash effluent line to backwash holding tank or sump or to the sanitary sewer line connection
BACKWASH HOLDING TANK OR SUMP
A.
Provide a backwash holding tank or sump as indicated on the Contract Documents
B.
Tank or sump shall be sized to accommodate one (1) filter at a backwash rate of 25 gpm (95 lpm) per
square foot (929 sq cm) of filter area for a minimum duration of five (5) minutes
C.
Backwash effluent lines from the filters shall discharge a minimum of 6 inches (150mm) above the top of
the tank or sump and be located in a manner to prevent backwash water from splashing out
D.
Backwash tank or sump shall have a drain in the bottom connected to the sanitary sewer line. The line
shall be sized to meet the flow requirements provided by the Civil Engineer
END OF SECTION

04 February 2016
13 1503/ 10

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.
1.2

1.
Chemical Test Kits
2.
Erosion Feed System
3.
Chlorinator Feed System
4.
Chemical Metering Pump
5.
Liquid Chlorine Feed System
6.
Acid Feed System
7.
Chemical Control Unit
Related Sections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.

A.
B.
Product Data: Submit manufacturers literature including printed recommendations, dimensions and sizes,
and accessories for each system type.
1.
Indicate on the submittal which materials, models, data, and options are being selected
C.
Manufacturers Certification: Submit documentation from the manufacturer certifying that the chemical
systems conform with National Sanitation Foundation (NSF) Standard 50 guidelines
D.
Operation and Maintenance Data: Provide manufacturers installation instructions, specifications, start-up
procedures, assembly drawings, troubleshooting checklists, scheduled maintenance recommendations,
replacement part lists and repair data
E.
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this Section with a minimum
five (5) years of documented experience
B.
Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the Work of this Section with a minimum of five
(5) years of documented experience

04 February 2016
13 1504/ 1

13 1504WATER FEATURE CHEMICAL FEED SYSTEMS
C.
Chemical Control System: Provide with on-site start-up, on-site operator training, and on-site warranty
service, all of which shall be performed by a representative trained and authorized by the Manufacturer
1.4

A.
B.
Accept chemical feed equipment and accessories on-site in original factory packaging. Immediately upon
receipt of shipment, inspect, and check for damage
C.
Protect chemical feed equipment and accessories from physical damage including the effects of weather,
water, and construction debris
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
CHEMICAL TEST KITS

A.
1.
Liquid Reagent Test Kits

a.
2.
Portable Digital Test Meters

a.
B.
Myron L Company: PoolPro PS6FC
Liquid Reagent Test Kit:

1.
2.
C.
Taylor: Professional Complete Chlorine Testing Lab
Furnish one (1) test kit containing liquid reagents enough for at least five (5) complete tests for each of
the following parameters:
a.
Bromine (1-10 ppm) or Chlorine (1-10 ppm). Both free and total measuring capabilities
b.
pH, Acid and Base demand (6.8 8.4)
c.
Total Alkalinity
d.
Calcium Hardness
e.
Cyanuric Acid
Kit shall be provided in a portable molded plastic carrying case containing all reagents, comparators,
waterproof instructions, and chemistry guide
Portable Digital Test Meter

1.
Furnish one (1) accurate portable digital test meter capable of analyzing the following six (6)
parameters with auto ranging and auto temperature compensation:
a.
pH
b.
Total Dissolved Solids (TDH)
c.
ORP in millivolts (mV)
d.
Temperature in F and C
e.
Mineral / Salt
f.
Conductivity
2.
Meter shall be direct reading, not colormetric or requiring reagents
3.
Meter shall be waterproof to 3 feet (1m) and buoyant
4.
Meter shall have a four (4) digit LCD display for full 9999 readings
5.
Meter shall log up to 100 readings with a date and time stamp and be capable of downloading test

04 February 2016
13 1504/ 2

data, with optional docking port, to a computer for records and reporting
2.2
6.
Meter shall be factory calibrated to NIST Standards with certification available upon request
7.
Furnish standard solution, minimum of 2 oz (59ml), for calibration of pH and conductivity, and for ORP
and pH sensor storage
EROSION FEED SYSTEM

A.
1.
Rainbow Chlorinator
2.
Vantage
3.
Approved Equal
B.
Erosion Feed System shall be modular design and shall be supplied as one integrated package from a
single source.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
2.3
Erosion Feed System shall consist of the following:

1.
Erosion Feeder / Chemical Storage Tank
2.
Solenoid Valve and Bypass Assembly
3.
Flow meter for each erosion feeder
4.
Inlet isolation valve for each erosion feeder
Erosion Feeder / Chemical Storage Tank

1.
Number and size of feeder(s) as indicated on the Contract Documents and equipment schedules
2.
Constructed of fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) or molded plastic
3.
Tank Access: Tri-pin collar lid assembly
4.
Threaded inlet and outlet
Solenoid Valve and Bypass Assembly

1.
Size as indicated on the Contract Documents
2.
Solid brass solenoid valve utilizing 120 VAC single phase power
3.
Two (2) manual isolation ball valves, one (1) on each side of the solenoid valve
4.
One (1) manual ball valve on bypass line
5.
Bypass line shall be constructed of Schedule 80 PVC pipe
Flow Meter:
1.
Blue-White flow meter, F-300 or similar
2.
Size flow meter to pipe
3.
Flow Rate flow range from 0 to 30 gpm (0 to 113 lpm)
4.
Install flow meter in accordance with the Manufacturers recommendations
Both the inlet valve and calibrated outlet valve shall be as indicated on the Contract Documents
CHLORINATOR FEED SYSTEM
A.
Acceptable Manufacturers:
1.
PPG Industries Accu-Tab System
2.
Vantage
3.
Approved Equal

04 February 2016
13 1504/ 3

B.
The system shall be designed to feed low concentrations of calcium hypochlorite in solution intermittently
or continuously as required for the application.
C.
The system shall be a single pre-assembled, package unit with a welded aluminum frame consisting of the
following:
D.
E.
F.
G.
1.
Chlorinator
2.
Electrical Box
3.
Centrifugal Pump
4.
Balance Tank
System Features:
1.
A maximum chlorine solution level of 0.05% (500 ppm) shall be maintained to prevent calcification in
system components. System producing chlorine concentrations higher than 0.05% (500 ppm) shall not
be acceptable
2.
Delivery shall be by erosion feed technology to control accurate and consistent concentration limits in
the chlorine treatment solution. Soaking type, spray and/or vortex technology system shall not be
acceptable
3.
The Chlorinator shall automatically and continuously feed a limited quantity of chlorine in solution as
needed; when the system is not running, no more chlorine than that amount which can be fed in one
(1) minute or less shall be left in the tank to prevent dilution. Batch systems preparing excess
quantities of solution for delivery over an extended period shall not be acceptable
4.
A Centrifugal Pump wired to the system Electrical Box shall be feed freshly mixed chlorine treatment
solution only as required for maximum efficiency. Batch systems requiring the use of a metering pump
or pumps to feed prepared standing solution shall not be acceptable
5.
All piping in the Chlorinator unit shall be Schedule 40 PVC. Systems with flexible tubing shall not be
acceptable
Chlorinator Feed System consists of the following:

1.
Solution Tank
2.
Primary Solution Tank Level Control
3.
Secondary High Level Solution Tank Control
4.
Solution Delivery Pump
5.
Accessories
Solution Tank
1.
Constructed of one piece heavy duty polyethylene or nalgene with UV stabilizer
2.
Translucent with molded calibrations on the tank
3.
Flat bottom design
4.
Tight sealing, rigid high-strength lids
5.
Capacity: as indicated on the Contract Documents and equipment schedules
Primary Solution Tank Level Control

1.
H.
Made of Schedule 80 PVC and 316L stainless steel, this float valve meters the tablet bypass flow. The
bypass stream balances the variations in the water-dissolving stream. The float opens or closes to
maintain the pump rate it is manually throttled
Secondary High Level Solution Tank Control

1.
Prevents the solution tank from overflowing.
2.
High Level: when activated, a switch opens the circuit to the solenoid valve, causing the valve to close

04 February 2016
13 1504/ 4

I.
Accessories:
1.
Inlet Water Supply Connection with Filter as shown on the Contract Documents
2.
Inlet Solenoid Valve Opens and closes on command when the system receives a signal, 110 VAC
required
3.
Flow Meter a rotometer (flow-through) flow meter, measuring the flow of the water-dissolving stream
to the Chlorinator
4.
Flow Control Valve PVC gate valve mounted in line with the flow meter allows operator to adjust flow
of water-dissolving stream
5.
Solution Injection Pump Air Bleed used to prime the pump at start-up, or at any time, if necessary
6.
Primary Backflow Prevention PVC spring-assisted Wye-check valve prevents reverse flow of water
into the system
7.
Discharge Control Valve (manual) used to balance system output water flow with system input water
flow
8.
Outlet Connection as shown on the Contract Documents
9.
NEMA 4X Electrical Enclosure for pump and chemical controls
10. Aluminum Frame, Type 6061-T

2.4
CHEMICAL METERING PUMPS

A.
Diaphragm Type Pump

1.
2.
a.
LMI Milton Roy
b.
PULSAtron
c.
Approved Equal
Housing of chemically resistant glass fiber reinforced thermoplastics

a.
Fittings PVDF
b.
Seal Rings Teflon, Viton (dependant on selected model)
c.
Suction Tubing Polyethylene
d.
Diaphragms and Seals Teflon
3.
Materials that shall NOT be used: PVC, Acrylic, Stainless Steel, Ceramic, Vinyl, and Hypalon
4.
All interior pump components, seats, valves, etc to be compatible with the solution it is pumping
5.
Pump drive shall be totally enclosed with no moving parts
6.
Electronics shall be housed in a chemical resistant enclosure
7.
Check Valve: Teflon
8.
Provide a Filter, Regulator, and Lubricator for each pump
9.
Provide a foot valve with integral one piece strainer and enough polyethylene tubing with factory
installed compression connections to run from the chemical storage tank to the pump, for each pump
10. Provide a wall mounting bracket composed of polypropylene and associated hardware for each pump
11. Metering pump shall incorporate a variable feed capability to adjust feed rates
B.
Peristaltic Type Pumps

1.
a.
Stenner

04 February 2016
13 1504/ 5

2.
NSF Standard 50 listing
3.
Housing of polycarbonate plastic rated for indoor or outdoor use
4.
Peristaltic Tube: Material appropriate to be in contact with liquid being pumped
5.
Suction and Discharge Tubing: Material of construction appropriate to be in contact with chemicals
being pumped
6.
Electronics shall be housed in a chemical resistant enclosure
7.
Suction Weight: Ceramic
8.
Provide a foot valve with integral one piece strainer and enough polyethylene tubing with factory
installed compression connections to run from the chemical storage tank to the pump, for each pump
9.
Provide a wall mounting bracket composed of polypropylene and associated hardware for each pump
10. Metering pump shall incorporate a variable feed capability to adjust feed rates
2.5
LIQUID CHLORINE FEED SYSTEM
A.
Chlorine Feed System shall dose stored Liquid Sodium Hypochlorite solution of a concentration of 10% by
the means of a Chemical Metering Pump, which is activated upon a signal from the Chemical Control Unit
B.
C.
D.
2.6
Chlorine Feed System consists of the following:

1.
2.
Chlorine Storage Tank
3.
Containment Tank
Chlorine Storage Tank

1.
2.
3.
Flat bottom design
4.
5.
6.
Tank shall be sufficiently anchored to the floor to resist vertical loads (seismic or wind)
Containment Tank
1.
2.
3.
Flat bottom design
4.
Overall height shall be at least 2 inches (50mm) lower than the acid storage tank height
5.
Inside diameter shall be at least 4 inches (100mm) larger than the acid storage tank outside diameter
6.
Capacity shall be at least 10% larger than the acid storage tank
7.
Containment tanks may not be necessary if double-walled storage tanks are approved by local codes
and regulations. Verify approval with the Owners Representative and Engineer
ACID FEED SYSTEM
A.
Acid Feed System shall dose stored muriatic acid solution with a concentration of 32% by the means of a
Chemical Metering Pump, which is activated upon a signal from the Chemical Control Unit
B.
Acid Feed System consists of the following:

1.

04 February 2016
13 1504/ 6

C.
D.
2.7
2.
Acid Storage Tank
3.
Containment Tank
Acid Storage Tank

1.
2.
3.
Flat bottom design
4.
5.
6.
Tank shall be sufficiently anchored to the floor to resist vertical loads (seismic or wind)
Containment Tank
1.
2.
3.
Flat bottom design
4.
Overall height shall be at least 2 inches (50mm) lower than the acid storage tank height
5.
Inside diameter shall be at least 4 inches (100mm) larger than the acid storage tank outside diameter
6.
Capacity shall be at least 10% larger than the acid storage tank
7.
Containment tanks may not be necessary if double-walled storage tanks are approved by local codes
and regulations. Verify approval with the Owners Representative and Engineer
CHEMICAL CONTROL UNIT

A.
1.
Chemtrol by Santa Barbara Control Systems
2.
Strantrol by Siemens Water Technology
3.
CAT Controllers, Incorporated
B.
Chemical Control Unit shall be modular design and shall be supplied as one integrated package from a
single source. Control Unit consists of the following:
C.
1.
Chemical Control Unit model as indicated on the Contract Documents equipment schedules
2.
Flow Cell and Sensor Assembly with Industrial Grade Probes
3.
Automatic Probe Rinse

1.
Integrated microprocessor-based electronic water treatment control system to continuously monitor

water chemistry and for automatic control of the chemical feed systems
2.
Housing shall be a NEMA Type 3 lockable fiberglass cabinet with a visible LCD graphic display and
accessible touch pad for direct access to all menus, sub-menus, and for entering numerical data
3.
The following parameters shall be continuously monitored and displayed in the LCD graphic display:
a.
Display Range and Accuracy

1).
pH Level: 1.0 to 9.95 with a resolution of 0.01 units
2).
ORP Level: 0 to 1000 mV with a resolution of 1 mV
3).
Sanitizer Residual: 0 to 20 ppm with a resolution of 0.1 ppm
4).
Total Dissolved Solids (TDS): 1 to 1000 ppm with a resolution of 1 ppm

04 February 2016
13 1504/ 7

5).
Temperature: 32 to 120 F (0 to 50 C) with a resolution of 0.01 F
4.
Modes of operation shall include: OFF, Manual, Automatic, and Timer Cycle
5.
In Manual Mode the Controller shall:
6.
a.
Allow the Operator access to all outputs to chemical feeders, heaters, cleaners, and controller
accessories
b.
Allow operator access to all alarms and controls
In Automatic and Timer Cycle Mode the Controller shall:

a.
Automatically activate the appropriate chemical feeders in order to maintain pH, ORP, and
sanitizer set point values within the following tolerances:
1).
pH within +/- 0.1 pH unit
2).
ORP within +/- 10 mV
3).
Sanitizer Residual within +/- 0.1 ppm
4).
Heater within +/- 2.0 F
b.
Be able to operate in either standard on / off feed control or proportional feed control with
adjustable dead band and progressive control zones
c.
Monitor all alarm conditions
d.
Automatically clean and rinse probes on an adjustable seven (7) day program
e.
Capable of being programmed for four (4) separate timed events, each having independent daily
on and off settings
7.
Visible indicator lights shall activate when pH and ORP and/or Sanitizer chemicals are being fed and
the heater is operating
8.
All set point and calibration levels shall be operator adjustable with the numeric keypad on the unit
9.
Controller alarms shall include:

a.
Visible high and low level alarms for pH, ORP and/or Sanitizer, and temperature with optional feed
lockouts and alarm buzzer options
b.
Continuous monitoring for failure of pH and ORP and/or Sanitizer probes using dynamic probe
testing and alert if failure occurs before water chemistry gets out of range
c.
A low flow warning message to alert the Operator when a low or no flow condition exists. Should a
low or no flow condition exist, the system shall disable all chemical feed functions
10. Controller shall have a broad memory capable of logging up to 68 days with frequency of logged input
points shall be adjustable from every minute for every four (4) hours and shall record data on the
following:
a.
pH and ORP and/or Sanitizer readings
b.
Any alarm conditions
c.
Any set point adjustments and feed event history
11. Controller shall include a memory storage battery with a minimum reserve power for six (6) months
D.
Flow Cell and Sensor

1.
Control System shall include a remote mounted flow cell and sensor assembly enclosed in a noncorrosive, lockable fiberglass enclosure with a window
2.
Incorporate the following features:

a.
An integral self-air purging sensing chamber with see-through inspection cover and two sensing
electrodes

04 February 2016
13 1504/ 8

E.
b.
A paddle wheel-style flow switch with see-through cover and on stream light
c.
Flow switch shall indicate flow through sample stream and signal controller to initiate an alarm
condition and to shut off feed circuits in event flow should stop
d.
Flow switch shall operate on low voltage and be made of non-corrosive material
e.
Valves for isolating all assembly components and a water sample test valve shall be provided and
be constructed entirely of non-corrosive materials
f.
ORP sensing electrode shall incorporate at least one (1) square centimeter of 99.999% pure
platinum
g.
Both electrodes shall contain not less than 50 milliliters of electrolyte gel to lengthen electrode life
h.
Gel used in each electrode shall be inorganic so as to prevent degradation by chlorine or bromine
i.
Each electrode shall use a porous Teflon liquid junction to minimize the chance of liquid junction
clogging and prolong electrode life
j.
Electrodes utilizing organic gels or wood or ceramic liquid conjunctions are considered equal to
these specifications
Automatic Probe Rinse

1.
An automatic probe rinse system to clean sensing probes shall be provided
2.
System shall consist of one (1) six gallon (22 liter) vapor-proof tank, one (1) feed pump capable of
pumping up to 10 gallons per day (757 liters per day) at 75 psi (517 kPa) and a four (4) function antisiphon/pressure relief valve
3.
Feed pump shall be controlled by a digital programmable electronic timer in the controller
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
GENERAL
A.
Supply all labor, equipment, and materials to construct, test and put into operation complete system lines,
valves, tanks, and injectors in accordance with the Contract Documents and as directed by the Engineer of Record
B.
Install all piping without bending, springing or forcing, true to line and grade, in a neat and workman like
manner and properly supported
C.
Install tubing in adequate lengths so equipment can be moved or adjusted in positions and locations for
maintenance purposes without disconnecting tubing
D.
Inspect all equipment and remove any dirt or foreign material before attaching inlet, outlet piping or tubing
E.
Injectors shall tap into filtered water return lines and shall incorporate shutoff valves to allow disconnection
of feed lines while filters are operating
F.
Install the entire systems to meet applicable state and local codes, including but not limited to NSF
guidelines
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Erosion Feed System

1.
Locate Erosion Feeders in locations indicated on the Contract Documents, on smooth and level
concrete housekeeping pads
2.
Install valves, meter injectors, and piping as indicated on the Contract Documents. Located all
equipment, valves, meters, and injectors so they are easily accessible and meters can be easily read
3.
Install solenoid and bypass assembly as indicated on the Contract Documents. Connect control line
from Chemical Control Unit to solenoid valve to allow chemical feed upon signal from chemical
controller

04 February 2016
13 1504/ 9

B.
C.
Chlorinator Feed System

1.
Locate Chlorinator System in locations indicated on the Contract Documents, on smooth and level
2.
Chlorinator System shall be provided as a skid mount type package. The Contractor shall provide
plumbing and electrical connections
3.
The Chlorinator influent line shall tee off the main line after the filter and before the heater. The
Chlorinator effluent line shall tee back in to the main line after the heater.
Liquid Chemical Feed Systems

1.
Locate Liquid Chemical Feed (Liquid Chlorine and/or Acid) Systems in locations indicated on the
Contract Documents.
2.
Provide a 4 inch (100mm) wide by 6 inch (150mm) tall containment curb surrounding the chemical
storage tanks. Curb shall provide spill containment. Do not allow liquid chlorine and acid storage tanks
to be placed within the same containment curbed area
3.
Mount chemical metering pump in the locations shown on the Contract Documents, approximately 48
inches (1.2m) above the finished floor elevation and to the side of each tank. Do not mount the pump
directly above the chemical tanks
4.
Upon delivery of the chemical storage tanks, inspect for defects or shipping damage. Any
discrepancies, or product problems, should be noted on both the drivers bill of landing and the
Contractors packing list
5.
When unloading tank(s) from the delivery truck, avoid contact with sharp objects
6.
Do not allow tank(s) to be rolled over on the fittings. Large bulk storage tank(s), whenever possible,
should be removed from the delivery truck bed by use of a crane or other suitable lifting device
7.
Keep unloading area free of rocks, sharp objects, and other materials that could damage the tank
8.
If tank(s) are unload on their side, carefully brace to prevent rolling
9.
Test by filling the tank(s) with water prior to use, to prevent chemical loss through unsecured fittings,
shipping damage, or manufacturing defects. Tanks should be tested for a minimum of five (5) hours
10. Do not mount heavy equipment on tank sides

11. Do not allow weight on tank fittings. Fully support pipes and valves connected to tanks
12. Supply enough liquid chemicals to fill the tank(s) to a level within 3 inches (75mm) from the top of
tank(s)
D.
E.
CO2 Feed System

1.
Locate bulk storage tanks in locations indicated on the Contract Documents on smooth and level
2.
Install system in accordance with manufacturers recommendations
3.
Remote fill system shall be installed in accessible area for refilling
4.
Install tubing in inch (15mm) PVC sleeves properly supported and anchored
5.
All equipment shall be installed in accessible locations
6.
Supply enough Liquid CO2 to fill all of the tanks

1.
Mount the Chemical Control Unit on the wall in the general location as indicated on the Contract
Documents and where the controller, probes, and automatic rinse unit may be easily accessible
2.
Install isolation valves on the influent and effluent sides of the probe housing.
3.
Factory Representative shall be on site to calibrate and perform initial start-up of the chemical
controller. Calibration should be performed testing water at the control unit using the sampling valve

04 February 2016
13 1504/ 10

and comparing this sample with several samples taken from the pool, one from the edge of the pool
and one from the center of the pool a minimum of 18 inches (450mm) below water level. No samples
should be taken from the surface of the pool
4.
Supply enough cleaning solution to fill probe rinse tank
5.
Provide a phone line or wireless connection near the chemical controller.
6.
If a printer has been provided, install the printer on a wall shelf in a location where it will be protected
from moisture and water spray and is easily accessible
END OF SECTION

04 February 2016
13 1504/ 11

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.

1.
Ozone Generation Systems including Safety Interlocks and Controls
2.
Air Preparation and Oxygen Concentration Systems
3.
Ozone Injections and Contacting Systems
4.
Ozone Degassing and Destruct Systems
5.
Ambient Ozone Monitoring and Alarms
Related Sections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10. SECTION 13 1602 WATER FEATURE CONTROLS

11. SECTION 13 1607 WATER FEATURE PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLERS
1.2

A.
B.
for Ozone Generator, Air Preparation System, Injection and Contacting Components, Degas Valves, Destruct
Units, Ambient Monitor, and accessories.
1.
C.
Manufacturers Certification: Submit documentation from the Manufacturer certifying that the Ozone
System, including all components, conform with the National Sanitation Foundation (NSF) Standard 50 guidelines
D.
Operation and Maintenance Data: Provide the Manufacturers installation instructions, specifications, startup procedures, assembly drawings, troubleshooting checklists, schedule maintenance recommendations, and
E.
1.3

A.
B.
Accept Ozone Generator, Air Preparation System, Injection and Contacting System, Degas and Destruct
Units, and Monitors and accessories on site in original factory packaging. Immediately upon receipt of shipment,
inspect and check for damage

04 February 2016
13 1505/ 1

13 1505WATER FEATURE OZONE GENERATION AND
INJECTION
C.
Protect Ozone Generator, Air Preparation System, Injection and Contacting System, Degas and Destruct
Units, and Monitors and accessories from physical damage including effects of weather, water, and construction
debris
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
OVERALL OZONE SYSTEM

A.
Manufacturers
1.
B.
C.
D.
DEL Industries
An Ozone System shall consist of a modular package incorporating the following components:
1.
Ozone Generator
2.
Air Preparation Components

a.
Oxygen Concentrator
b.
Air Compressor
3.
Injector and Bypass Assembly
4.
Mixing/Reaction/Degassing Tank
5.
Degas Valve
6.
Off-gas Destruct Unit
7.
Ambient Ozone Monitor
8.
Ambient Ozone Alarm Strobe Light
Materials:
1.
Valves and Fittings for the purpose of ozone gas conveyance shall be Type 316L Stainless Steel
2.
Tubing and pipe for ozone gas conveyance shall be Type 316L Stainless Steel or Teflon
3.
Seals, gaskets, O Rings, etc for ozone gas conveyance to be Teflon or Aflas
4.
All exposed hardware and fasteners to be 316L Stainless Steel
The System shall provide for complete ozone isolation during shutdown
E.
The Ozone Generator and components shall be NSF Standard 50 listed for safety and performance
standards
2.2
OZONE GENERATOR
A.
The Ozone Generator shall be of the corona discharge type, producing ozone at high concentrations
(greater than 5.0% by weight) to provide efficiency of operation and enhance mass transfer to the process water.
No Ultraviolet (UV) ozone generation systems will be allowed
B.
Ozone shall be generated and maintained under vacuum until the point of injection into the process water
and is to be kept under vacuum at all times.
1.
Pressurized ozone systems will not be allowed
2.
Partial loss of vacuum shall be compensated for by automatic feed gas flow reduction
3.
Critical vacuum loss shall cause a system fault and initiate system shutdown
C.
Generator module shall be all 316L Stainless Steel, glass, and ceramic construction. No Generators
utilizing combustible materials or ozone affected materials shall be allowed
D.
Each Ozone Generator module shall be water cooled, utilizing a vertical tube in shell cooling design

04 February 2016
13 1505/ 2

INJECTION
E.
Electrodes shall be gas filled glass tubes providing individualized fusing for power supply protection
F.
Ozone Generator shall permit variable production within a range of 0 to 100% of rated output
G.
Power requirements of the ozone generation (not including oxygen system) shall not exceed 20.0 Watts
per gram of ozone produced per hour
H.
Ozone Generator shall be controlled by an internal Programmable Logic Controller (PLC), to automatically
control start-up and shutdown sequencing, fault protections, ORP control, oxygen concentrator feed gas operation,
and remote start/stop
I.
The generator shall be capable of continuous operation for one (1) year with no major cleaning or
disassembly
2.3
CONTROLS AND SAFETY INTERLOCKS
A.
All control circuitry shall be powered by a Class B low voltage power supply or GFCI protected and
powered through an isolating step-down transformer
B.
Each Ozone Generator shall be furnished as a package which shall include the following safety controls
fully interlocked through the PLC:
1.
Door safety switch(s)
2.
External emergency shutoff button
3.
Loss of Vacuum
4.
Low Feed Gas Pressure
5.
Low Oxygen Concentration
6.
Water Backflow Detection
7.
Thermal protection on high voltage transformer and generator module
8.
Standby Mode control function
9.
Phase Loss Detection/Protection
C.
Each Ozone Generator shall be further furnished with the following external/remote control and monitoring
circuitry interfaced through the PLC:
D.
1.
Ambient Ozone Monitor interlocked to the Ozone Generator shutdown and an Alarm
2.
System ON/OFF
3.
Emergency Stop
4.
System Fault Alarm Conditions
5.
Normal System Operation indications
The PLC shall use low voltage DC circuitry for all sensor inputs
E.
The PLC shall store run time, settings and historic information on system events in non-volatile memory for
retrieval by service personnel for diagnostic and troubleshooting purposes
F.
The PLC shall display text messages or diagnostic indicators controlled by the PLC indicating the cause of
any fault event such as: Water Backflow, Door Open, Overheating, Low Feed Gas Pressure, Loss of Vacuum, etc
G.
Each Ozone Generator shall be provided with circuitry to permit deactivation from either the local control
panel or from a remote location
H.
Each Ozone Generator shall provide input circuitry for connection of a remote monitoring/alarm equipment
and output circuitry to indicate normal operation and abnormal system fault conditions to an external monitoring
system
I.
Water backflow protection shall be provided within the Ozone Generator enclosure. The device shall be
interlocked with the Ozone Generators PLC initiating system fault shutdown and isolating the Generator to prevent
damage by water ingress to the generator module
04 February 2016
13 1505/ 3

INJECTION
2.4
AIR PREPARATION COMPONENTS

A.
B.
Oxygen Concentrator
1.
Oxygen Concentrator(s) shall be incorporated to automatically supply low pressure, 0-15 psig (0-103
kPa), oxygen rich feed gas to the Ozone Generator(s) at the required flow rate
2.
Oxygen Concentrators shall be capable of supplying oxygen, at the rated flow rate (or higher), to the
Ozone Generator(s) at a minimum of 85% purity and less than -60 C dew point
3.
Approved Manufacturer for external Oxygen Concentrators: AirSep Corporation
Air Compressor
1.
Low output systems shall incorporate small oil-less compressor(s) housed within the Ozone Generator
enclosure to supply each modular Oxygen Concentrator(s) housed within the same enclosure
2.
The Air Compressor packages for larger systems requiring external Air Preparation components shall
include the following:
3.
2.5
a.
Air Compressor, rotary screw type, sized for 130% or more of the required feed of the Oxygen
Concentrator
b.
Post Chiller
c.
Refrigerated Air Dryer
d.
Air Receiver Tank with over-pressure protection and an automatic condensate drain valve
e.
Filtration to remove oil, oil vapor, and any particulates larger than 0.1 micron
f.
Condensate management system for separation and disposal of compressor oil carryover
Approved Manufacturer for external Air Compressors: Kaesar Compressors, or approved equal
INJECTION SYSTEM AND BYPASS
A.
Introduction of ozone to the process water shall be via side-stream method incorporating venturi driven
suction
B.
Approved Manufacturer: Mazzei Injector Corporation
C.
Venturi Injector shall be manufactured of Kynar for resistance to oxidation by ozone
D.
Venturi Injector(s) shall be sized to provide a total suction rate 1.3 to 1.5 times the total rate of ozone gas
flow from the Ozone Generator(s) in order to develop the necessary negative pressure within the Generator and
ozone conveyance lines
E.
Venturi Injector(s) shall further be sized with a liquid to gas ratio (VL/VG) of 0.05 or less and an outlet
pressure of at least 15 psi (103 kPa) to assure efficient mass transfer
F.
Each Venturi Injector shall be furnished with stainless steel fittings to adapt to ozone conveyance tubing
and will include a stainless steel ball valve and check valve with appropriate seal materials as described in 2.1.C
2.6
MIXING/CONTACT/DEGASSING TANK
A.
The Contact Vessel shall be constructed of fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) with ozone resistant epoxy
based vinyl ester resin interior coat
B.
The Vessel must be NSF 50 listed
C.
The Vessel must be rated for 50 psi (344 kPa) minimum working pressure
D.
The Vessel shall be vertically mounted
E.
Internal baffles shall be incorporated to eliminate short circuit flow through the Vessel
F.
Plumbing Connections: Inlet and Outlet fittings shall be sized as shown on the Contract Documents or to
limit flow velocity to less than 6 feet per second (1.83 m/s)

04 February 2016
13 1505/ 4

INJECTION
G.
A Degas fitting shall be incorporated in the top of the Vessel for connection to the Degas Valve
H.
Vessel drain fitting shall be 1-1/2 to 2 inches (40 to 50mm) minimum and be fitted with a ball valve
accessible for maintenance
I.
2.7
All fastening hardware on flanges, man ways, and viewing port shall be 316L Stainless Steel
OZONE DEGAS VALVE
A.
A Degas Valve shall be incorporated and fitted to the top of the Contact Tank for the purpose of
automatically venting of undissolved, ozone-containing gases from the tank and directing them to the Ozone
Destruct Unit
B.
The Degas Valve body shall be constructed of PVC and ozone resistant materials used for valve seat,
float, and mechanism
C.
2.8
All fastening hardware shall be 316L Stainless Steel

CATALYTIC OZONE DESTRUCT UNIT
A.
The Ozone Destruct Unit shall incorporate a preheated dry bed catalyst to remove greater than 99.5% of
the ozone content from the off-gas
B.
Low power heater shall be incorporated to preheat saturated off-gas to above the dewpoint to prevent
condensation, protecting the metal oxide catalyst bed from moisture contamination
C.
The Destruct Unit shall be constructed of 304 or 316 stainless steel with inlet fitting appropriate for
connection to the Degas Valve
D.
The Destruct Unit shall be sized to handle the full ozone production capacity of the system
E.
The Destruct Unit shall incorporate minor demisting capability and automatic drain valve for condensate
build-up
F.
2.9
All fastening hardware shall be 316L Stainless Steel

AMBIENT OZONE MONITOR
A.
Shall measure the level of ozone present in the room housing the ozone equipment, and shall shutdown
the Ozone Generator when the ozone level exceeds a warning level of 0.1 ppm and a high alarm of 0.3 ppm
B.
The Monitor shall have a range of 0-10 ppm by volume with an accuracy within 3% of actual
C.
The Monitor shall employ an electrochemical gas diffusion sensor requiring no expendable reagents
2.10
AMBIENT OZONE ALARM INDICATOR STROBE LIGHT
A.
Manufacturer: Edwards, N. 49R-N5 or approved equal
B.
Strobe Color: Red
C.
Nominal VA Rating: 25 Watts
D.
Voltage: 120 VAC, 0.22 Amps
E.
Mounting: Standard 4 inch (100mm) octagon (indoor only) electrical box
F.
Alarm strobe shall illuminate on activation of Ambient Ozone Alarm and shall remain on until reset at the
Ambient Ozone Monitor
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine surfaces, substrates, and conditions for compliance with requirements of other sections that
relate to the Work specified. Determine if surfaces, substrates, and conditions affecting the performance of the
04 February 2016
13 1505/ 5

INJECTION
Work of this section are satisfactory. Do not proceed with the Work of this section until unsatisfactory conditions
have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer. Starting installation constitutes acceptance of
surfaces, substrates, and conditions
B.
Each system shall be capable of fitting into the space shown on the Contract Documents
C.
The Manufacturer shall supply a standard installation kit, which includes any necessary accessories and
fittings for installation
D.
Provide complete installation instructions, and operations and maintenance manual with troubleshooting
guide for each system
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
The entire system shall be designed and installed to meet all applicable State and local codes
B.
Nationally recognized standards, as applicable, shall be adhered to
C.
Equipment enclosure shall be firmly attached to the flooring by lagging it into the concrete slab or
housekeeping pad through holes provided according to instructions provided by the Manufacturer
D.
Install the Ozone Generator according to instructions provided by the Manufacturer
E.
All equipment, piping, meters, and appurtenances shall be to the Manufacturers specification
F.
Leave sufficient space between equipment and pipes to allow for maintenance, replacement, and
inspection
G.
Valves, pipe labels, meters, and displays must be visible and have sufficient space to access, if applicable
H.
Install ORP probe and controller as specified by the Manufacturer
I.
The Ozone Destruct Unit shall be installed at an elevation that is higher than the Degas Valve to prevent
the possible flow of water into the Ozone Destruct Unit
J.
3.3
All Installer supplied fasteners and hardware shall be 316L Stainless Steel
FIELD OPERATION AND START-UP
A.
In the event of remote or local start, the Ozone Generator shall first be purged with dry oxygen from the
feed gas system, then ramp up voltage to determined levels
B.
In the event of remote or local stop including reaching high ORP the Generator will initiate shutdown and
purge with dry oxygen from the feed gas system before complete shutdown and isolation.
C.
Upon any system fault the Generator shall automatically and immediately cease ozone production and
purge with dry oxygen from the feed gas system before complete shutdown and isolation. Manual
acknowledgement and re-start shall be required
D.
A factory trained representative shall be on site for start-up of the system and training of operation
personnel
END OF SECTION

04 February 2016
13 1505/ 6

INJECTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.

1.
B.
C.
1.2
Electric Water Heaters
Related Sections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
References:
1.
ASME SECTION 8D BOILER AND PRESSURE VESSELS
2.
NFPA 70 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE (NEC)
3.
UL 1453 ELECTRIC BOOSTER AND COMMERICAL STORAGE TANK WATER HEATERS

A.
B.
for Pool and Spa Heaters and accessories.
1.
C.
Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating heater dimensions, clearances, anchors, attachments,
lifting points, tappings, drains, and venting
D.
Manufacturers Certification: Submit documentation from the Manufacturer certifying that the Pool and Spa
Heaters conform with the National Sanitation Foundation (NSF) Standard 50 guidelines
E.
F.
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer: a Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this Section with a minimum

04 February 2016
13 1507/ 1

13 1507WATER FEATURE HEATERS
B.
Installer Qualifications: a Company specializing in performing the Work of this Section with a minimum of
C.
Ensure products and installation of specified products are in conformance with recommendations and
requirements of the following organizations:
1.
National Sanitation Foundation (NSF)
2.
American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME)
3.
National Board of Boiler and Pressure Vessel Inspectors (NBBPVI)
4.
D.
Pool and Spa Heaters: Provide with on-site start-up operator training, and on-site warranty service, all of
which shall be performed by a representative trained and authorized by the Manufacturer
1.4

A.
B.
Accept Heaters and accessories on site in original factory packaging. Immediately upon receipt of
shipment, inspect and check for damage
C.
Protect Heater and accessories from physical damage including effects of weather, water, and
construction debris. Provide temporary inlet and outlet caps; maintain caps in place until installation
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.2
1.
rated at 125 psi (862 kPa)
2.
Rated for low NOx output
ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS

A.
1.
B.
Coates Heater Company
Shall include the following standard features:

1.
Close Differential Thermostat
2.
Manual Reset High Limit
3.
Flow Switch with element and flow switch ON lights
4.
Element sequencing of single phase heaters
5.
Internal protective fusing (units over 48 amps)
6.
316L Stainless Steel tank
7.
UL Listed for indoor and outdoor installation
8.
Incoloy 825 Heating Elements
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
GENERAL
A.
Supply all labor, equipment, and materials to construct, test, and put into operation complete heating
system with lines, valves, heaters, and gauges in accordance with the Contract Documents and as directed by the
Engineer of Record

04 February 2016
13 1507/ 2

B.
Install all piping without bending, springing or forcing, true to line and grade, in a neat workman like
C.
Install tubing in adequate lengths so equipment can be moved or adjusted in positions and locations for
maintenance purposes without disconnecting tubing
D.
E.
Install the entire Heating system to meet applicable state and local codes, including, but not limited to
F.
3.2
Heaters shall be capable of fitting in to the space shown on the Contract Documents
INSTALLATION
A.
Install Heaters in accordance with the Manufacturers recommendations
B.
Place and level the Heater in location shown on the Contract Documents on concrete equipment pads and
where there is adequate access for service and inspection on all sides
C.
Install outlet venting piping in accordance with ANSI Z223.1 and local building codes. Support venting pipe
so the weight of the piping does not rest on the Heater
D.
Install venting to allow easy removal of the draft hood and Heater top for normal service and inspection
E.
Influent and Effluent supply lines connecting the Heater to the main circulation line shall be copper pipe for
a minimum distance of 8 feet (2.43m) then change to PVC pipe. CPVC may be used upon approval by the
Engineer
F.
Install a check valve on the Heater inlet between the filter system and the Heater
G.
Pipe pressure relief valve discharge to a floor drain

END OF SECTION

04 February 2016
13 1507/ 3

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.

1.
B.
C.
1.2
Heat Exchangers
Related Sections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
References
1.
AHSRA 90.1 ENERGY STANDARD FOR BUILDINGS EXCEPT LOW-RISE RESIDENTIAL

BUILDING
2.
ASME SECTION 8D BOILER AND PRESSURE VESSEL
3.
NFPA 30 FLAMMABLE AND COMBUSTIBLE LIQUIDS CODE
4.
NFPA 54 NATIONAL FUEL GAS CODE
5.
NFPA 70 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE (NEC)
6.

A.
B.
for Heat Exchangers and accessories.
1.
C.
Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating Heat Exchanger components including dimensions,
clearances, anchors, attachments, lifting points, tappings, drains, and venting
D.
Manufacturers Certification: Submit documentation from the Manufacturer certifying that the Heat
Exchanger components conform with the ASME and NFPA guidelines
E.
F.

04 February 2016
13 1510/ 1

13 1510WATER FEATURE HEAT EXCHANGERS
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer: a Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this Section with a minimum
B.
Installer Qualifications: a Company specializing in performing the Work of this Section with a minimum of
C.
Ensure products and installation of specified products are in conformance with recommendations and
requirements of the following organizations:
1.4
1.
American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME)
2.
National Board of Boiler and Pressure Vessel Inspectors (NBBPVI)
3.
4.

A.
B.
Accept Heat Exchanger and accessories on site in original factory packaging. Immediately upon receipt of
shipment, inspect and check for damage
C.
Protect Heat Exchanger and accessories from physical damage including effects of weather, water, and
construction debris. Provide temporary inlet and outlet caps; maintain caps in place until installation
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
HEAT EXCHANGERS
A.
B.
1.
GEA Heat Exchangers, Incorporated - FlatPlate
2.
Muller
Before ordering heat exchanger, the Contractor shall verify the following:
1.
If the heat source is being provided in combination with the building hot water system. If so, then the
Contractor shall verify temperature, flow rate, and pressure specifications from the Building Mechanical
Engineer
2.
The Contractor shall verify space requirements before switching between Brazed Heat Exchangers
and Plate and Frame Heat Exchangers
3.
The Contractor shall confirm all temperature, flow rate and pressure specifications
C.
Heat Exchangers shall be constructed of 316 stainless steel for non-salt water applications. Salt water
application, including systems with salt chlorine generators, Heat Exchangers shall be constructed of titanium.
Follow all manufacturers recommendations for use with salt water
D.
Double wall plates to insure no contamination between process water and heating media
E.
Gasket material shall meet NSF 50 Standards

04 February 2016
13 1510/ 2

2.2
PLATE DESIGN SHALL INCORPORATE A FREE FLOW DESIGN
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
GENERAL
A.
Supply all labor, equipment, and materials to construct, test, and put into operation complete heating
system with lines, valves, heat exchanger, and gauges in accordance with the Contract Documents and as directed
by the Engineer of Record
B.
Install all piping without bending, springing or forcing, true to line and grade, in a neat workman like
C.
D.
Provide suitable heat resistant piping (Copper or CPVC) connecting to the influent and effluent of the Heat
Exchanger, extend heat resistant piping for a minimum of 8 feet (2.4m) then transition to PVC piping (or as
specified in the Contract Documents)
E.
3.2
It is recommended that all hot water lines be insulated

INSTALLATION
A.
Install Heat Exchanger components in accordance with the Manufacturers recommendations
B.
Place and level the Heat Exchanger in location shown on the Contract Documents on concrete equipment
pads, or mounted to the wall, and where there is adequate access for service and inspection on all sides
C.
Heat Exchanger components shall be piped with insulated ductile iron or insulated copper pipe and fittings.
Provide the proper dielectric connections between different metal connections
END OF SECTION

04 February 2016
13 1510/ 3

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.
C.
1.2

1.
Furnishing and Installing Valves and Flow Control Devices
2.
Furnishing and Installing Gauges and Meters
3.
Furnishing and Installing Thermometers and Temperature Probes
4.
Furnishing and Installing Valve Actuators
5.
Furnishing and Installing Accessories
Related Sections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
References:
1.
ASTM D1784 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR RIGID POLY(VINYL CHLORIDE) (PVC)

COMPOUNDS AND CHLORINATED POLY(VINYL CHLORIDE) (CPVC) COMPOUNDS
2.
ASTM F1030 STANDARD PRACTICE FOR SELECTION OF VALVE OPERATORS
3.
ASTM F1970 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR SPECIAL ENGINEERED FITTINGS,

APPURTENANCES OR VALVES FOR USE IN POLY (VINYL CHLORIDE) (PVC) OR CHLORINATED
POLY (VINYL CHLORIDE) (CPVC) SYSTEMS
4.
AMERICAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION (AWWA) C508-09 SWING-CHECK VALVES FOR

WATERWORKS SERVICE 2-IN THROUGH 24-IN (50-mm THROUGH 600-mm) NPS
5.
AWWA C509-09 RESILIENT-SEATED GATE VALVES FOR WATER SUPPLY SERVICE

A.
B.
Product Data: Submit Manufacturers literature including printed recommendations, compliance with
Standard and Testing agencies, dimensions and sizes for all Valves, Gauges, Meters, and accessories.
1.
Indicate on each submittal which materials, models, data, ratings, and options are being selected
C.
Project Record Documents: Record actual horizontal and vertical locations of fittings, valves, and
accessories on all site piping
D.
Maintenance data for Valves, Gauges, Meters, and accessories including detailed instructions on
adjusting, servicing, disassembling, and repairing. The Contractor shall provide the information neatly bound with
the Manufacturers literature
04 February 2016
13 1511/ 1

13 1511WATER FEATURE VALVES, GAUGES, AND
METERS
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Comply with referenced Standards and Manufacturers recommendations
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
VALVES AND FLOW CONTROL DEVICES

A.
Ball Valves
1.
B.
a.
Asahi/America
b.
Hayward Industrial Plastics
c.
2.
Ball Valves inch (6mm) and larger, body construction shall be one piece thermoplastic PVC
conforming to Cell Classification 12454
3.
Seats shall be PTFE with elastomeric backing cushions the same material as all other O rings
4.
Ball Valves shall be True Union or double entry type with blocking capability
5.
Ball Valves shall have bubble tight shut-off with the following pressure ratings based on ambient
temperature:
a.
Sizes up to 3 inch (80mm):
230 psi (1.6 MPa)
b.
Size 4 inch (100mm):
150 psi (1.0 MPa)
6.
Seals composed of Viton or EPDM
7.
All Ball Valves shall be tested by the Manufacturer prior to shipment. Test documents shall be available
upon request
Butterfly Valves
1.
a.
Asahi/America
b.
c.
2.
Valve Disc shall be PVC or Polypropylene
3.
4.
Metallic fasteners shall be 316L Stainless Steel
5.
External metallic trim shall be 300 series Stainless Steel epoxy or powder coated
6.
Seals: Full Seat Design, Isolating Stem from media and functioning as a gasket for mating flanges.
a.
7.
8.
Materials shall be Viton or EPDM
Butterfly Valve body materials for Underground or Above Ground Applications shall be as follows:
a.
Sizes up to 14 inch (350mm) shall be one piece thermoplastic PVC conforming to Cell
Classification 12454. Body type shall be wafer type conforming to ANSI B16.5 Bolt Circle
b.
Sizes 16 to 24 inch (400 to 600mm) shall be one piece thermoplastic PVC conforming to Cell
Classification 12454 or Polypropylene Cell Classification PP0210B67272. Body type shall be
wafer type conforming to ANSI B16.5 Bolt Circle
Butterfly Valve body materials for Submerged conditions shall be as follows:

04 February 2016
13 1511/ 2

METERS
a.
9.
Sizes up to 24 inch (600mm) Valves shall meet requirements shown for Underground or Above
Ground Applications with the following exceptions:
1).
Valve Stems shall be 316L Stainless Steel for Fresh Water application and Titanium for Salt
Water applications
2).
Stem extensions or 2 inch (50mm) square operating nuts of the appropriate material and
design shall be supplied, subject to review of the installation and valve Manufacturers
recommendations
Butterfly Valves shall be bubble tight shut-off with the following pressure ratings based on ambient
temperature:
a.
Sizes up to 10 inch (250mm):
150 psi (1.0 MPa)
b.
Sizes 12 to 14 inch (300 to 450mm):
100 psi (690 kPa)
c.
85 psi (590 kPa)
d.
75 psi (520 kPa)
10. Butterfly Valves 4 inches (100mm) and smaller shall be lever type with an internal locking device
11. Butterfly Valves 6 inches (150mm) and larger shall be gear type. Gear operators shall be worm gear
design with visual position indicator and travel stops
12. Butterfly Valves located 7 feet (2m) or higher above finished floor elevation shall be provided with chain
operators with the chain extending no more than 7 feet (2m) above the finished floor elevation
13. All Butterfly Valves shall be tested by the Manufacturer prior to shipment. Test documents shall be
available upon request
C.
Check Valves
1.
Ball Check Valve

a.
2.
1).
Asahi/America
2).
3).
b.
Ball Check Valves shall be PVC, CPVC, PP or PVDF body with EPDM, FKM, or PTFE seals for
valve sizes to 4 inch (15 to 100mm)
c.
Valves body construction shall be one piece thermoplastic construction
d.
Valves shall be designed with an elastomeric uniseat/seal for tight shut-off under pressure
e.
Sizes to 2 inch (15 to 50mm) shall be True Union and sizes 3 to 4 inch (80 to 100mm) shall be
single union
f.
For sizes larger than 4 inch (100mm) material shall be epoxy or powder coated cast iron with
flange connections meeting ANSI B16.5 bolt pattern
Swing Check Valve

a.
1).
Asahi/America
2).
3).
b.
Swing Check Valves shall be PVC, PP, or PVDF body with FKM, EPDM, or PTFE seals and shall
incorporate a single disc design suitable for horizontal or vertical applications
c.
Valves shall have a top entry bonnet for maintenance purposes

04 February 2016
13 1511/ 3

METERS
d.
Valves shall be flat faced flanged end type conforming to ANSI B16.5 bolt pattern for 150 psi (1.0
MPa)
e.
Swing Check Valves shall have the following pressure rating based on ambient temperature:
1).
2).
3.
Elastomeric Seals:
a).
Sizes to 3 inch (20 to 80mm):
150 psi (1.0 MPa)
b).
100 psi (689 kPa)
c).
75 psi (571 kPa)
PTFE Seals:
a).
Sizes to 2-1/2 inch (20 to 65mm):
90 psi (621 kPa)
b).
75 psi (571 kPa)
c).
60 psi (414 kPa)
d).
45 psi (310 kPa)
Wafer Check Valve

a.
Metal Wafer Check Valve

1).
2).
3).
b.
a).
Ritepro Corporation
b).
APCO
Wafer Check body construction shall be as follows:

a).
Valve Class 125:
Cast Iron
b).
Valve Class 150:
Ductile Iron
c).
Valve Class 300:
Steel
Wafer Check Seating Material and Spacer Material

a).
Valve Class 125:
Buna N and Teflon
b).
Valve Class 150:
EPDM and Teflon
c).
Valve Class 300:
Stainless Steel and Bronze
4).
Wafer Check Valve shall consist of a compact Body with a single plate disc attached to a
hinge which in turn is supported by a hinge pin inside an off-center body cavity
5).
The Disc shall be mechanically biased to the closed position by a torsional spring located
between two hinged lugs. The hinge pin shall be retained by two NPT Pipe Plugs inside the
body.
6).
An eyebolt shall be located on the top of the Valve to aid easy installation
7).
Wafer Check Valve shall be designed to open when a pressure of less than 1 psi (0.07 bar)
is applied across the face of the Disc
8).
Wafer Check Valve shall be provided for installation inside the bolt circle and between
standard flanges, using flat faced gaskets
9).
Wafer Check Valve shall be hydrostatically tested with a zero leakage criteria in both
horizontal and vertical configurations
10).
Wafer Check Valve shall be available in sizes from 1 to 24 inch (25 to 600mm)
Thermoplastic Wafer Check Valve

1).

04 February 2016
13 1511/ 4

METERS
Asahi/America
b).
c).
2).
Wafer Check Valve shall be of solid thermoplastic construction, having not metal that comes
in contact with the media. PVC shall conform to ASTM D1784 Cell Classification 12454
3).
Valves shall incorporate a single disc design suitable for either horizontal or vertical
installations
4).
Valves shall be wafer style conforming to ASME/ANSI B16.1 face to face dimensions for
Valve Class 150 flanges
5).
Valves shall be round body design with O-ring seals of either EPDM or FKM and accept as
an option a SWP-B ETFE coated spring for use in vertical applications
6).
Wafer Check Valves shall be bubble tight shut-off with the following pressure ratings based
on ambient temperature:
a).
150 psi (1.0 MPa)
b).
85 psi (590 kPa)
7).
An eyebolt shall be located on the top of the Valve to aid easy installation
8).
Wafer Check Valve shall be designed for a minimum opening pressure as follows
9).
D.
a).
a).
Without Spring:
0.01 psi (69 Pa)
b).
With Spring:
0.01 psi (69 Pa) Horizontal, 0.02 psi (0.14 kPa) Vertical
Wafer Check Valve shall be designed for a minimum sealing pressure

a).
Without Spring:
1 psi (6.9 kPa)
b).
With Spring:
1 psi (6.9 kPa)
Gate Valves
1.
Cast Iron Gate Valve

a.
2.
1).
NIBCO, Incorporated
2).
Crane Company
3).
Red-White Valve Corporation
b.
Cast iron body, bonnet, and hand wheel
c.
Standard ANSI flange with non-rising stem
d.
Fitted to gun metal seats, bronze spindles and gun metal nuts
e.
Clockwise closing direction when viewed from above and clearly marked on hand wheel of each
valve
f.
Standard waterworks pattern complying with requirements of AWWA C509 for minimum working
pressure of 200 psi (1.4 MPa)
g.
upon request
Thermoplastic Gate Valve

a.
1).
Asahi/America
2).

04 February 2016
13 1511/ 5

METERS
3).
b.
Gate Valve body shall be one piece thermoplastic PVC conforming with ASTM D1784 with FKM or
EPDM seals
c.
Plug shall be PVC or Polypropylene tapered cylindrical plug
d.
Valves shall be flat faced flanged end type conforming to ANSI B16.5 bolt pattern for Class 150
flanges
e.
The Valve shall have a Non-rising Stem, Visual Position Indicator, Hand wheel for operation, and a
Clean-out Plug on the bottom of the valve body
f.
Clockwise closing direction when viewed from above and clearly marked on hand wheel of each
valve
g.
Gate Valves shall be bubble tight shut-off with the following pressure ratings based on ambient
temperature:
h.
3.
1).
Sizes 1-1/2 to 8 inch (40 to 200mm): 150 psi (1.0 MPa)
2).
Sizes 10 (250mm):
110 psi (758 MPa)
3).
12 to 14 inch (300 to 350mm):
75 psi (517 kPa)
All Valves shall be tested by the manufacturer prior to shipment. Test documents shall be
available upon request
Accessories
a.
Stem Extensions
1).
b.
E.
Where required should be designed, built and supplied by the Manufacturer and be one of
two styles:
a).
Two piece extension with outer housing 100% sealed either free standing or
supported design
b).
Single piece extension either free standing or supported design
Operating Nuts
1).
Where required 2 inch (50mm) square operating nuts can be installed on Gate Valves in
place of a Hand wheel
2).
Material shall be Anodized Aluminum
Thermoplastic Globe Valves

1.
a.
Asahi/America
b.
c.
2.
Globe Valve body shall be one piece thermoplastic PVC conforming with ASTM D1784
3.
Seals shall be FKM or EPDM
4.
Disc shall be PVC or Polypropylene with rising stem
5.
There shall be no metal to media contact.
6.
The Valve shall have excellent flow regulating characteristics throughout the entire lift of the disc
7.
Globe Valves shall be bubble tight shut-off with the following pressure ratings based on ambient
temperature:
a.
Sizes 1/2 to 2 inch (40 to 200mm):

04 February 2016
13 1511/ 6
150 psi (1.0 MPa)

METERS
b.
8.
F.
110 psi (758 MPa)
All Valves shall be tested by the manufacturer prior to shipment. Test documents shall be available
upon request
Ball Cock Valves

1.
G.
Sizes 2-1/2 to 4 inch (65 to 100mm):
a.
Asahi/America
b.
c.
2.
Ball Cock Valve body shall be one piece unibody thermoplastic PVC conforming with ASTM D1784
3.
Seals shall be EPDM
4.
Valve shall have a calibrated flow indicator lever handle
5.
End connections shall be threaded
6.
Valve shall have a pressure rating of 150 psi (1.0 MPa) for all sizes at ambient temperature
7.
All Valves shall be tested by the manufacturer prior to shipment. Test documents shall be available
upon request
Level Control Valves

1.
Metal Float Valve

a.
1).
CLA-VAL Company
2).
Approved Equal
b.
The Valve shall be hydraulically operated, single diaphragm-actuated, globe or angle pattern
c.
The Valve shall consist of three major components:

1).
The Body with seat installed
2).
The Cover with bearing installed
3).
The Diaphragm assembly
d.
The Diaphragm assembly shall be the only moving part and shall form a sealed chamber in the
upper portion of the valve, separating operating pressure from line pressure
e.
Packing glands and/or stuffing boxes are not permitted and there shall be no pistons operating the
main valve or pilot control. No separate chamber shall be allowed between the main valve cover
and body
f.
Valve body and cover shall be of cast material. Ductile Iron is standard and other materials shall
be available. No fabrication or welding shall be used in the manufacturing process
g.
The Valve shall contain a resilient, synthetic rubber disc with a rectangular cross-section contained
on three and one-half sides by a disc retainer and forming a tight seal against a single removable
seat insert. No O-ring type discs (circular, square, or quad type) shall be permitted as a seating
surface
h.
The disc guide shall be of the contoured type to permit smooth transition of flow and shall hold the
disc firmly in place. The disc retainer shall be of a sturdy one-piece design capable of withstanding
opening and closing shocks. No hourglass-shaped disc retainers shall be permitted and no V-type
or slotted type disc guides shall be used
i.
The Diaphragm assemble contains a non-magnetic 303 stainless steel stem of sufficient diameter
to withstand high hydraulic pressures and shall be fully guided at both ends by a bearing in the
valve cover and an integral bearing in the valve seat.

04 February 2016
13 1511/ 7

METERS
j.
The Seat shall be a solid, one-piece design and shall have a minimum of a five-degree taper on
the seating surface for a positive, drip-tight shut off. No center guides shall be permitted. The stem
shall be drilled and tapped in the cover end to receive and affix such accessories as may be
deemed necessary.
k.
The flexible, non-wicking, FDA approved diaphragm shall consist of nylon fabric bonded with
synthetic rubber compatible with the operating fluid. The center hole for the main valve stem must
be sealed by the vulcanized process or a rubber grommet sealing the center stem hole from the
operating pressure.
l.
The Diaphragm must withstand a Mullins Burst Test of a minimum of 600 psi (4.14 MPa) per layer
of nylon fabric and shall be cycle tested 100,000 times to insure longevity.
m. The main valve seat and the stem bearing in the valve cover shall be removable. The cover
bearing and seat in 6 inch (150mm) and smaller size valves shall be threaded into the cover body.
The valve seat in 8 inch (200mm) and larger size valves shall be retained by flat head machine
screws for ease of maintenance.
2.
n.
The Valve Manufacturer shall warrant the valve to be free of defects in material and workmanship
for a period of three (3) years from the date of shipment, provided the valve is installed and used
in accordance with all applicable instruction.
o.
The Float Control shall be a rotary disc, plate-type pilot. The Pilot shall direct supply pressure into
the cover of the main valve to close it. Then vent the cover of the main valve to atmosphere to
open the main valve
p.
The Valve shall open wide then the float is at a low liquid level and close drip tight when the float is
at a high liquid level. Once the pilot signals the main valve to open or close, the valve shall travel
through its entire stroke without additional movement of the pilot control
q.
Float shall be constructed of stainless steel with KFM or EPDM seals
Thermoplastic Float Valve

a.
1).
Hudson Valve Company, Incorporated
2).
Approved Equal
b.
The Float Valve shall use fluid pressure, as opposed to a lever arm and ball, as the force to close
the valve.
c.
The Valve shall be of a self-contained design. The valve body shall be constructed of glass-filled
nylon 6/6. Internal parts shall be of ABS plastic, silicone, and stainless steel
d.
The Valve shall have threaded female connection.
e.
Valve shall have the following operating pressure:
f.
H.
1).
Size inch (15mm):
8 to 65 psi (55 to 448 kPa)
2).
Size 1 inch (25mm):
8 to 100 psi (55 to 689 kPa)
The maximum fluid temperature shall be 90 F (32 C), with a high temperature model with a
maximum fluid temperature of 150 F (65 C)
Combination Air and Vacuum Valves

1.
a.
APCO
b.
Crispin
c.
Valmatic
2.
Cast iron body, cover, and baffle
3.
Stainless steel floats, stem, and bushing

04 February 2016
13 1511/ 8

METERS
I.
4.
Seats shall be KFM or EPDM
5.
Valve shall allow unrestricted venting or re-entry of air
6.
Fittings shall be threaded
Backflow Prevention Device

1.
2.2
a.
DeZurik
b.
FEBCO
c.
Watts
d.
Zurn Industries, LLC
2.
Reduced Pressure type
3.
Epoxy coated cast iron body
4.
Standard ANSI flanged end connections
5.
316L Stainless Steel strainer
6.
Fasteners shall be 316L Stainless Steel
7.
Assembled with four (4) test cocks
8.
Non-Treaded vent outlet
9.
ASSE Listed 1013, CSA Certified, UL Classified 2, FM Approved 32; IAPMO Listed
GAUGES AND METERS

A.
Pressure Gauges
1.
a.
Dwyer Instruments
b.
WIKA Instrument Corporation
c.
Marshall Town
2.
Gauge shall be easy to read oversized 4 inch (100mm) diameter face. The Contractor may substitute a
2.5 inch (65mm) diameter face only with the approval of the Engineer of Record
3.
Gauge shall be liquid filled with glycerin
4.
Gauge shall have a 304 stainless steel case with 316 stainless steel wetted parts and polycarbonate
lens
5.
Gauge shall have a white aluminum dial with a black aluminum pointer
6.
Connections shall be lower or back mount
7.
Gauge shall have the following accuracy:
8.
B.
a.
4 inch (100mm) +/- 1.0% of span ASME B40.100 Grade A
b.
2.5 inch (65mm) +/- 2.5% of span ASME B40.100 Grade 1A
Gauge shall have the following range:

a.
0 to 60 psi (0 to 420 kPa) for pumps with a TDH of 60 feet (18m) or higher
b.
0 to 30 psi (0 to 210 kPa) for pumps with a TDH less than 60 feet (18m)
Thermometer (Temperature Indicator)

1.

04 February 2016
13 1511/ 9

METERS
2.
C.
H.O. Trerice Company
b.
WIKA Instrument Corporation
Type:
a.
7 inch (180mm) Adjustable Angle Industrial
b.
3.5 inch (89mm) Direct Mount Adjustable Angle Dial
3.
Stainless Steel stem with acrylic window
4.
Use with 316 stainless steel thermowell
5.
Accuracy within +/- one (1) scale division
6.
Liquid Actuated with Aluminum white background with black graduations and markings
7.
Range from 30 to 180 F (0 to 82 C)
Temperature Probe
1.
2.
D.
a.
a.
H.O. Trerice Company
b.
Dwyer Instruments
Type:
a.
RTD sensor with remote cable to PLC or Filter Control Panel
b.
Visual display at probe location
c.
9 inch (230mm) scale with adjustable angle probe
3.
Range from 30 to 180 F (0 to 82 C)
4.
Stem shall be 316 stainless steel, inch (15mm) diameter
5.
Insulation shall be Ceramic
6.
Head shall be stainless steel
7.
Use with 316 stainless steel thermowell
Flow Meters
1.
Paddlewheel Flow Meters

a.
1).
Seametrics
2).
George Fischer Signet
3).
Blue-White Industries, LTD
4).
Data Industrial
b.
Insertion paddle wheel type sensor sized to fit pipe in which it is installed. Provide sensor with
sufficient cable length to route cable between sensor and display horizontal across ceiling and
walls and vertically down walls
c.
Meter shall have an accuracy within +/- 1.0 percent of indicated flow
d.
Meter shall be capable of operation in raw water and in filter backwash effluent
e.
A remote, wall mounted display in a non-metallic, splash proof enclosure with a clear cover shall
be connected to the inserted sensor
f.
Remote display shall be provided with a factory provided power converter that can be plugged into
an outlet

04 February 2016
13 1511/ 10

METERS
2.
g.
Flow rate shall be displayed on an easy-to-read digital display in gallons per minute (liters per
minute or cubic meter per hour)
h.
Total flow shall be displayed on an easy-to-read digital display in gallons (liters)
i.
Flow totalizer shall be fully re-settable
j.
Remote display shall have a 4-20 mA output where noted on the Contract Documents
Pitot Tube Flow Meter

a.
2.3
1).
Blue-White Industries, LTD
2).
Approved Equal
b.
Meter body shall be constructed of one piece cast acrylic and float shall be 316 stainless steel on
standard range models
c.
Meter shall be dual scale (gpm/lpm) printed on both sides of the meter
d.
Meter shall mount to existing pipe, with no unions or adapters required
e.
Meter shall be available with models for horizontal and vertical installations
f.
300 series stainless steel clamps and neoprene gasket shall be included
g.
Meter shall be sized to pipe and flow rate
VALVE ACTUATORS
A.
B.
Electric Actuator
1.
Actuator shall be provided by the same Manufacturer as the valve
2.
Electric Actuator shall be reversing type capacitor run motor design, thermally protected with a a
permanently lubricated gear train
3.
Actuator shall be provided at the voltage specified in the Contract Document
4.
Enclosure shall meet NEMA 4X, 7 and 9
5.
Actuator to have heat-treated solid metal gearing in a die cast aluminum housing and shall be powder
coated with stainless steel trim for corrosion resistance
6.
Actuator shall have a beacon position indicator, manual override, and ISO bolt pattern for valve
mounting
7.
Manual override is used for declutching motor for manual operation
8.
Two (2) limit switches shall be supplied as a standard for setting open and closed limits
9.
Actuators to have two (2) inch (15mm) NPT conduit entry for ON-OFF units and modulating units
Pneumatic Actuator
1.
Actuator shall be provided by the same Manufacturer as the valve
2.
Actuator shall be double piston, rack and pinion design double acting air-to-air operation
3.
Actuator shall have ISO mounting pattern for valve with NAMUR mounting pattern for solenoids and
accessories
4.
Valves 4 inch (100mm) and smaller to include flats on actuator shaft for manual override
5.
Valves larger than 4 inch (100mm) shall include de-clutchable gear operated manual override
6.
Actuator body shall be of highly corrosion resistant glass filled polyamide or aluminum with Rilsan
coating
7.
Solenoid valve to be NEMA 4, with manual override and speed controls, NAMUR mount design

04 February 2016
13 1511/ 11

METERS
8.
Actuators shall incorporate adjustable travel stop 0 90 degrees
9.
Stops shall allow independent adjustment of opening or closing direction
10. Actuators shall incorporate valve position limit switches coupled to the valve shaft and indicating to the
PLC the fully OPEN or CLOSED position of the valve
11. Supply air working pressure range 80 to 120 psi (550 to 830 kPa)
12. Actuator seals shall be Buna N
13. Actuator shall have integral thermal overload protection with auto-reset
14. Actuator shall have a permanently lubricated gear train
15. Actuator shall have adjustable travel-stop limit switches
16. Actuator shall be capable of being operated by a 24 volt signal from filter control center and separate
HAND-OFF-AUTO switch
17. Fully field adjustable closure stops to limit the percent of valve closure to assure proper system flow
rate
2.4
ACCESSORIES
A.
Wye Strainers
1.
B.
a.
ASAHI/America
b.
c.
2.
Transparent PVC body with minimum 150 psi (1.0 MPa) working pressure rating
3.
True union end connections
4.
EPDM or KFM seals and O-rings
5.
Stainless steel strainer screen
Valve Boxes
1.
Cast Iron Valve Box

a.
2.
1).
Bingham and Taylor
2).
Approved Equal
b.
Cast Iron three piece valve box
c.
Two (2) piece, sliding type barrel with 5.25 inch (130mm) shaft
d.
Flanged upper section with bearing area to prevent settling
e.
Cast Iron cover marked IRRIGATION
FRP Valve Box

a.
1).
A.S.A. Manufacturing, Incorporated
2).
Approved Equal
b.
Box shall be constructed of premium fiberglass and resin for maximum structural strength
c.
Provide durable smooth gelcoat interior finish

04 February 2016
13 1511/ 12

METERS
d.
Box shall be custom sized for the number of valves and dimensions as shown on the Contract
Documents
e.
Provide open bottom for drainage and hinged, lockable landscape lid with handle
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
GENERAL
A.
All Valves, Gauges, Meters, and accessories shall be installed in strict accordance with Manufacturers
instructions and recommendations
B.
Position all Valves, Gauges, Meters, and accessories to result in good appearance, easily read, and easy
access to all components for maintenance and repairs.
3.2
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine surfaces, substrates, and conditions for compliance with requirements of other sections that
related work is specified, and determine if surfaces, substrates, and conditions affecting performance of the Work
of this section are satisfactory. Do not proceed with the Work of this section until unsatisfactory conditions have
been corrected in a manner acceptable to the installer. Starting installation constitutes acceptance of surfaces,
substrates, and conditions
3.3
PREPARATION
A.
Determine depth, size, and alignment of existing utilities before beginning excavation
B.
Hot dip galvanize all metallic items that are not factory furnished
3.4
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
Buried Valves
1.
Locate shut-off valves as close to main lines as possible while maintaining easy valve access
2.
Valves shall be the same size as the connecting pipe. Where pipe reduces near the valve, size the
valve to the large diameter pipe
3.
Valves less than 3 inch (80mm) located in landscape areas shall have a standard 2 inch (50mm)
irrigation valve box, PVC riser, and cover. Riser shall extend up to a level of 6 inches (150mm) above
finish ground surface
4.
Valves 3 inch (80mm) and larger located in landscape areas shall have an 8 inch (200mm) Schedule
40 PVC pipe that extends from a level of 6 inches (150mm) above finish ground surface down to a
point that is 4 inches (100mm) below the top of the operating lug nut that fully encloses the operating
lug nut/handle. The pipe shall act as a valve key box and be fitted with removable, tight fitting PVC cap
5.
Buried valves located in walkways or vehicular traffic areas shall have a cast iron valve box with cover,
mounted flush with the finished surface and fully enclose the operating nut or handle
6.
Provide three (3) valve keys for each 5 foot (1.5m) increment of depth from 5 feet (1.5m) to the depth
of the deepest valve
7.
Valves installed in valve boxes shall have wheel or lever operators, with valves installed so flow
through the valve is horizontal and the riser and operator on the top of the valve
8.
Buried Valves 6 inch (150mm) and larger shall be supported and anchored with concrete blocks to
support the valve weight and provide resistance to thrust
Above Ground Valves

1.
Locate equipment shut-off valves and check valves as close to equipment as possible, while
maintaining Manufacturers recommendations and easy valve access
2.

04 February 2016
13 1511/ 13

METERS

3.
Overhead valves should be located in accessible areas next to equipment, not directly above
equipment
4.
Butterfly Valves installed above 7 feet (2.1m) from the finish floor elevation shall be provided with chain
operators. The chain shall be located in a manner that they do not hang down in walkways or become
tangled with equipment and piping
5.
Ball Valves installed overhead shall be located so access to the valve can be easily accomplished with
a step ladder
6.
Install overhead valves with operators (handles, levers, or wheels) at 90 degrees from vertical, do not
install valves with operators upside down
7.
Install Valves larger than 3 inch (80mm) with flanges or between flanges. Valves 3 inch (80mm) and
smaller shall be installed with socket welded union type connections
8.
Do not use Valves to straighten misaligned pipes. Do not install valves between misaligned pipes
9.
Provide supports, hangers, and anchors for valves to adequately support valve weight and to resist
thrust
10. Support Valves adequately at both flanges if in a horizontal position and by the top flange if in a vertical
position
C.
D.
E.
Submerged Valves
1.
Locate submerged valves within 12 inches (300mm) of walls. Anchor valves to walls
2.
3.
Valves located in lagoons, waterfalls, or inlet/outlet boxes shall have a 2 inch (50mm) operating nut for
valves 6 inch (150mm) and larger, and lever operator for valves less than 6 inch (150mm)
4.
Valves located in balance tanks or surge chambers shall have a 2 inch (50mm) operating nut on a riser
stem which shall extend 2 inches (50mm) below the finished surface of the tank lid. Place a removable
cast iron cover over operating nut. Cast iron cover shall be flush with the finished surface of the tank
lid. Located valve gear boxes above water level
Level Control Valves

1.
Install Float Valves in a cast-in-place or pre-cast concrete or FRP box with access hatch, or in a
balance tank as indicated on the Contract Documents
2.
Install Float Valve with Isolating Ball Valve and a bypass with a normally closed, locking handle Ball
Valve
3.
Install valve float in a 12 inch (300mm) diameter PVC pipe as a stilling well
4.
Stilling well shall be connected to the main water body with a minimum 6 inch (150mm) equalizer line
for remote fill box applications
5.
Adjust valve float to maintain water level within 1 inch (25mm) of planned water level
Combination Air and Vacuum Valves

1.
Install Air/Vacuum Valves in all high points in above ground and below ground pressure pipelines and
in locations indicated on the Contract Documents or as directed by the Engineer of Record
2.
Air/Vacuum Valves installed on below grade site piping shall be installed in pre-cast concrete or FRP
boxes with removable lids. Provide a drain in the box that is piped to a sump or storm drain system
3.
Valves installed above ground shall be piped with PVC pipe to the nearest floor drain. Size drain pipe
to the Air/Vacuum Valve
4.
Air/Vacuum Valves shall be sized per the Manufacturers recommendations for size of pipe, pressure,
and conditions where valve is to be installed

04 February 2016
13 1511/ 14

METERS
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
Backflow Preventer
1.
Install backflow preventer as per local code requirements on all potable water fill lines, hose bibs, and
emergency eyewash/showers. Combine potable fill lines in a suitable manner to minimize the number
of backflow devices
2.
Install gate valves before and after backflow prevention devices
3.
Size backflow prevention devices to match inflow pipe size
4.
Pipe relief from backflow preventer to nearest drain or into a sump. Provide a minimum 6 inch (150mm)
air gap between device and drain pipe
Pressure Gauges
1.
Install Pressure Gauges as indicated on Contract Documents and in locations where they are easily
read. Install in a vertical to 15 degrees of vertical position
2.
Pressure Gauge should not be installed more than 6 feet (1.8m) above the finished floor
3.
Install Pressure Gauge with pulsation dampers. Provide a gauge cock to isolate each gauge
4.
Adjust Pressure Gauge to final angle, clean windows and lenses, and calibrate to zero
Flow Meters
1.
Install flow sensor at locations as indicated on the Contract Documents. Install per Manufacturers
recommendations for preceding and following pipe lengths clearances and orientations
2.
Flow sensors for paddle wheel Flow Meters shall be installed in the pipe using as saddle or other
means as recommended by the Manufacturer
3.
Install Flow Meters or Display Units in a location that is near the sensor with ready access and visibility
4.
Mount Display Units 5 feet (1.5m) above the finish floor
5.
Provide a service outlet at a location near the Display Unit
6.
Calibrate Flow Meter display as per Manufacturers recommendations
Wye Strainers
1.
Install Wye Strainers as indication on the Contract Documents and in locations where they are easily
accessible
2.
Install Wye Strainers in pipes where flow is horizontal or vertically down. For horizontal flow, install with
the strainer vertically down
3.
Install a shut-off valve immediately next to the Wye Strainer on the upstream side for isolation
Dielectric Connections
1.
Isolate copper pipe from steel supports with suitable insulator
2.
Dielectric connections shall be installed in vertical sections of piping only
3.
Copper system shall have brass fittings, including connections to equipment

END OF SECTION

04 February 2016
13 1511/ 15

METERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.
C.

1.
Pneumatic Pipe and Fittings
2.
Rotary Screw Compressor
3.
Air Receiver and Accessories
4.
After Cooler
5.
Refrigerated Air Dryer
6.
Pressure Reducing Valves
7.
Compressed Air Filters
Related Sections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
References:
1.
ASME SECTION 8D BOILER AND PRESSURE VESSELS
2.
ASME B16.18 CAST COPPER ALLOY SOLDER JOINT PRESSURE FITTINGS
3.
ASME B16.22 WROUGHT COPPER AND COPPER ALLOY SOLDER-JOINT PRESSURE

FITTINGS
4.
ASME B16.26 CAST COPPER ALLOY FITTINGS FOR FLARED COPPER TUBES
5.
ASME B31.1 POWER PIPING
6.
ASME B31.9 BUILDING SERVICE PIPING
7.
ASME B32 METAL AND METAL ALLOY WROUGHT MILL PRODUCTS
8.
ASTM B88 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR SEAMLESS COPPER WATER TUBE
9.
ASTM D1248 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR POLYETHYLENE PLASTICS EXTRUSION

MATERIALS FOR WIRE AND CALBLE
10. ASTM D2657 STANDARD PRACTICE FOR HEAT FUSION JOINING OF POLYEFIN PIPE AND
FITTINGS
11. ASTM D2837 STANDARD TEST METHOD FOR OBTAINING HYDROSTATIC DESIGN BASIS FOR
THERMOPLASTIC PIPE MATERIALS OR PRESSURE DESIGN BASES FOR THERMOPLASTIC
PIPE PRODUCTS
12. ASTM D3035 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR POLYETHYLENE (PE) PLASTIC PIPE (DR-PR)
BASED ON CONTROLLED OUTSIDE DIAMETER
13. MSS SP-80 BRONZE GATE, GLOBE, ANGLE AND CHECK VALVES
14. MSS SP-110 BALL VALVES THREADED, SOCKET-WELDING, SOLDER JOINT, GROOVED AND
04 February 2016
13 1512/ 1

13 1512WATER FEATURE COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEMS
FLARED ENDS
15. NFPA 70 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE (NEC)
1.2

A.
B.
Product Data: Submit Manufacturers literature including materials, dimensions, weights, capacity,
electrical characteristics, and placement of openings, holes, and connection requirements
C.
Shop Drawings: Provide drawing indicating piping schematic with electrical characteristics and connection
requirements
D.
As-Built Drawings: Provide drawings recording actual locations and elevations of piping, valving,
penetrations, location of equipment, and electrical requirements for all equipment related to this section
E.
Provide Certificate of Compliance from authority having jurisdiction indicating approval of air receiver
F.
Provide Manufacturers installation instructions, hoisting and setting requirements, and start-up procedures
G.
Provide Operation and Maintenance data for Air Compressor, Air Receiver and accessories, After Cooler,
Refrigerated Air Dryer, and Pressure Reducing stations
H.
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Install Air Compressor, Air Receiver and accessories, After Cooler, Refrigerated Air Dryer, and Pressure
Reducing stations in compliance with applicable ASME, ASTM, and MSS guidelines and requirements
1.4

A.
B.
Accept Air Compressor, Air Receiver and accessories, After Cooler, Refrigerated Air Dryer, and Pressure
Reducing stations on site in original factory packaging. Immediately upon receipt of shipment, inspect and check
for damage
C.
Protect Air Compressor, Air Receiver and accessories, After Cooler, Refrigerated Air Dryer, and Pressure
Reducing stations from physical damage including effects of weather, water, and construction debris. Provide
temporary inlet and outlet caps; maintain caps in place until installation
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS

A.
B.
Solvay Eltex Tubing 124 blue high density polyethylene: ASTM D3035
1.
Fittings:
ASTM D3035, Injection Molded
2.
Joints:
ASTM D3035
Copper Tubing:
1.
Fittings:
ASTM B88 (ASTM B88M), Type K drawn

ASME B16.18, Cast Copper Alloy
ASME B16.22, Wrought Copper and Bronze
2.
C.
Joints:
Copper Tubing:
ASTM B32, solder, Grade 95TA

ASTM B88 (ASTM B88M), Type K annealed
1.
Fittings:
ASME B16.26, Cast Bronze
2.
Joints:
Flared

04 February 2016
13 1512/ 2

2.2
VALVES
A.
Ball Valves:
1.
B.
Asahi/America
b.
NIBCO
c.
MUESCO
Body:
MSS SP-110, Class 150, 400 psi (2.76 MPa) CWP, Bronze, two piece
3.
Ball:
Chrome plated Brass
4.
Seats:
Teflon
5.
Stem:
Blow-out Proof
6.
Handle:
Lever type with balancing stops
7.
Connections:
Threaded Ends with Union
Swing Check Valves:

a.
Asahi/America
b.
NIBCO
c.
MUESCO
2.
Body:
MSS SP-80, Class 125, Bronze with Bronze Cap
3.
Disc:
Bronze
4.
Seats:
Rubber
5.
Connections:
Threaded Ends with Union
Air Outlets:
1.
2.
2.3
a.
2.
1.
C.
a.
Asahi/America
b.
NIBCO
c.
MUESCO
Quick Connector:
3/8 inch (10mm) Brass, snap-on connector with self-closing valve, Style A
UNIONS AND COUPLINGS

A.
B.
C.
Unions
1.
Copper Tube and Pipe:
150 psi (1.0 MPa) Bronze unions with soldered joints
2.
HDPE Pipe:
230 psi (1.59 MPa) HDPE unions with Socket-fusion joints
Dielectric Connections
1.
Union with galvanized or plated steel threaded end
2.
Union with copper solder end
3.
Water impervious isolation barrier
Flexible Connector
1.
Neoprene with Brass threaded connectors

04 February 2016
13 1512/ 3

2.4
ROTARY SCREW COMPRESSOR

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
1.
Kaeser Compressor, Incorporated
2.
Ingersoll-Rand
Air Compressor Type and Construction:

1.
Single stage, oil-flooded, air or water cooled rotary screw compressor completely pre-piped and with
pre-wired control panel
2.
Manufacture compressor under strict ISO 9001 quality control standards
3.
Capacity and pressure shall be as specified in the Contract Documents
4.
Compressor shall be capable of continuous full flow operation 24 hours a day at rated capacity and
pressure
5.
Motor Voltage: 230/460 V, 3 phase, 60 Hz (220/380 V, 3 phase, 50 Hz)
6.
Control System Voltage: 115V, 1 phase, 60 Hz (220V, 1 phase, 50 Hz)
7.
Standard Compressor package shall be suitable for use in the 40 to 105 F (4.4 to 40.5 C) ambient
temperature range
Air End
1.
Rotors Air End rotors shall have a SIGMA profile. Rotors shall be precision machined from cast iron.
Air End drive shaft to be tapered for easy removal of Air End pulley
2.
Casing Air End casing shall be cast iron
3.
Bearings Air End rotors shall be supported on both ends by cylindrical roller bearings to carry radial
loads. Angular contact bearings shall be installed on the discharge end of each rotor to carry thrust
loads with minimal friction
Driver Motor
1.
Motor shall have TEFC enclosure
2.
Motor winding shall be 100% copper and designed for full voltage starting
3.
Motor service factor shall be 1.5 minimum
4.
Motor speed: 3,600 rpm
5.
Motor Insulation shall be Class F
6.
Motor efficiency shall be 90% or higher
Starters
1.
Starter shall be magnetic, Wye-Delta, Reduced voltage starter to ensure low starting current and
reduce thrust bearing loads
2.
Starter shall be integrally mounted and wired in the compressor package, and located in the control
enclosure
Drive
1.
Drive shall be V-belt type
2.
Drive shall included automatic V-belt tensioning device with visual adjustment indicator to maintain
proper tension
3.
V-belt shall be 100% oil-resistant
Control Cabinet
1.
Control Cabinet shall be NEMA 12 rated
2.
Electrical components shall be UL Approved and labeled

04 February 2016
13 1512/ 4

H.
I.
J.
3.
Electrical schematic diagram shall be included in the service manual for ease of reference
4.
Cabinet back plate shall be galvanized
Compressor Instrument Panel

1.
Control system shall be suitable for use in -4 to 140 F (-20 to 60 C) ambient temperature range
2.
Control system shall meet or exceed NEMA 12 standards for environmental protection
3.
Control system shall have the following characteristics:

Shall be an industrial PC with 2 MB of memory
b.
Include a soft PLC with centralized database
c.
Include an internal stabilized 24 VDC power supply and a real time clock with a scheduling timer
d.
Include a battery backup with a lifetime of ten (10) years or more
e.
Certified protection from electromagnetic interference
f.
Provide digital and analog inputs and outputs for monitoring of standard and optional sensors
Enclosure
1.
Compressor shall have steel frame assembly and be completely enclosed, including the bottom
2.
Enclosure shall have removable access panels with safety interlock switches for protection of
personnel during maintenance
3.
Enclosure shall be sound insulated such that the compressor shall have a maximum full load noise
level of 69 dBa at 3 feet (1m). All sound dampening material shall be oil repelling and cleanable
4.
Air End and Motor shall be mounted on a steel frame isolated from the compressor frame with rubber
vibration isolators
5.
Compressor frame shall be isolated from the floor by rubber vibration pads
6.
All access panels/doors shall have slotted key locks or handles. Door key shall be provided
7.
Ambient cooling air shall enter the enclosure after passing through a 40 micron filter mat
8.
Compressor shall be fitted with and air inlet filter rated at 4 microns
9.
All access panels/doors shall be gasketed
Internal Piping
1.
K.
a.
All major air and oil pipes shall be made of steel and feature flexible connections, with O-ring seals
Lubrication and Cooling System

1.
Compressor shall have differential pressure, oil circulation system
2.
Compressor shall be factory filled with full synthetic lubricant
3.
Oil filter shall be able to remove particles down to 10 microns
4.
Compressor oil cooler shall have a thermostatic control valve to maintain optimum operating
temperature
5.
Compressor shall have a tank/sump with integral oil separator element that is rated at 217 psig (1.5
MPa) working pressure or more
6.
Separation system shall include three (3) stages:
7.
a.
Mechanical Separation
b.
Two-Stage Coalescing Filter
Separation Tank shall also include the following:

a.
Sump Pressure Gauge

04 February 2016
13 1512/ 5

b.
Fill Plug
c.
Oil Level Sight Glass
d.
Quick Disconnects for measuring air pressure differential across the filter element
e.
ASME coded safety relief valve installed
8.
Separator shall be equipped with quick disconnect and oil drain hose for pressurized oil changes
9.
Oil coolers and after coolers shall be easily accessible for ease of maintenance
10. Air-cooled after cooler and oil cooler shall be integrally mounted to the compressor enclosure
11. Oil cooler shall include drain plugs
L.
M.
N.
2.5
Compressor Control
1.
Compressor shall have automatic dual control, various control, and quadro control as standard
2.
Switchable modulation control is and acceptable option
3.
Compressor shall automatically load after starting if system demands it
4.
Compressor shall have adjustable time delay to shut down the compressor after running unloaded for a
pre-determined period of time
5.
Compressor shall cut-in at 100 psig (690 kPa) and cut-out at 110 psig (758 kPa)
Warranty
1.
Compressor Package shall be warranted to be free of defects in materials and workmanship for a
minimum period of 12 months
2.
Compressor Air End assembly, drive motor, and magnetic motor contractor shall be warranted to be
free of defects in material and workmanship for a minimum of two (2) years without restrictions
Start-up Service
1.
Start-up Service shall be provided by a factory trained technicians at no charge to ensure equipment is
running properly and adjusted to factory specifications
2.
Maintenance instructions shall be discussed with operators to ensure they understand routine
maintenance procedures
3.
The maintenance training shall be conducted at the time of equipment start-up
AFTER COOLER
A.
1.
2.
Ingersoll-Rand
B.
Working Pressure:
135 psi (930 kPa)
C.
Discharge:
Cool air to within 12 F of ambient air temperature at specified flow capacity
2.6
AIR DRYER
A.
B.
1.
2.
Ingersoll-Rand
Type: Self-contained Mechanical Refrigeration, including the following components:

1.
Heat Exchanger
2.
Refrigeration Compressor
3.
Automatic Controls

04 February 2016
13 1512/ 6

4.
Moisture Removal Trap
5.
Internal Wiring and Piping
6.
Full Refrigerant Charge
C.
Air Connections:
D.
Heat Exchangers:
E.
1.
Provide air to air and refrigerant to air coils
2.
Automatic control system to bypass refrigeration system on low or no load condition
Moisture Separator:
1.
F.
G.
2.7
Inlet and Outlet connections at the same level, factory insulated
Centrifugal type located at discharge and heat exchanger
Refrigeration Unit:
1.
Hermetically sealed
2.
Operated continuously to maintain 35 to 39 pressure degrees F dew point
3.
Housing:
Steel cabinet provided with access panel for maintenance and inspection
Accessories included:
1.
Air Inlet Temperature Gauge
2.
Air Inlet Pressure Gauge
3.
ON/OFF Switch
4.
High Temperature Light
5.
Power ON Light
6.
Refrigerant Gauge
7.
Air Outlet Temperature Gauge
8.
Air Outlet Pressure Gauge
AIR RECEIVER
A.
B.
C.
1.
Steel Fabricators
2.
Baunner
Receiver:
1.
Vertical Type
2.
Built to ASME regulations for working pressure of 150 psi (1.0 MPa)
3.
Flange or screw inlet and outlet connections
4.
Tank Finish: E + Tenion Epoxy Finish
5.
Capacity:
As specified on the Contract Documents
Fittings included:
1.
Safety Valve
2.
Pressure Gauge
3.
Drain Cock
4.
Automatic Float Actuated Condensate Trap

04 February 2016
13 1512/ 7

2.8
PRESSURE REDUCING VALVE

A.
B.
1.
Wilkinson
2.
ARO
3.
Binks
Pressure Reducing Station consists of the following components:

1.
Automatic Reducing Valve and Bypass
2.
Low Pressure side relief valve and gauge
C.
Valve Capacity: Reduce pressure from 125 to 30 psi (861 to 206 kPa), adjustable upwards from reduced
pressure
2.9
COMPRESSED AIR FILTER

A.
B.
C.
D.
1.
2.
Ingersoll-Rand
Capable of Removing:
1.
Liquid Water
2.
Solid Particulates
3.
Liquid Oil
4.
Oil Mist
Removal Efficiency:
1.
89.9999 percent at 400 scfm @ 125 psig (189 lps @ 862 kPa)
2.
Capable of removing particles as small as 0.01 microns
Filter Elements consist of the following:

1.
Polypropylene Support Core
2.
Multiple Layers of Polyester and Boroalicato Coalescing Medium
3.
Include Drain Layer
4.
Pressure Drop at 100 psi (690 kPa) at rated flow shall not exceed 1.0 psi (6.9 kPa)
5.
Maintenance indicator for indication of element replacement
E.
Maximum Operating Temperature:
F.
Housing shall consist of the following:
150 F (66 C)
1.
Cast Aluminum Alloy Head
2.
Threaded Inlet and Outlet Connections
3.
Threaded to accept a bottom bowl
4.
Manual Drain
5.
Audible signal should the bowl be loosen while filter is pressurized
6.
Direction of Flow:
7.
Maximum Pressure: 250 psi (1.38 MPa)
8.
Element Core to withstand pressure surges up to 30 psi (207 kPa) differential

04 February 2016
Inside to Outside
13 1512/ 8

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install Compressor Unit on concrete housekeeping pad
B.
Make Air Cock and Drain connection on horizontal casing
C.
Install line sized globe valve and check valve on Compressor discharge
D.
Install replaceable cartridge type filter silencer of adequate capacity for compressor
E.
Connect condensate drains to the nearest floor drain
F.
Install a valved bypass around the Air Dryer. Factory shall provide insulated inlet and outlet connections
G.
Install a valved drip connections at the low point of the piping system
H.
Install take-offs to outlets from top of main, with shut-off valve after take-off. Slope take-off piping to outlets
I.
Install tees instead of elbows at changes of direction of piping. Fit open end of each tee with plug
J.
Identify piping system and components, label as per SECTION 13 1501 MECHANICAL
IDENTIFICATION
3.2
FIELD TESTING
A.
Copper Tube and Pipe:

1.
Compressed Air Piping Leak Test:

a.
B.
Prior to initial operation, clean and test compressed air piping in accordance with ANSI B31.1
2.
Repair or replace compressed air piping as required to eliminate leaks, and retest to demonstrate
compliance
3.
Cap and seal ends of piping when not connected to mechanical equipment
High Density Polyethylene Pipe (HPDE):

1.
Prior to pressure testing, the system shall be examined for the following items:
a.
Pipe shall be completed per Contract Document layouts with all pipe and valve support in place
b.
Pipe, valves, and equipment shall be supported as specified, without any concentrated loads on
the system
c.
Pipe shall be in good condition, void of any cracks, gouges, or deformation
d.
Pipe flanges shall be properly aligned. All flange bolts should be checked for correct torque by the
installer
e.
All joints should be reviewed for appropriate welding technique
f.
Socket-Joints to have two beads on the end of the fitting and on the outside of the pipe in contract.
Refer to Manufacturers instructions for weld bead inspection
g.
Butt-Joints should have two beads 360-degrees around the joint. Refer to Manufacturers
instructions for specified weld bead inspection
2.
If any deficiencies appear, the quality control manager shall provide directions for repair
3.
Pressure Test:
a.
Test fluid should be compressed air with quality level set by Quality Control Engineer. In all cases
test must be done hydrostatically
b.
Begin pressurizing the system in increments of 10 psi (69 kPa). Bring the system up to 100 psi
(690 kPa) and hold. Allow the system to hold pressure for a minimum of two (2) hours and up to a
recommended 12 hours. Check pressure gauge after one (1) hour. Due to natural creep effects on
plastic piping the pressure will have decreased. If drop is less than 10%, increase the pressure
back to 100 psi (690 kPa). At this time the system may be fully pressurized to desired test

04 February 2016
13 1512/ 9

pressure
3.3
c.
If after one (1) hour to pressure has decreased more than 10%, consider the test a failure. Note
the 10% value may need to be greater for larger systems, or systems experiencing significant
thermal changes
d.
Test to be witnessed by Quality Control Engineer and certified by the Contractor
e.
Obvious leaks can be found by individually checking each joint using a soapy water solution or an
Ultrasonic Leak Detection gun. Leak detection guns should be available from the pipe
manufacturer
PIPE SUPPORTS
A.
Pipe support shall be done in accordance with SECTION 13 1403 WATER FEATURE PIPE HANGERS,
SUPPORTS, AND ANCHORS
B.
Pipe shall be hung in accordance with the Manufacturers recommendations to avoid damage to the pipe
C.
Proper support spacing is required in order to avoid sagging of the material. Support spacing is
temperature dependent and shall be based on the Manufacturers recommendations
D.
Hangers shall be supplied or specified by the pipe manufacturer
E.
U-bolt hangers are not allowed for HDPE pipe due to pin point loading effects
END OF SECTION

04 February 2016
13 1512/ 10

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.

1.
B.
Provide labor, materials, and equipment necessary for completion of the Work in the Water Feature
Electrical Specification and as described in the Contract Documents
Related Sections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
SECTION 13 1511 VALVES, GAUGES, AND METERS
8.
SECTION 13 1609 WATER FEATURE DISCONNECTS, MCC, AND STARTERS
9.
SECTION 13 1610 WATER FEATURE ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES
10. SECTION 26 0000 ELECTRICAL

1.2

A.
B.
Product Data:
1.
2.
3.
Submit Manufacturer literature for the following:

a.
Wiring Devices
b.
Disconnect Switches
c.
Panel Boards
d.
Motor Starters
e.
System Field Switches
Provide the following information for each item of equipment:

a.
Catalog Sheet
b.
Assembly Details of Dimension Drawings
c.
Installation Instructions
d.
Manufacturers Name and Catalog Number
e.
Name of Local Supplier
f.
Name of Electrical Contractor
Do not purchase equipment before approval of Product Data
C.
Shop Drawings: Submit Shop Drawings for Panel Boards and Control Panels
D.
As-Built Drawings: Provide the following:

1.
Complete set with all changes made to original drawings

04 February 2016
13 1601/ 1

13 1601WATER FEATURE GENERAL ELECTRICAL
REQUIREMENTS
2.
E.
Provide CAD files as well as prints. Hand-drawn changes are not acceptable
Operation & Maintenance Manual

1.
Provide two (2) copies of Operation and Maintenance Manuals

a.
Binder Loose-leaf type with hard cover. Title on outside of front cover and on spine shall be as
follows:
b.
*** WATER FEATURE FACILITY ***
c.
OPERATION & MAINTENANCE MANUAL

1).
d.
e.
Title Page: List the following information:

1).
Name of Project
2).
Project Completion Date
3).
Name and Address of Architect, Electrical Engineer, General Contractor, Electrical

Contractor, and Suppliers
Table of Contents
1).
f.
h.
1.3
List equipment in order that it appears in the Binder
Dividers:
1).
g.
ELECTRICAL
Provide one (1) divider tab for each type of equipment listed in the Table of Contents.
Properly label tabs
Equipment Information: Provide the following information for each item of equipment
1).
Catalog Sheets
2).
Assembly Details or Dimension Drawings
3).
Installation, Operation, and Maintenance Instructions
4).
Manufacturers Name and Catalog Number
5).
Name of Local Supplier
Furnish such information for the following equipment and arrange as listed:
1).
Wiring Devices
2).
Disconnect Switches
3).
Panel Boards
4).
Motor Starters
5).
System Field Switches
REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES:
A.
Furnish UL listed equipment where such label is available. Install in conformance with UL Standards where
applicable
B.
Install electrical Work in accordance with Contract Documents, edition of NEC in effect at the project
location, recommendations of NFPA, state and local electrical and building codes, and special codes having
jurisdiction over specific portions of the Work. This includes, but is not limited to the following:
1.
NFPA 70 National Electrical Code (NEC) with applicable local amendments
2.
International Building Code (IBC)
C.
In the event of a conflict between the Contract Documents and such codes, notify the Architect/Engineer in
writing prior to bid. A ruling will then be made by Architect/Engineer in writing

04 February 2016
13 1601/ 2

REQUIREMENTS
D.
Obtain permits and certificates of approval from all authorizes having jurisdiction over installation and pay
all fees required for scope of Work being done including connection fees, impact fees, power company installation
cost, etc
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SUBSTITUTIONS:
A.
Where Manufacturer names appear, other Manufacturers may be substituted upon obtaining written
approval from the Architect/Engineer at least ten (10) days prior to opening of bids
B.
Any prior approval of alternate equipment does not automatically exempt the supplier from meeting the
intent of these specifications. Failure to comply with the operational and functional intent of these specifications
may result in the total removal of the alternate system at the expense of the Contractor
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Confirm dimension, ratings, and specification of equipment to be installed and coordinate these with site
dimensions and with other Sections. Coordinate electrical equipment location with other trades to maintain required
working clearances and prevent encroachment into such working spaces
B.
Electrical Drawings are diagrammatic. Do not scale for exact sizes or locations. Drawings are not intended
to disclose absolute or unconditional knowledge of actual field conditions. Some equipment may need to be
relocated from the locations indicated on the drawings to maintain working spaces around equipment. Any such
coordination and relocation shall be the responsibility of the Electrical Contractor
C.
Confirm and verify electrical power specification (i.e. voltage, phase, amperage, etc) and electrical
equipment and material requirements for all water feature equipment provide by others, before beginning rough-in.
All coordination shall be done with the approved shop drawings or submittals
D.
Be prepared to relocate any outlet or device 6 feet (1.8m) in any direction without additional charge to the
Owner
E.
Install equipment in accordance with the Manufacturers recommendations
F.
In the event of a conflict between specifications and drawings or between various areas on the Contract
Documents the most stringent requirements shall govern
3.2
A.
Test systems and demonstrate equipment as working and operating properly. Rectify defects at no
additional cost to the Owner
B.
All Work under this section shall be executed in a thorough workmanlike manner, as determined by the
Engineer, by competent and experienced journeyman electricians
C.
All Work shall be installed in strict conformance with all Manufacturers requirements and
recommendations
3.3
IDENTIFICATIONS
A.
Provide for each Panel Board, Terminal Cabinet, Motor Starter, Motor Controller, Pushbutton, Control
Switch, etc, furnished and/or installed under this section of the specifications, with identification as to its
designation or specific function.
1.
Identification shall be laminated, white core, black plastic nameplate with beveled edges. Lettering
shall be machine engraved, not less than 3/16 inch (5mm) high, cut through the black surface to the
white core.

04 February 2016
13 1601/ 3

REQUIREMENTS
B.
3.4
2.
Secure nameplate to the identified item by the use of stainless steel self-tapping screws.
3.
Impressed plastic shall not be used to satisfy this requirement.
Panel schedules shall be typed and easily legible

GUARANTEE-WARRANTY
A.
Guarantee Work to be free from defects of materials and workmanship for a period of one (1) year from
date of final acceptance of building by authorities having jurisdiction
B.
Furnish Owner with three (3) written copies of Guarantee-Warranty

END OF SECTION

04 February 2016
13 1601/ 4

REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.
C.
1.2

1.
Disconnect Switches
2.
Motor Control Centers (MCC)
3.
MCC Components, including Motor Starters, SSVR, and VFD Controllers
Related Sections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
SECTION 13 1511 VALVES, GAUGES, AND METERS
7.
SECTION 13 1610 WATER FEATURE ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES
8.
SECTION 26 0000 ELECTRICAL
References:
1.
NEMA 250 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment
2.
NEMA ICS 18 Industrial Control and Systems: Motor Control Centers
3.
NEMA KS 1 Enclosed Switches
4.
5.
Underwriters Laboratories (UL) 98 Enclosed and Dead Front Switches
6.
UL 845 UL Standard for Safety of Motor Control Centers

A.
B.
Product Data: Submit Manufacturers literature for all major components including but not limited to the
following: Motor starters, overload relays, circuit breaker and fuse information, control power transformers, pilot
devices, relays, and etc
C.
Shop Drawings: Submit Manufacturer drawing showing the following:

1.
Layout and configuration of the MCC, including height, width, depth, and location of shipping splits
2.
Structure descriptions showing: Bus rating, enclosure rating, short-circuit withstand rating, and other
information requiring approval
3.
Conduit Locations
4.
Required Bus Splices
5.
Unit Descriptions including starter sizes, circuit breaker frame sizes, circuit breaker continuous
amperage rating, pilot devices, etc
6.
Nameplate information
7.
Schematic Wiring Diagrams

04 February 2016
13 1609/ 1

13 1609WATER FEATURE DISCONNECTS, MCC, AND
STARTERS
D.
Provide a copy of the Manufacturers installation instructions that include the following: Delivery and
storage instructions, general description for reading nameplate data and other markings, installation procedures,
conduit and cable installation, installing and removing plug-in units, operation of operator handles and unit
interlocks, checklist before energizing, procedure for energizing equipment, and maintenance procedures
E.
1.3
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A.
Provide MCC base upon applicable NEMA and UL Standards and in accordance with the details Contract
Documents
B.
The Manufacturer of the MCC shall also be the Manufacturer of the across-the-line motor starters, acrossthe-line contactors, solid-state reduced voltage starters, and variable frequency drives.
C.
The Contractor shall confirm the motor full-load amperage ratings and provide those to the MCC
Manufacturer to ensure proper sizing of the motor branch circuit and overload protection
1.4

A.
Equipment shall be handled and stored in accordance with the Manufacturers instructions
B.
One (1) copy of the Manufacturers instructions shall be included with the equipment at time of shipment
1.5
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A.
The MCC shall bear a UL Label and shall conform to the requirements of the latest edition of the NEC
and/or other applicable installation standards
B.
The Manufacturer shall provide certified copies of production test reports demonstrating compliance when
requested by the Engineer
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
DISCONNECT SWITCHES
A.
B.
C.
D.
1.
Schneider Electric Square D Company
2.
Eaton
3.
Approved Equal
Switch Interior
1.
All switches shall have switch blades that are visible when the switch is OFF and the over is open
2.
Lugs shall be UL Listed and sized for the temperature and amperage ratings as recommended by the
Manufacturer, aluminum or copper
3.
All current carrying parts shall be plated to resist corrosion
Switch Mechanism
1.
The Switch operating mechanism shall be quick-make, quick-break such that, during normal operation
of the switch, the operation of the contacts shall not be capable of being restrained by the operating
handle after the closing or opening action of the contacts has started
2.
The operating handle shall be an integral part of the box, on the cover
3.
Provisions shall be provided for padlocking the switch in the OFF position
Switch Enclosures

04 February 2016
13 1609/ 2

STARTERS
E.
2.2
1.
The enclosure shall be NEMA Type 1 for dry indoor use and NEMA Type 3R for outdoor or high
humidity environments
2.
Tangential knockouts shall be provided to facilitate ease of conduit entry on switches through 200
ampere
3.
Enclosures for Type 3R switches through 200 ampere shall have provisions for interchangeable bolt-on
hubs in the top endwall. Hubs shall be provided by a common manufacturer
Switch Ratings
1.
Switches shall be horsepower rated for 240 VAC as indicated on the Contract Documents
2.
The UL Listed short circuit rating shall be as per the Manufacturers recommendation and specification
MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS (MCC)

A.
B.
C.
D.
1.
Allen-Bradley
2.
Siemens Energy and Automation
3.
Eaton / Cutler Hammer
4.
Approved Equal
Ratings
1.
The MCC shall be 600 volt class suitable for operation on a three-phase, 50/60 Hz system.
2.
The MCC shall be rated for the system voltage as indicated on the Contract Documents
3.
The MCC horizontal and vertical power bus bracing shall be rated to meet or exceed the available fault
current as shown on the Contract Documents
4.
All MCC units shall have a full rated short-circuit rating that meets or exceeds the available fault current
as shown on the Contract Documents
5.
All circuit breakers used in the MCC shall have full-rated short-circuit interrupt ratings based on the
applied MCC voltage
Enclosure
1.
The MCC enclosure shall be NEMA Type 2 for indoor installation and NEMA Type 3R for outdoor
installations
2.
Each section shall be equipped with two (2) full metal side sheets to isolate each vertical section and to
help reduce the likelihood of fault propagation between sections
3.
All interior and exterior surfaces shall be painted ANSI 49 medium light gray. The vertical wireways and
unit back plates shall be painted high visibility gloss white
4.
All unpainted parts shall be plated for corrosion resistance
5.
Removable closing plates on each end of the MCC shall cover all horizontal bus and horizontal
wireway openings
6.
Insulating sheets shall be provided on the inside of the end closing plates for horizontal openings to
help prevent burn-through of the end closing plate in the event that the internal arcing fault occurs in
the horizontal bus compartment
Structure
1.
The MCC shall be of dead front construction and shall consist of one or more vertical sections bolted
together to form a rigid, free-standing assembly. The systems shall be designed to allow for the
addition of future sections at either end and to permit the interchanging of units
2.
Vertical Sections shall be rigid, free-standing structures

a.
Vertical sections shall have internal mounting angles running continuously within the shipping

04 February 2016
13 1609/ 3

STARTERS
block. An external mounting channel that is required to maintain structure integrity is not
acceptable
3.
b.
Vertical sections shall be 90 inches (2.3m) high, 20 inch (500mm) wide, and either 15 inch
(380mm) or 20 inches (500mm) deep as required. Custom widths shall be available
c.
Vertical sections shall be provided with a removable steel lifting angle on all shipping blocks. The
angle shall run the length of the shipping block. Lifting eyes are not acceptable
d.
Each standard section shall be capable of being subdivided into 12 usable, unit spaces
e.
Two (2) unit spaces shall constitute one (1) space factor and shall be 13 inches (325mm) in height
f.
One (1) unit space shall constitute one-half space factor and shall be 6.5 (165mm) in height
Horizontal Wireways
a.
Horizontal wireways shall be located at the top and bottom of the MCC
b.
Horizontal wireways shall be 6 inches (150mm) in height and extend the full depth of the vertical
section to allow maximum flexibility in locating conduit for MCC feeds and loads
1).
4.
Pull boxes to extend the height of the top horizontal wireway by 12 inches (300mm) shall be
provided, if specified
c.
Horizontal wireways shall be continuous across the length of the MCC, except where access
needs to be denied due to electrical isolation requirements
d.
The horizontal wireways shall be isolated from the power bus
e.
The horizontal wireways shall have removable covers held in place by captive screws
Provide a full height vertical wireway, independent of the plug-in units, in each standard vertical section
a.
The vertical wireway shall be isolated from the vertical and horizontal buses
b.
The vertical wireway shall be covered with a hinged and secure door
c.
Wireway tie bars shall be provided
d.
Isolation between the wireway and the units shall be provided with arc resistant latches to help
keep the door latched in the event that the internal arcing fault occurs
5.
All full voltage starter units through NEMA Size 5 and all feeder breakers through 400 amperes shall be
of the draw-out type. Draw-out provisions shall include a positive guide rail system and stab shrouds to
absolutely ensure alignment of stabs with the vertical bus. Draw-out units shall have a tin-plated stab
assembly for connection to the vertical bus. No wiring to these stabs shall extend outside of the drawout unit. Units equipped with side-mounted, positive latch pull-apart type control terminal blocks rated
600 volts. Knockouts shall be provided for the addition of future terminal blocks. In addition, a master
terminal block, when Type C wiring is specified, shall be draw-out and shall be located in the top
wireway, readily accessible through a hinged cover. All control wire to be 14 AWG minimum
6.
All draw-out units shall be secured by a spring-loaded, quarter turn, indicating type fastening device
located at the top front of the unit. With the exception of the dual-mounted units, each unit
compartment shall be provided with an individual front door
7.
An operating mechanism shall be mounted on the primary disconnect of each starter unit. It shall be
mechanically interlocked with the unit door to prevent access, unless the disconnect switch is in the
OFF position. A defeater shall be provided to bypass this interlock. With the door open, an interlock
shall be provided to prevent inadvertent closing of the disconnect switch. A second interlock shall be
provided to prevent removal or reinsertion of the unit while in the ON position. Padlocking facilities shall
be provided to positively lock the disconnect switch in the OFF position with up to three (3) padlocks
with the door open or closed. In addition, means shall be provided to padlock the unit in a partially
withdrawn position with the stabs free of the vertical bus
8.
Doors are to be hinged in a manner that allows for the removal of the individual doors without the
removal of any door above or below. Unit doors shall be hinged on the left and vertical wireway doors
on the right for unobstructed access to the units and associated vertical wireway. All doors shall be

04 February 2016
13 1609/ 4

STARTERS
mounted on removable pin-type hinges and secured with steel quarter turn, indicating type fasteners
9.
E.
MCCs shall be assembled in such a manner that it is not necessary to have rear accessibility to
remove any internal device or components
BUS BAR
1.
2.
3.
4.
Horizontal Power Bus

a.
The horizontal bus shall be rated as shown on the Contract Documents
b.
The horizontal bus material shall be copper with tin plating
c.
The horizontal bus shall be supported, braced and isolated from the vertical bus with a high
strength, non-conductive, non-tracking, glass polyester material
d.
For standard sections the horizontal bus shall be continuous within each shipping block and shall
be braced within each section
e.
Horizontal bus splices shall have at least two (2) bolts on each side
Vertical Bus
a.
The vertical power bus shall have an effective rating of 600 amperes. If a center horizontal bus
construction is utilized, then the rating shall be 300 amperes above and below the horizontal bus
for an effective rating of 600 amperes
b.
The vertical bus material shall be copper with tin plating
c.
The vertical bus shall attached to the horizontal bus with at least two (2) bolts
d.
The vertical bus shall be continuously braced by a high strength, non-conductive, non-tracking,
glass-filled polyester material and isolated from the unit spaces by a non-conductive,
polycarbonate molded cover
e.
Automatic shutters shall cover plug-in stab openings when the units are removed
Ground Bus
a.
Provide a ground bus system consisting of a horizontal ground bus connected to vertical ground
buses mounted in each section
b.
Provide an tin-plated copper, 1/4 x 1 inch (6 x 25mm) or 1/4 x 2 inch ( 6 x 50mm) horizontal
ground bus mounted in the bottom of the MCC unless otherwise specified in the Contract
Documents
c.
Provide a pressure-type mechanical lug mounted on the ground bus in the incoming line section
d.
Provide a unit ground stab on all unit inserts. The ground stab shall establish unit insert grounding
to the vertical ground bus before the plug-in power stags engage the power bus. The grounding
shall be maintained until after the plug-in power stabs are disengaged
Neutral Bus
a.
In a 4-wire system with a main incoming device rated at 400 amperes or less, if there are not
neutral loads in the MCC, an incoming neutral termination plate in the MCC main device unit is
acceptable in lieu of a horizontal neutral bus
b.
In a 4-wire system with a main incoming device rated at more than 400 amperes, if there are no
neutral loads in the MCC, and incoming neutral termination plate in the MMC main device unit
connected to a horizontal neutral bus in the section with the main is acceptable
c.
If neutral loads area specified within the MCC, provide neutral connection plates in sections with
horizontal neutral bus as indicated on the Contract Documents
d.
Horizontal neutral bus shall be provided in the main incoming and adjacent sections as specified
in the Contract Documents
e.
Neutral bus rating shall be the same as the horizontal power bus rating

04 February 2016
13 1609/ 5

STARTERS
F.
MCC Communications Options

1.
2.
2.3
MCC shall be able to provide at least one (1) of the following methods of communication:
a.
FIELDBUS Devices
b.
DEVICENET Devices
c.
PROFIBUS Devices
d.
MODBUS TCP Devices
e.
MODBUS Serial Devices
f.
ETHERNET/IP Devices
Provide communications option when specified in the Contract Documents
MCC COMPONENTS
A.
Unit Information
1.
The minimum compartment height shall be 6.5 inches (165mm) and this shall be considered one-half
space factor
2.
NEMA Size 5 FVNR starters and below shall be provided as plug-in units
3.
Plug-in Units
4.
5.
a.
Plug-in Units shall consist of a unit assembly, unit support pan, and unit door assembly
b.
Units shall be supplied with removable doors. The unit doors shall be fastened to the structure so
that the doors can be closed with the unit is removed
c.
A unit support pan shall be provided for support and guiding units. Unit support pans shall remain
in the structure when units are removed to provide isolation between units
d.
A service position shall be provided for plug-in units that allows for the unit to be supported, but
disengaged from the bus. The unit shall be capable of being padlocked in the service position.
This position is to be used to isolate a unit from the bus to allow service to be performed on the
connected load equipment
Power Stabs
a.
Unit stabs for engaging the power bus shall be tin-plated copper and provided with stainless backup springs to provide and maintain a high pressure 4-point connection to the vertical bus
b.
Wiring from the unit disconnecting means to the plug-in stabs shall not be exposed on the rear of
the unit. A separate isolated pathway shall be provided for each phase to minimize the possibility
of unit fault conditions reaching the power bus system
c.
The power cable termination at the plug-in stab shall be maintenance-free crimp type connection
Withdrawable Power Stabs

a.
Plug-in units shall have the capacity of withdrawing the power stabs, allowing the primary voltage
to be disconnected with the unit door closed
b.
The Withdrawable assembly shall accept a standard 1/4 inch (6mm) hex-style drive socket
c.
The Withdrawable stabs design shall include a set of stab assembly-mounted shutters
d.
The Withdrawable stabs design shall include interlock mechanisms
e.
The Withdrawable stabs design shall include feedback mechanisms that are verifiable with the unit
door closed
f.
The Withdrawable power stabs with the door closed mechanism shall not increase the original
height design so total space in the MMC is optimized
g.
A remote operating device shall be supplied to allow the connection and disconnection of the

04 February 2016
13 1609/ 6

STARTERS
power stabs with the doors closed

6.
7.
8.
9.
B.
Disconnect Handle
a.
Plug-in units shall be provided with a heavy-duty, non-conductive, industrial-duty, flange mounted
handle mechanism for control of each disconnect switch or circuit breaker
b.
Use of rotary operators is not acceptable
c.
The disconnect handle may pivot in the vertical or horizontal plane
d.
The ON-OFF condition shall be indicated by the handle position, red and green color indicator with
the words ON and OFF, and the international symbols 1 and 0 along with a pictorial indication of
the handle position
e.
Handles shall be capable of being locked in the OFF position with up to three (3) padlocks
f.
Plug-in units shall be provided with interlocks per NEMA and UL requirements
Pilot Devices
a.
Where specified, units shall be furnished with pushbutton, selector switches, or pilot lights as
shown on the Contract Documents
b.
Pilot devices shall be rated NEMA Type 4/13 water tight/oil tight
Terminal Blocks
a.
Control Terminal blocks shall be provided on all contactor and starter units. They shall be a pullapart design on all plug-in units for easy removal of the unit from the structure
b.
Control terminal blocks on non-plug-in contactor and starter units shall be fixed type
c.
Power terminal blocks shall be provided on all contactor and starter units, rated NEMA Size 3 (100
amperes) and below that utilize vertically operated disconnects
d.
Terminal blocks shall not be located adjacent to or inside the vertical wireway
Doors
a.
Each unit shall be provided with a removable door mounted on removable pin-type hinges
b.
The unit doors shall be capable of being opened at least 110 degrees
c.
The unit doors shall be removable from any location in the MCC without disturbing any other unit
doors
d.
The unit doors shall be fastened to the structure so it can be closed to cover the unit space when
the unit is removed
e.
The unit doors shall be held closed with quarter-turn latches
f.
Unit door latches shall be provided with arc resistant latches the help keep the door latched in the
event that an internal arcing fault occurs
Metering Compartment
1.
The MCC shall include a plug-in metering unit
2.
The unit shall include the following
3.
a.
Fusible disconnect with fuses. The disconnect must be operable with the unit door closed
b.
Fused control circuit transformer
c.
Current transformers shipped loose to be installed by the Contractor onto incoming power
conductors
d.
Solid-state power monitor with door mounted display
Power Monitor

04 February 2016
13 1609/ 7

STARTERS
a.
C.
The power monitor shall be capable of displaying the following:

1).
Line current for all three phases with plus or minus 0.2 percent full-scale accuracy
2).
Average three phase current with plus or minus 0.2 percent full-scale accuracy
3).
Line-to-neutral and line-to-line voltage with plus or minus 0.2 percent full-scale accuracy
4).
Current and voltage unbalance
5).
Real, reactive, apparent and true power with plus or minus 0.4 percent full-scale accuracy
6).
kWh, kVARh, and kVAHnet
7).
True RMS to the 45th harmonic
8).
Frequency at plus or minus 0.5 percent
9).
Power factor at plus or minus 0.4 percent
b.
The power monitor shall include min/max logs and trend logs with up to 45,867 data points
c.
The power monitor shall be capable of performing distortion analysis with THD, Crest Factor (I, V)
and Distortion power factor
d.
The power monitor shall include a communication port compatible with specified communication
option
e.
The power monitor shall include two (2) form-C relays
Disconnects
1.
2.
3.
Main Disconnect
a.
If no overcurrent protection is indicated, provide a main incoming-line lug compartment. Lugs to

accommodate the incoming power conductors as indicated on the Contract Documents
b.
Main Fusible Disconnect Switch (if specified in the Contract Documents) provide as per
Manufacturer specification
c.
Main Circuit Breaker Disconnect (if specified in the Contract Documents) provide as per
Manufacturer specification
Feeder Disconnects and Transformer Disconnects

a.
The disconnecting means for feeders and transformers shall be circuit breakers with thermalmagnetic trip units for 400 amps and smaller frames; provide an electronic trip unit for 600 amps
and larger frames
b.
The interrupting capacity rating shall meet or exceed the available fault current as shown in the
Contract Documents
c.
The minimum frame sizes shall be 150 amps
d.
Provide one (1) normally open and one (1) normally closed circuit breaker auxiliary contact which
follows the position of the circuit breaker main contacts for indication of ON or OFF/Tripped
Motor Starter Disconnect

a.
Electro-mechanical NEMA Starters

1).
The disconnecting means for the across the line starters shall be motor circuit protectors
2).
The unit short circuit rating shall be greater than or equal to the available fault current as
shown on the Contract Documents
3).
Units shall be supplied base upon the rules/requirements set for in the UL 845, NEMA ICS18, and NFPA 70
4).
Units shall be shipped as the motor circuit protector set as lowest setting per UL Standards.
The Contractor shall field adjust the units based upon the particular motor application

04 February 2016
13 1609/ 8

STARTERS
b.
D.
F.
The minimum frame size shall be 150 amps
6).
Provide one (1) normally open and one (1) normally closed circuit breaker auxiliary contact
which follows the position of the circuit breaker main contacts for indication of ON or
OFF/Tripped
Solid State Controllers (solid-state reduced voltage motor controllers (SSRV) and variable
frequency drives (VFD))
1).
The disconnecting means for solid-state controllers shall be fusible disconnect with current
limiting fuses
2).
The short circuit rating shall be 100,000 amps (RMS symmetrical)
Automatic Transfer Switch

1.
E.
5).
Provide if specified in the Contract Documents
Combination NEMA Rated Across The Line Starters

1.
Starters shall meet applicable NEMA and UL requirements
2.
Starters shall be minimum NEMA 1. Fractional NEMA sizes are not acceptable
3.
Starters shall be provided with a 3-pole solid state overload relay that includes the following features:
a.
Communication capability, which takes precedence over this overload requirement
b.
Selectable trip classes of 10, 15, 20, or 30
c.
Set for class 20 unless otherwise indicated on the Contract Documents
d.
Overload Protection
e.
Phase Loss Protection
f.
Trip Current adjustment range of 5:1
g.
Test/Reset Button
h.
Bipolar latching relay with one (1) normally open and one (1) normally closed contact, rated NEMA
B600 for use in motor contactor control circuits
i.
Thermal memory circuit to model the heating and cooling effects of motor ON and OFF periods
j.
If ground fault protection is required, it shall have selectable trip value between 20 mA and 5 A
4.
The starter shall be capable of accommodating up to six (6) contacts in addition to the hold-in contact
5.
Provide a control power transformer with a rated secondary voltage of 120 VAC. The control power
transformer shall be provided with primary and secondary fusing
6.
Overload relays shall have a reset button located on the outside of the unit door
7.
Provide a door mounted selector switch for HAND-OFF-AUTO operation. The HAND mode shall
provide local control at the MCC unit door. The AUTO mode shall provide control through a remote
contact
8.
Provide door mounted 120 VAC push-to-test pilot lights with LED lamps for ON (RED) and OFF
(GREEN) status indication
SSRV Motor Controllers

1.
2.
Type 1 SSRV Controller

a.
Integrated bypass contactor that is closed once the motor is up to full speed
b.
Electronic overload protection with adjustable trip class

04 February 2016
13 1609/ 9

STARTERS
3.
G.
c.
Four (4) programmable auxiliary contacts
d.
Selectable control capabilities: soft start, kick start, current limit start, dual ramp, full voltage, linear
speed, preset slow speed, soft stop
e.
Additional control capabilities, as available from specific Manufacturer
f.
LCD display
g.
Keypad programming for configuration
h.
Built-in, selectable protective functions for: overload, jam, stall, excessive starts per hour,
underload, over/under voltage, voltage unbalance
i.
Metering capabilities for: Current, voltage, kW, kWH, power factor, motor thermal capacity utilized,
elapse time
j.
Ground Fault protection (1 A to 5 A)
Type 2 SSRV Controller

a.
Integrated bypass contactor that is closed once the motor is up to full speed
b.
Electronic overload protection with adjustable trip class
c.
Selectable control capabilities: soft start, kick start, current limit start, soft stop
d.
Built-in, selectable protective functions for: overload, phase reversal, phase Loss/Open Load,
Phase imbalance, shorted SCR, SCR Over temperature
4.
Provide an input isolation contactor
5.
The Type 2 Unit shall be provided with line side protective modules. The modules shall contain
capacitors and metal oxide varistors (MOVs) that protect the internal power circuitry from severe
electrical transients and/or high electrical noise
6.
Provide door-mounted pilot devices as shown on the Contract Documents
7.
8.
Emergency run bypass contractor is required. Bypass shall be fully rated for the motor load and be
capable of starting the motor at full voltage. The emergency run bypass shall be provided with the
same type of solid-state overload relay protection as for the electromechanical starter units
VFD Motor Controller

1.
2.
Provide door-mounted pilot devices as shown on the Contract Documents
3.
4.
Provide a door-mounted human interface module for programming, display and control
5.
Provide on isolated, configurable analog input and output
6.
Provide additional Manufacturer recommended options for the application specified.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
DISCONNECT SWITCH INSTALLATION
A.
Clearly label Disconnects with the equipment served. Use 1/16 inch (2mm) thick laminated plastic
composition material with contrasting color core. Engraved lettering shall be 1/4 inch (6mm) high. Attach tags with
screws

04 February 2016
13 1609/ 10

STARTERS
B.
3.2
Install Disconnect Switch when motors are not in sight of the MCC.
MCC INSTALLATION
A.
The Contractor shall install the MCC in accordance with the Manufacturers instructions
B.
The Contractor shall tighten all accessible bus connections and mechanical fasteners to the
Manufacturers torque requirements
C.
The Contractor shall select and install all fuses in fusible switches based upon field requirements
D.
The Contractor shall adjust circuit breaker settings based upon field requirements
E.
The Contractor shall adjust solid state overloads to match the installed motor characteristics
F.
The Contractor shall provide field reports on tests performed, test values experienced, etc. and make the
report available to the Owner upon request
G.
The Contractor shall perform field adjustment of the short circuit and overload devices as required to place
the equipment in final operating condition. The settings shall be in accordance with the approved short circuit study,
protective device evaluation study, protective device coordination study, manufacturers instruction leaflet, and the
Contract Documents
H.
The Manufacturer of the MCC shall be capable of providing the programming for the PLC and the
operator interface, if provided with the MCC
I.
The Manufacturer shall be capable of providing start-up services as part of the supply of the MCC
J.
The Manufacturer shall provide training for the Operator, which covers concepts and knowledge to install,
troubleshoot the MCC and associated programming
K.
Clearly label MCC units with the equipment being served. Use 1/16 inch (2mm) thick laminated plastic
composition material with contrasting color core. Engraved lettering shall be 1/4 inch (6mm) high. Attach tags with
screws
END OF SECTION

04 February 2016
13 1609/ 11

STARTERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.
C.
1.2

1.
Raceways
2.
Wires and Cables
3.
Boxes
4.
Wiring Devices
5.
Supporting Devices and Hangers
Related Sections:
1.
SECTION 13 1601 WATER FEATURE GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
2.
SECTION 13 1608 WATER FEATURE LIGHTING AND CONTROLS
3.
SECTION 13 1609 WATER FEATURE DISCONNECTS, MCC, AND STARTERS
4.
SECTION 13 1611 WATER FEATURE GROUNDING
5.
SECTION 26 0000 ELECTRICAL
References:
1.
2.

A.
B.
Product Data: Submit Manufacturers literature, cut sheets indicating mounting instructions, sensor
dimensions, materials, electrical requirements, and operational parameters
C.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
RACEWAYS
A.
Conduit
1.
1/2 inch (15mm) minimum diameter unless indicated otherwise and used strictly as indicated by
product. If not indicated on the Contract Documents, size conduit for conductor type and quantity
installed
2.
Galvanized Rigid Steel or Galvanized Intermediate Metallic Conduit (IMC)

a.
3.
May be used in all areas
Galvanized Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT)

a.
May be used in indoor dry locations where it is:

1).
Not subject to damage
2).
Not in contact with earth

04 February 2016
13 1610/ 1

13 1610WATER FEATURE ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES
3).
4.
Schedule 40 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC)

a.
b.
5.
6.
2.2
1).
Underground
2).
In or below concrete
Use Galvanized Rigid Steel elbows and risers wrapped with approved protection tape
a.
3/4 inch (20mm) minimum
b.
Required for final connections to indoor mechanical equipment, length not to exceed 36 inches
(1m)
Listed, Liquid-Tight Flexible Metallic Conduit

Use in outdoor final connections to mechanical equipment, not to exceed 36 inches (1m) with
ground conductor
Fittings
1.
Compression type or set-screw type with steel housing for EMT conduits
2.
Screw-in type for flexible metal conduit
3.
Seal-Tite type for liquid-tight flexible metal conduit
4.
PVC Conduit
5.
C.
May only be used
Flexible Steel Conduit
a.
B.
Not in concrete
a.
PVC fittings shall be PVC type. Use PVC adapters at all boxes
b.
Brush applied PVC Cement
c.
All PVC components (conduit, fittings, cement) shall be from the same Manufacturer
Rigid and IMC conduit fittings shall be threaded and designed for conduit use
Prohibited Materials
1.
Aluminum Conduit
2.
Crimp-on, tap-on, indenter type fittings
3.
Malleable iron or cast set-screw fittings for EMT
4.
Spray (aerosol) PVC cement
5.
Type MC or AC Cable
6.
ENT Conduit
WIRES AND CABLES

A.
B.
Conductors
1.
Feeders in conduit and ducts shall be copper-type THW, THHN, or XHHW
2.
Branch circuits in conduit in dry locations shall be copper, minimum #12 AWG Type THHN
Connectors
1.
2.3
Type 512, 3M tapeless steel spring wire connectors or pressure type terminal lugs as specified in the
Contract Documents
BOXES
A.
Outlet Boxes

04 February 2016
13 1610/ 2

2.4
1.
Galvanized steel and correct size and shape
2.
Provide metal supports and other accessories for installation of each box
3.
Equip ceiling and bracket fixture boxes with fixture studs, where required
4.
No outlet box shall be smaller than 4 inches (100mm); for 1 inch (25mm) diameter conduit, boxes shall
be 4-11/16 inch (120mm) minimum
WIRING DEVICES
A.
Switches and Receptacles

1.
Switches are 20 ampere. Where higher ampere devices are required they shall be of the same series
as those listed. Devices of single type shall be of the same Manufacturer
2.
a.
B.
2).
Approved Equal
Receptacles are to be 15 amperes. Where higher ampere devices are required they shall be of the
same series as those listed. Devices of single type shall be of the same Manufacturer
2.
Approve Manufacturers
Receptacles
1).
Hubbell CR5252 Series
2).
Approved Equal
Ground Fault Receptacles

1).
Hubbell GF5352I
2).
Leviton 6899-I
3).
Pass & Seymour 2091-S-I
4).
Approved Equal
Weatherproof Receptacles
1.
Complete with corrosion resistant plate, spring lid cover, and weatherproof mats
2.
a.
Pass & Seymour WP-8
b.
Approved Equal
Plates
1.
2.5
Hubbell CS1221 Series
1.
b.
D.
1).
Receptacles
a.
C.
Switches
Metal covers shall be used for all surface-mounted boxes
SUPPORTING DEVICES AND HANGERS

A.
1.
Erico Products, Incorporated
2.
Steel City
3.
Minerallac
4.
Approved Equal

04 February 2016
13 1610/ 3

B.
Provide the appropriate supporting devices and hangers for electrical equipment from the following:
1.
2.
Beam Clamps
a.
Set-Screw Type
b.
Universal Clamps
c.
Vertical Flange Clamps (Beam Clamps)
Clips
a.
Conduit Clips
b.
Combination Push-in Conduit Clips
c.
Flexible Conduit Clips
d.
Special Combination Conduit Clips
e.
Z Purlin Clips
3.
Combination Conduit Hanger Clamps
4.
One Hole Steel Strap
5.
Minerallac Conduit Hangers
6.
Other Hangers or Supports per the discretion of the Engineer
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
RACEWAY INSTALLATION
A.
Keep all raceway runs a minimum of 6 inches (150mm) from hot water or vent lines
B.
Conduit in concrete slabs shall on exceed 3/4 inch (20mm) I.P. size and shall be spaced no closer than 8
inches (200mm) on center except at panel and junction boxes where they are to be spread as widely as possible;
special framing may be required where conduits enter a panel board
C.
Support conduit and boxes in an appropriate manner by:

1.
Expansion shields in concrete or solid masonry
2.
Toggle bolts on hollow masonry units
3.
Wood screws on wood
4.
Metal screw on metal
D.
Secure conduit with approved supports within 3 feet (1m) of every outlet box, junction box, gutter, panel,
fitting, etc. Do not space supports further apart than 10 feet (3m). Do not support conduit on suspended ceiling grid
(tile or sheet rock)
E.
Cap conduit ends during construction
F.
Clean or replace conduit in which water or foreign matter has accumulated
G.
Install insulated bushings on each end of conduit 1-1/4 inch (32mm) in diameter and larger
H.
Install grounding conductor in PVC conduit
I.
Bending of PVC shall be by hot box
J.
Route exposed conduit at right angles or parallel to walls of buildings and not as the crow flies. Neatly
rack parallel conduits together and make bends uniform to one another. Where installation is made inferior utilizing
poor practice contrary to these methods as determined by the Engineer, said installation will be removed and
reinstalled at the Contractors expense

04 February 2016
13 1610/ 4

K.
Coat buried Rigid or IMC Conduit with approved asphaltic compound or wrap with two layers of approved
corrosion protection tape
L.
Leave one (1) #10 or equivalent nylon pull wire in empty conduits
M.
When PVC conduit is used, turn up with Rigid Galvanized elbows and risers to provide equipment
grounding conductor in accordance with NEC, Article 250
N.
Cut and thread conduit so ends will butt in couplings. Make threads no longer than necessary and ream
pipe free of burrs
O.
3.2
Prohibited Procedures
1.
Use of wooden plugs inserted in concrete or masonry units as base for fastening conduits, tubing,
boxes, cabinets, or other equipment
2.
Installation of conduit or tubing that has been crushed or deformed
3.
Torches for bending PVC Conduit
WIRES AND CABLES INSTALLATION

A.
Install Conductors in Raceway
B.
Pulling Conductors
C.
1.
Do not pull Conductions into conduit until raceway system is complete and cabinets and outlet boxes
are free of foreign matter and moisture
2.
Do not use heavy mechanical means for pulling conductors
3.
Only wire pulling lubricant may be used
Conductors shall be continuous from outlet to outlet
D.
Making splices for Conductors #8 AWG and smaller with steel spring wire connections. Splice larger
conductors with Lock-Tite type silicon bronze type connectors. Insulated connections of #8 AWG wire and larger
with 3M #33 tape
E.
Run Conductors of different voltage systems in separate conduits
F.
Leave sufficient slack at terminations to make proper connections
G.
Conductor size #10 AWG and smaller shall be colored throughout. Color code Conductors as follows:
1.
2.
3.3
3.4
120/240 volts
a.
Black
Phase A
b.
Red
Phase B
c.
Green
Ground
d.
White
Neutral
Approved color tape is acceptable for feeders only
BOXES INSTALLATION
A.
Boxes shall be accessible and installed with appropriate cover
B.
Sectional boxes shall not be used in concrete
C.
Locate boxes so outlets are not obstructed by pipes, ducts, or other items
D.
Label all circuits and source panels on exterior of each junction box
WIRING DEVICES INSTALLATION
A.
Provide properly sized outlet boxes for all wiring devices of types specified for outlets and junction boxes in
04 February 2016
13 1610/ 5

B.
Properly wire all convenience outlets so that the hot wire, the neutral wire, and the ground wire connect to
the proper terminal on all receptacles
C.
Label source panel and circuit number on the back of all device cover plates
D.
Provide grounding jumper from device grounding terminal to metal back box
E.
not.
3.5
Provide GFI receptacles in areas as required by the NEC whether indicated on the Contract Documents or
SUPPORTING DEVICES AND HANGERS INSTALLATION
A.
Secure conduits to within 3 feet (1m) of each outlet box, junction box, cabinet, fitting, etc and at intervals
not exceeding 10 feet (3m)
B.
Install clamps secured to structure for feeder and other conduit routed against the structure. Use drop rods
and hangers to support conduits run apart from the structure
C.
Paint all supporting metal not otherwise protected, with rust inhibiting primer and then with a finish coat, if
appropriate to match the surrounding metal surfaces
D.
Use of chains, perforated iron, baling wire, rope, or tie wire for supporting conduit runs will not be permitted
END OF SECTION

04 February 2016
13 1610/ 6

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.

1.
B.
Furnish and install for entire electrical installation as specified below and described in the Contract
Documents:
a.
Separately Derived Systems
b.
Conduits and other conductor enclosures
c.
Neutral or identified conductor of interior wiring system
d.
Panel Boards and Control Panels
e.
Non-current-carrying metal parts of fixed equipment such as motors, starters and controller
cabinets, light fixtures, and other metal water feature accessories
Related Sections:
1.
SECTION 13 1202 WATER FEATURE STEEL REINFORCEMENT
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
SECTION 13 1506 WATER FEATURE UV STERILIZERS
7.
8.
SECTION 13 1508 WATER FEATURE HYDRONIC SYSTEMS
9.
SECTION 13 1509 WATER FEATURE CHILLERS
10. SECTION 13 1510 WATER FEATURE HEAT EXCHANGERS

11. SECTION 13 1511 VALVES, GAUGES, AND METERS
12. SECTION 13 1602 WATER FEATURE CONTROLS
13. SECTION 13 1605 WATER FEATURE CONTROL PANELS
14. SECTION 13 1607 WATER FEATURE PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLERS
15. SECTION 13 1609 WATER FEATURE MOTOR DISCONNECTS AND STARTERS
16. SECTION 13 1610 WATER FEATURE ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES
17. SECTION 26 0000 ELECTRICAL
C.
References:
1.
NFPA 70 National Electrical Code (NEC) Article 250 Grounding
2.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
COMPONENTS
A.
Size materials as shown on the Contract Documents and in accordance with all applicable codes

04 February 2016
13 1611/ 1

13 1611WATER FEATURE GROUNDING
B.
Grounding Conductors shall be bare copper or copper with green insulation
C.
Make grounding conductor connections to grounding electrodes and water pipes using approved bolted
clamps of bronze or brass designed for such use
D.
Concrete encases grounding electrode (UFER Ground): # 2/0 AWG bare copper conductor
E.
Insulated grounding bushings: Plated malleable iron body with 150 C molded plastic insulting throat, lay-in
grounding lug with hardened stainless steel fasteners
F.
Grounding Rods: Steel with copper welded exterior 3/4 inch (20mm) diameter by 10 inches (250mm) long
G.
Connections to structural steel, grounding rods, or splices: for splicing and/or connecting conductors, use
exothermic welds or high pressure compression type connectors. Provide exothermic weld kits manufactured by
Cadweld
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Pull ground conductors in all non-metallic raceways, flexible conduit, and liquid tight flexible conduit. Use
same size ground as phase conductors up through #10 AWG. Using NEC Table 250-66 for all others unless
otherwise on Contract Documents
B.
Provide bonding jumpers across expansion and deflection couplings in conduit runs, across pipe
connections at water meters, and across dielectric couplings in metallic cold water piping systems.
C.
Provide bonding jumpers from all wiring devices grounding terminals to metal back box.
D.
Provide grounding for water feature steel reinforcement and metal accessories and equal potential grid for
water feature decks as per NEC
END OF SECTION

04 February 2016
13 1611/ 2

13 1611WATER FEATURE GROUNDING

Division 13 Aquatic Specification

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Division 13 Aquatic Specification

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Division 13 Aquatic Specification

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ZULAL WELLNESS RESORT

Acceptable Bather Load Limits

Acceptable Flow Rates and Pipe Velocities

Required Turnover Rates

Acceptable Filter Flow Rates

Design Requirements for Bottom Drains

Design Requirements for Skimmers & Gutters

Design Requirements for Floor and Wall Inlet Jets

Design Requirements for Hydrotherapy Jets

Design Requirements for Salt Water Lagoon Fill System

10. Design Requirements for Salt Water Lagoon Overflow System

SECTION 13 1305 WATER FEATURE ACCESSORIES

SECTION 13 1401 WATER FEATURE PIPE AND FITTINGS

SECTION 13 1404 WATER FEATURE WHITE GOODS

SECTION 13 1502 WATER FEATURE PUMPS AND MOTORS

SECTION 13 1503 WATER FEATURE FILTERS

SECTION 13 1504 WATER FEATURE CHEMICAL FEED SYSTEMS

SECTION 13 1505 WATER FEATURE OZONE GENERATION AND INJECTION

SECTION 13 1507 WATER FEATURE HEATERS

SECTION 13 1510 WATER FEATURE HEAT EXCHANGERS

10. SECTION 13 1511 WATER FEATURE VALVES, GAUGES, AND METERS

Appendix D Water Feature Specification

Hyder Consulting Middle East Limited

ZULAL WELLNESS RESORT

12. SECTION 13 1601 WATER FEATURE GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS

Applicable Standards: The following standards are referenced herein.

PVC Pipe Institute

Uniform Swimming Pool, Spa, & Hot Tub Code

NFPA 70 National Electrical Code (NEC)

2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design

NTU: Nephelometric Turbidity Unit which is a means of measuring water clarity

SECTION 01 3300 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

Appendix D Water Feature Specification

Hyder Consulting Middle East Limited

ZULAL WELLNESS RESORT

POOL DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

Pool bather load shall be determined as follows:

Pool Recirculation Systems:

Gravity Line: 0.6 to 0.8 m/s (2.0 to 2.5 ft/s)

Direct Suction Line: 0.8 to 1.0 m/s (2.5 to 3.0 ft/s)

Pressurized Discharge Pipe: maximum 1.5 m/s (5.0 ft/s)

Water Level Control:

Water Treatment System:

Appendix D Water Feature Specification

Hyder Consulting Middle East Limited

ZULAL WELLNESS RESORT

Inlets and Drains

Meters and Instrumentation

Water Quality Control, Sanitation, Oxidation, and pH

Pool System Automation

Appendix D Water Feature Specification

Hyder Consulting Middle East Limited

ZULAL WELLNESS RESORT

Pool Shell Construction:

Pool Finishes and Markings:

Appendix D Water Feature Specification

Hyder Consulting Middle East Limited

ZULAL WELLNESS RESORT

Lighting and Grounding